Service Manual

MT85 Mini Track Loader

MT85 - S/N B3TR11001 & Above

EQUIPPED WITH
BOBCAT INTERLOCK
CONTROL SYSTEM (BICS™)
7274811enUS (01-17) (B) Printed in U.S.A. ©2017 Bobcat Company. All rights reserved.
T4-K
 MAINTENANCE SAFETY
Instructions are necessary before operating or servicing machine. Read and
understand the Operation & Maintenance Manual, Operator’s Handbook and
WARNING signs (decals) on machine. Follow warnings and instructions in the manuals
when making repairs, adjustments or servicing. Check for correct function after
adjustments, repairs or service. Untrained operators and failure to follow
instructions can cause injury or death. W-2003-0807

CORRECT

Safety Alert Symbol: This symbol with a warning statement,

means: “Warning, be alert! Your safety
is involved!” Carefully read the
message that follows.
P-90216

Never service the Bobcat Mini

Track Loader without instructions.

WRONG WRONG WRONG

B-23041 NA9783 NA9784

Have good ventilation when Disconnecting or loosening any Never work on loader with lift
welding or grinding painted hydraulic tubeline, hose, fitting, arms up unless lift arms are held
parts. component or a part failure can by an approved lift arm support
Wear dust mask when grinding cause lift arms to drop. Do not go device. Replace if damaged.
painted parts. Toxic dust and gas under lift arms when raised Never modify equipment or add
can be produced. unless supported by an attachments not approved by
Avoid exhaust fume leaks which approved lift arm support device. Bobcat Company.
can kill without warning. Exhaust Replace it if damaged.
system must be tightly sealed.

WRONG WRONG WRONG

NA9786
NA9785 NA9782 B-6589
Stop, cool and clean engine of Keep body, jewelry and clothing Lead-acid batteries produce
flammable materials before away from moving parts, flammable and explosive gases.
checking fluids. electrical contact, hot parts and Keep arcs, sparks, flames and
Never service or adjust loader exhaust. lighted tobacco away from
with the engine running unless Wear eye protection to guard batteries.
instructed to do so in the from battery acid, compressed Batteries contain acid which
manual. springs, fluids under pressure burns eyes or skin on contact.
Avoid contact with leaking and flying debris when engines Wear protective clothing. If acid
hydraulic fluid or diesel fuel are running or tools are used. contacts body, flush well with
under pressure. It can penetrate Use eye protection approved for water. For eye contact flush well
the skin or eyes. type of welding. and get immediate medical
Never fill fuel tank with engine Keep rear door closed except for attention.
running, while smoking or when service. Close and latch door
near open flame. before operating the loader.

Maintenance procedures which are given in the Operation & Maintenance Manual can be performed by the owner/
operator without any specific technical training. Maintenance procedures which are not in the Operation & Maintenance
Manual must be performed ONLY BY QUALIFIED BOBCAT SERVICE PERSONNEL. Always use genuine Bobcat
replacement parts. The Service Safety Training Course is available from your Bobcat dealer.
MSW45-1015

1-1 MT85 Service Manual

1-2 MT85 Service Manual
 CONTENTS

SAFETY AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-01

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-01

HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-01

DRIVE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-01

MAINFRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-01

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM AND ANALYSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-01

ENGINE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-01

SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPEC-01

ALPHABETICAL INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .INDEX-01

1-3 MT85 Service Manual

1-4 MT85 Service Manual
 FOREWORD

FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

FIRE PREVENTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Spark Arrester Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Welding And Grinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Fire Extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

SERIAL NUMBER LOCATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Mini Track Loader Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Engine Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

DELIVERY REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

MINI TRACK LOADER IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

1-5 MT85 Service Manual

1-6 MT85 Service Manual
 FOREWORD
This manual is for the Bobcat mini track loader mechanic. It provides necessary servicing and
adjustment procedures for a Bobcat mini track loader and its component parts and systems. Refer to
the Operation & Maintenance manual for operating instructions, starting procedure, daily checks, etc.
A general inspection of the following items must be made after the loader has had service or repair:
1. Check lift arm support device, 9. Check hydraulic fluid level,
replace if damaged. (Stored engine oil level and fuel
Position) supply.

2. Machine signs (decals) must 10. Inspect for fuel, oil or

be legible and in the correct hydraulic fluid leaks.
location.

3. Controls must return to 11. Lubricate the mini loader.

neutral.

4. Check for correct function of 12. Check the condition of the

the optional work lights. battery and cables.

5. The parking brake must 13. Inspect the air cleaner for
function correctly. damage or leaks. Check the
condition of the element.

6. Bob-Tach wedges and 14. Check the electrical charging

linkages must function system.
correctly and be in good
condition.

7. Safety treads must be in good 15. Check tracks for wear and
condition on the operator tension. Use only approved
platform. tracks.

8. Check for correct function of 16. Inspect for loose or broken

indicator lamps. parts or connections.

FW MT85-1115 SM

1-7 MT85 Service Manual

17. Check for any field 20. Check function or condition of
modification not completed. all equipped options and
accessories (examples:
shutdown kit, attachment
control kit, light kit, etc.).
18. Operate the machine and 21. Recommend to the owner
check all functions. that all necessary corrections
be made before the machine
is returned to service.

19. Check for correct function of

lift/tilt lockouts and neutral
start interlocks.

CALIFORNIA
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its
constituents are known to the state of California
to cause cancer, birth defects and other
reproductive harm.

FW MT85-1115 SM

1-8 MT85 Service Manual

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS The following publications provide information on the safe
use and maintenance of the Bobcat machine and
attachments:
Safety Alert Symbol
• The Delivery Report is used to assure that complete
This symbol with a warning statement means: instructions have been given to the new owner and
“Warning, be alert! Your safety is involved!” that the machine is in safe operating condition.
Carefully read the message that follows.
• The Operation & Maintenance Manual delivered with
the machine or attachment contains operating
information as well as routine maintenance and
service procedures. It is a part of the machine and can
WARNING be stored in a container provided on the machine.
Replacement Operation & Maintenance Manuals can
be ordered from your Bobcat dealer.
Instructions are necessary before operating or
servicing machine. Read and understand the • Machine signs (decals) instruct on the safe operation
Operation & Maintenance Manual and signs (decals) and care of your Bobcat machine or attachment. The
on machine. Follow warnings and instructions in the signs and their locations are shown in the Operation
manuals when making repairs, adjustments or & Maintenance Manual. Replacement signs are
servicing. Check for correct function after available from your Bobcat dealer.
adjustments, repairs or service. Untrained operators
and failure to follow instructions can cause injury or • The Service Manual and Parts Manual are available
death. from your dealer for use by mechanics to do shop-
W-2408-0801
type service and repair work.

• The Mini Loader Safety Video is available from your

Bobcat dealer or at Bobcat.com/training or
IMPORTANT Bobcat.com.

This notice identifies procedures which must be

followed to avoid damage to the machine.
I-2019-0284

DANGER
The signal word DANGER on the machine and in the
manuals indicates a hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
D-1002-1107

WARNING
The signal word WARNING on the machine and in the
manuals indicates a potentially hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious
injury.
W-2044-1107

SI ML-1016 SM

1-9 MT85 Service Manual

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS (CONT’D)

The dealer and owner / operator review the

recommended uses of the product when delivered. If the
owner / operator will be using the machine for a different
application(s) he or she must ask the dealer for
recommendations on the new use.

Cutting or drilling concrete containing sand or rock

containing quartz may result in exposure to silica dust.
Do not exceed Permissible Exposure Limits (PEL) to
silica dust as determined by OSHA or other job site Rules
and Regulations. Use a respirator, water spray or other
means to control dust. Silica dust can cause lung disease
and is known to the state of California to cause cancer.

Call Before You Dig

Dial 811 (USA Only)
1-888-258-0808 (USA & Canada)
When you call, you will be directed to a location in your
state / province, or city for information about buried lines
(telephone, cable TV, water, sewer, gas, etc.).

SI ML-1016 SM

1-10 MT85 Service Manual

FIRE PREVENTION Hydraulic System

Check hydraulic tubes, hoses and fittings for damage

and leakage. Never use open flame or bare skin to check
for leaks. Hydraulic tubes and hoses must be properly
routed and have adequate support and secure clamps.
Tighten or replace any parts that show leakage.

Maintenance Always clean fluid spills. Do not use gasoline or diesel

fuel for cleaning parts. Use commercial nonflammable
The machine and some attachments have components
solvents.
that are at high temperatures under normal operating
conditions. The primary source of high temperatures is
Fueling
the engine and exhaust system. The electrical system, if
damaged or incorrectly maintained, can be a source of
arcs or sparks.

Flammable debris (leaves, straw, etc.) must be removed

regularly. If flammable debris is allowed to accumulate, it
can cause a fire hazard. Clean often to avoid this
accumulation. Flammable debris in the engine
compartment is a potential fire hazard. Stop the engine and let it cool before adding fuel. No
smoking! Do not refuel a machine near open flames or
The operator’s area, engine compartment and engine sparks. Fill the fuel tank outdoors.
cooling system must be inspected every day and cleaned
if necessary to prevent fire hazards and overheating. Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) poses a greater static
ignition hazard than earlier diesel formulations with
All fuels, most lubricants and some coolants mixtures are higher Sulfur content. Avoid death or serious injury from
flammable. Flammable fluids that are leaking or spilled fire or explosion. Consult with your fuel or fuel system
onto hot surfaces or onto electrical components can supplier to ensure the delivery system is in compliance
cause a fire. with fueling standards for proper grounding and bonding
practices.
Operation
Starting
Do not use the machine where exhaust, arcs, sparks or
hot components can contact flammable material, Do not use ether or starting fluids on any engine that has
explosive dust or gases. glow plugs. These starting aids can cause explosion and
injure you or bystanders.
Electrical
Use the procedure in the Operation & Maintenance
Manual for connecting the battery and for jump starting.

Spark Arrester Exhaust System

The spark arrester exhaust system is designed to control

the emission of hot particles from the engine and exhaust
system, but the muffler and the exhaust gases are still
Check all electrical wiring and connections for damage. hot.
Keep the battery terminals clean and tight. Repair or
replace any damaged part or wires that are loose or Check the spark arrester exhaust system regularly to
frayed. make sure it is maintained and working properly. Use the
procedure in the Operation & Maintenance Manual for
Battery gas can explode and cause serious injury. Use cleaning the spark arrester muffler (if equipped).
the procedure in the Operation & Maintenance Manual
for connecting the battery and for jump starting. Do not
jump start or charge a frozen or damaged battery. Keep
any open flames or sparks away from batteries. Do not
smoke in battery charging area.
SI ML-1016 SM

1-11 MT85 Service Manual

FIRE PREVENTION (CONT’D)

Welding And Grinding

Always clean the machine and attachment, disconnect

the battery, and disconnect the wiring from the Bobcat
controllers before welding. Cover rubber hoses, battery
and all other flammable parts. Keep a fire extinguisher
near the machine when welding.

Have good ventilation when grinding or welding painted

parts. Wear dust mask when grinding painted parts.
Toxic dust or gas can be produced.

Dust generated from repairing nonmetallic parts such as

hoods, fenders or covers can be flammable or explosive.
Repair such components in a well ventilated area away
from open flames or sparks.

Fire Extinguishers

Know where fire extinguishers and first aid kits are

located and how to use them. Inspect the fire
extinguisher and service the fire extinguisher regularly.
Obey the recommendations on the instructions plate.

SI ML-1016 SM

1-12 MT85 Service Manual

SERIAL NUMBER LOCATIONS Engine Serial Number

Always use the serial number of the loader when Figure 2

requesting service information or when ordering parts.
Early or later models (identification made by serial
number) may use different parts, or it may be necessary
to use a different procedure in doing a specific service
operation.

Mini Track Loader Serial Number

Figure 1

P-81917

The engine serial number is located on the valve cover of

the engine [Figure 2].

DELIVERY REPORT

Figure 3

P124003B

The mini loader serial number plate is located on the

outside of the frame [Figure 1].

Explanation of Serial Number:

XXXX XXXXX

Module 2. - Production
Sequence (Series)

Module 1. - Model / Engine

Combination B-16315

1. The four digit Model / Engine Combination Module

number identifies the model number and engine The delivery report [Figure 3] contains a list of items that
combination. must be explained or shown to the owner or operator by
the dealer when the Bobcat mini loader is delivered.
2. The five digit Production Sequence Number identifies
the order which the mini loader is produced. The delivery report must be reviewed and signed by the
owner or operator and the dealer.

1-13 MT85 Service Manual

MINI TRACK LOADER IDENTIFICATION

HOOD

TILT
CYLINDER

LIFT
CYLINDER NA9777
FRONT AUXILIARY
QUICK COUPLERS

GRAB BAR
[1] BUCKET
INSTRUMENT PANEL
LIFT ARM
SUPPORT DEVICE
STORAGE POSITION

CONTROLS LIFT ARMS

OPERATOR
STATION

NA9778
CONTINUOUS FLOW REAR [2] TRACKS
SHUTOFF PEDAL DOOR

[1] BUCKETS - Several different buckets and other attachments are available for the Bobcat Mini Track Loader.
[2] TRACKS - Optional track widths are available.

1-14 MT85 Service Manual

 SAFETY AND MAINTENANCE

LIFTING AND BLOCKING THE MINI LOADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10-1

Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10-1
Four Point Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10-2

LIFT ARM SUPPORT DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20-1

Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20-1
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20-1

TRANSPORTING THE MINI LOADER ON A TRAILER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30-1

Loading And Unloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30-1
Fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30-1

TOWING THE MINI LOADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40-1

Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40-1

SERVICE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50-1

Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50-1

AIR CLEANER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60-1

Replacing Filter Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60-1

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70-1

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70-1
Checking Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70-1
Removing And Replacing Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70-2

FUEL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80-1

Fuel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80-1
Biodiesel Blend Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80-1
Filling The Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80-2
Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80-3
Removing Air From The Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80-3

ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90-1

Checking And Adding Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90-1
Engine Oil Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90-1
Removing And Replacing Oil And Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90-2

HYDRAULIC / HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100-1

Checking And Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100-1
Hydraulic / Hydrostatic Fluid Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100-1
Removing And Replacing Hydraulic / Hydrostatic Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100-2
Removing And Replacing Hydraulic Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100-2
Hydraulic Reservoir Breather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100-2

BOB-TACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-110-1
Inspection And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-110-1

10-01 MT85 Service Manual

COMMON INDUSTRY INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-111-1
Inspection And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-111-1

LUBRICATING THE MINI LOADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-120-1

Lubrication Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-120-1
Parking Brake Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-120-2

SPARK ARRESTER MUFFLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-130-1

Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-130-1

PIVOT PINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-140-1

Inspection And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-140-1

LIFT AND TILT FUNCTION LOCKOUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-150-1

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-150-1

LIFT ARM BYPASS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-160-1

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-160-1
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-160-1

NEUTRAL START INTERLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-170-1

Inspecting Traction Drive Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-170-1
Inspecting Auxiliary Hydraulic Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-170-1

AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-180-1

Inspecting the Continuous Flow Shutoff Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-180-1

10-02 MT85 Service Manual

LIFTING AND BLOCKING THE MINI LOADER

Procedure WARNING
MACHINE FALLING OR MOVING CAN CAUSE
WARNING SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
Put jackstands under the front and rear of the
machine before running engine for service.
Instructions are necessary before operating or W-2718-0208
servicing machine. Read and understand the
Operation & Maintenance Manual and signs (decals)
Figure 10-10-2
on machine. Follow warnings and instructions in the
manuals when making repairs, adjustments or
servicing. Check for correct function after
adjustments, repairs or service. Untrained operators
and failure to follow instructions can cause injury or
death.
W-2408-0801

Figure 10-10-1

P121687

Raise the front and rear of the machine and put

jackstands under each corner [Figure 10-10-2]. Lower
the machine to the jackstands.

NOTE: Make sure the jackstands do not touch the

tracks.
B-7023A

Read the Removal And Installation, Disassembly And

Assembly, etc. completely to become familiar with the
procedure before beginning [Figure 10-10-1].

Always park the loader on a level surface.

10-10-1 MT85 Service Manual

LIFTING AND BLOCKING THE MINI LOADER
(CONT’D)

Four Point Lift

Figure 10-10-3
REAR FRONT

P-48885E

The mini loader can be lifted using four attachment

points; two at the lower front of the mini loader frame and
two at the upper end of the uprights [Figure 10-10-3].

Be sure the lifting devices are of adequate strength to lift

the mini loader. For weight of mini loader (See (MT85)
MINI TRACK LOADER SPECIFICATIONS on Page
SPEC-10-1.)

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Never allow bystanders within 5 m (15 ft) while lifting
the machine.
W-2710-0910

10-10-2 MT85 Service Manual

LIFT ARM SUPPORT DEVICE Figure 10-20-2

Installing

WARNING 1
Never work on a machine with the lift arms up unless
the lift arms are secured by an approved lift arm
support device. Failure to use an approved lift arm 2
support device can allow the lift arms or attachment
to fall and cause injury or death.
W-2059-0598

P124108

WARNING Place the lift arm support device (Item 1) over the
hydraulic cylinder as shown in [Figure 10-20-2].

Repair the support device if damaged or if parts are Install the retaining pin (Item 2) [Figure 10-20-2] into the
missing. Using a damaged support device or with rear of the lift arm support device below the cylinder rod.
missing parts can cause lift arms or boom to fall
causing serious injury or death. Enter the operator station and start the engine.
W-2271-1007
Slowly lower the lift arms until movement stops.
Stop the loader on a flat, level surface. Engage the
Stop the engine.
parking brake.
Removing
Remove any attachment from the loader.
Remove the retaining pin (Item 2) [Figure 10-20-2] from
Start the engine, and raise the lift arms all the way up.
the lift arm support device.
Stop the engine and exit the operator station.
Start the engine and raise the lift arms off the lift arm
support device.
Figure 10-20-1
Stop the engine and exit the operator station.

Return the lift arm support device to the storage location

1 and secure it with the retaining pin (Item 1) [Figure 10-
20-1].

Enter the operator station and start the engine.

Lower the lift arms and stop the engine.

P124008

Remove the retainer pin (Item 1) [Figure 10-20-1] and

lower the lift arm support device from the storage
position.

10-20-1 MT85 Service Manual

10-20-2 MT85 Service Manual
TRANSPORTING THE MINI LOADER ON A TRAILER Fastening

Loading And Unloading Figure 10-30-2

FRONT REAR

WARNING
AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
Adequately designed ramps of sufficient strength are
needed to support the weight of the machine when
loading onto a transport vehicle. Wood ramps can Alternate Front
break and cause personal injury. Tie Down
W-2058-0807

Be sure the trailer or vehicle and ramps are of adequate

size and capacity. (See (MT85) MINI TRACK LOADER P-48425B
SPECIFICATIONS on Page SPEC-10-1.)

Figure 10-30-1 Fasten the mini track loader to the transport vehicle to
prevent it from moving during sudden stops or when
going up or down slopes [Figure 10-30-2].

• Lower the bucket or attachment fully.

• Stop the engine.

• Install chains at the front and rear tie down positions

[Figure 10-30-2]. (Both sides)

• Fasten each end of the chain to the transport vehicle.

1
NA9789 • Use load binders to tighten the chains.

A mini track loader with an empty bucket or no

attachment must be loaded backward onto the transport
vehicle [Figure 10-30-1].

When using adjustable ramps, be sure the ramp width

and spacing adequately covers the tread width. Do not
attempt to mount ramps that are spaced too wide or too
narrow.

The rear of the trailer must be blocked or supported (Item

1) [Figure 10-30-1] when loading or unloading the mini
track loader to prevent the front end of the trailer from
raising up.

10-30-1 MT85 Service Manual

10-30-2 MT85 Service Manual
TOWING THE MINI LOADER

Procedure

Because of the design of the mini loader, there is not a

recommended towing procedure.

• The mini loader can be lifted onto a transport vehicle.

• The mini loader can be skidded a short distance to

move for service (EXAMPLE: Move onto a transport
vehicle.) without damage to the hydrostatic system.
(The tracks will not turn.) There might be slight wear
to the tracks when the mini loader is skidded.

The towing chain (or cable) must be rated at 1.5 times

the weight of the mini loader. (See Performance on
Page SPEC-10-3.)

10-40-1 MT85 Service Manual

10-40-2 MT85 Service Manual
SERVICE SCHEDULE

Maintenance Intervals

Maintenance work must be done at regular intervals.

Failure to do so will result in excessive wear and early
failures. WARNING
The service schedule is a guide for correct maintenance
of the Bobcat mini track loader. AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Instructions are necessary before operating or
servicing machine. Read and understand the
Operation & Maintenance Manual, Operator’s
Handbook and signs (decals) on machine. Follow
warnings and instructions in the manuals when
making repairs, adjustments or servicing. Check for
correct function after adjustments, repairs or
service. Untrained operators and failure to follow
instructions can cause injury or death.
W-2003-0807

Every 10 Hours (Before Starting The Mini Track Loader)

• Engine Oil - Check level and add as needed.

• Engine Air Filters and Air System - Check air filter condition indicator. Service filters only when required. Check for
leaks and damaged components.
• Engine Cooling System - Clean debris from radiator and oil cooler areas. Check coolant level COLD and add
premixed coolant as needed.
• Fuel Filter - Drain water and sediment from filter.
• Hydraulic Fluid - Check fluid level and add as needed. Do not over fill.
• Lift Arms, Cylinders, Bob-Tach Pivot Pins & Wedges / CII Pivot Pins & Mounting Pins, Undercarriage Rollers
& Idlers - Lubricate with multipurpose lithium based grease.
• Reverse Stop Panel (If Equipped), Neutral Start Interlocks, and Lift / Tilt Lockouts Systems - Check for correct
function. Clean dirt and debris from moving parts.
• Parking Brake - Check for proper function.
• Indicators and Lights - Check for function. Clean or repair as needed.
• Safety Signs - Check for damaged signs (decals). Replace any signs that are damaged.
• General - Clean dirt and debris from the operator position. Check for loose or broken parts, instrument operation,
loose bolts or nuts, and oil leaks.
• Continuous Flow Shutoff System - Check for proper function.

Every 50 Hours

• Hydraulic Hoses and Tubelines - Check for damage and leaks. Repair or replace as needed.
• Controls - Check for correct operation. Adjust, repair or replace as needed.
• Undercarriage - Check for loose bolts and nuts.
• Track Tension - Check every 8 - 10 hours for the first 50 hours, then as scheduled. Check tension and adjust as
needed.

Every 100 Hours

• Engine Oil and Filter - Service at first 50 hours, then as scheduled. Replace oil and filter.
• Battery - Check battery for damage. Check cables, connections, and electrolyte level; add distilled water as needed.
• Drive Belts (Alternator / Water Pump / Fan Drive) - Check condition. Replace as needed.
• Spark Arrester Muffler - Clean spark chamber.
SS MTL-1015

10-50-1 MT85 Service Manual

SERVICE SCHEDULE (CONT’D)

Maintenance Intervals (Cont’d)

Every 250 Hours Or Every 12 Months

• Fuel Filter - Replace filter.

• Lift Arm Lockout - Check function of manual bypass control.

Every 500 Hours Or Every 12 Months

• Hydraulic Filter and Hydraulic Reservoir Breather Cap - Service filter at first 50 hours, then as scheduled. Replace
the hydraulic filter and the reservoir breather cap.
• Drive Belt (Hydrostatic) - Check condition. Adjust or replace as needed.
• Alternator and Starter - Service at first 50 hours, then as scheduled. Check connections.

Every 1000 Hours Or Every 12 Months

• Engine Valves - Service at first 500 hours, then as scheduled. Adjust the engine valve clearance.
• Hydraulic Fluid and Filters - Replace hydraulic fluid and filters.

Every 24 Months

• Coolant - Replace the coolant.

SS MTL-1015

10-50-2 MT85 Service Manual

AIR CLEANER SERVICE NOTE: Make sure all sealing surfaces are free of dirt
and debris. Do not use air pressure to clean.
Replacing Filter Elements
Install a new outer filter element.
It is important to change the air filter element at regular
Install the dust cover. Be sure the air cleaner valve (Item
intervals.
2) [Figure 10-60-2] is down. Turn the dust cover
For the correct interval (See SERVICE SCHEDULE on clockwise and engage the locking lever.
Page 10-50-1.)
Check the air intake hose and the air cleaner housing for
Figure 10-60-1 damage. Make sure all connections are tight.

4 Press the button (Item 4) [Figure 10-60-1] to remove the

1 red ring on the condition indicator.
2
Inner Filter

Only replace the inner filter under the following

conditions:

• Replace the inner filter every third time the outer filter
is replaced.

• After the outer filter has been replaced, press the

3 button (Item 4) [Figure 10-60-1] on the top of the
condition indicator and start the engine. Run at full
P-81883
rpm, then reduce engine speed and stop the engine.
If the red ring shows in the condition indicator, replace
Replace the Outer Filter only when the red ring shows in the inner filter.
the condition indicator window (Item 1) [Figure 10-60-1]. Figure 10-60-3
Replace the inner filter every third time the outer filter is
replaced or as indicated below.

Outer Filter
1
Pull up on the locking lever (Item 2) [Figure 10-60-1] and
hold while turning the dust cover (Item 3) [Figure 10-60-
1] counterclockwise.

Remove and clean the dust cover.

Figure 10-60-2

1 P-59546

Remove the dust cover, outer filter and inner filter.

NOTE: Make sure all sealing surfaces are free of dirt

and debris.

Install the new inner filter (Item 1) [Figure 10-60-3].

Install the outer filter.

Install the dust cover. Be sure the air cleaner valve (Item
2 P-77991 2) [Figure 10-60-2] is down. Turn cover clockwise 1/8
turn to engage the latch.
Remove the outer filter element (Item 1) [Figure 10-60-
Press the button (Item 4) [Figure 10-60-1] on the
2].
condition indicator to remove the red ring.

10-60-1 MT85 Service Manual

10-60-2 MT85 Service Manual
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM Figure 10-70-2

Check the cooling system every day to prevent over- 1

heating, loss of performance or engine damage.

Cleaning

Open the hood [Figure 10-70-2].

Figure 10-70-1

3
2
1

P-59556
P-59554B

Remove screen covers (Item 1) [Figure 10-70-1] from Raise the hood (Item 1) [Figure 10-70-2].
both sides of the machine.
Check coolant level in the recovery tank (Item 2) [Figure
Use low air pressure or water pressure to clean the 10-70-2].
radiator through the side screens.
Remove the cap (Item 3) [Figure 10-70-2] from the
Install screen covers. recovery tank.

Close and latch the hood. Add premixed coolant to the recovery tank until it is at the
MAX level.

WARNING
AVOID INJURY
Use safety goggles when using air or water under
pressure. Do not use cold water to clean a hot
engine.
W-2064-0907

Checking Level

Check the cooling system every day to prevent over-

heating, loss of performance or engine damage.

Make sure the engine is cool.

10-70-1 MT85 Service Manual

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM (CONT'D) Figure 10-70-4

Removing And Replacing Coolant

Raise the hood.

WARNING
AVOID BURNS 1
Do not remove radiator cap when the engine is hot.
You can be seriously burned.
W-2070-1203

P-48523A
Figure 10-70-3

1 Connect a hose to the engine block drain valve (Item 1)

[Figure 10-70-4] on the right side of the engine.

Open the valve and drain the coolant into a container.

After the coolant is removed, close the drain valve and
remove the hose.

Recycle or dispose of coolant in an environmentally safe

manner.
2
NOTE: The loader is factory filled with propylene
glycol coolant (purple color). DO NOT mix
propylene glycol other coolant types.
P124018

Slowly remove the radiator cap (Item 1) [Figure 10-70-3]

when the engine is cool.
IMPORTANT
Loosen the thumb nut and turn the access cover (Item 2)
[Figure 10-70-3] open. AVOID ENGINE DAMAGE
Always use the correct ratio of water to antifreeze.

Too much antifreeze reduces cooling system

efficiency and may cause serious premature engine
damage.

Too little antifreeze reduces the additives which

protect the internal engine components; reduces the
boiling point and freeze protection of the system.

Always add a premixed solution. Adding full strength

concentrated coolant can cause serious premature
engine damage.
I-2124-0497

10-70-2 MT85 Service Manual

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM (CONT'D)

Removing And Replacing Coolant (Cont’d)

Mix new coolant in a separate container. (See Capacities

on Page SPEC-10-4.)

One gallon and one pint (4,3 L) of propylene glycol mixed

with one gallon (3,8 L) of water is the correct mixture of
coolant (47% water and 53% propylene glycol) to provide
a -37°C (-34°F) freeze protection.

Figure 10-70-5

1
2

P124018

Add premixed coolant, to the radiator. Install the radiator

cap (Item 1) [Figure 10-70-5].

Add premixed coolant to the coolant recovery tank (Item

2) [Figure 10-70-5].

Use a refractometer to check the condition of propylene

glycol in your cooling system.

Run the engine until it is at operating temperature. Stop

the engine. Check the coolant level when cool. Add
coolant as needed.

Close the hood.

10-70-3 MT85 Service Manual

10-70-4 MT85 Service Manual
FUEL SYSTEM Biodiesel Blend Fuel

Fuel Specifications Biodiesel blend fuel has unique qualities that should be
considered before using in this machine:
NOTE: Contact your local fuel supplier to receive
recommendations for your region. • Cold weather conditions can lead to plugged fuel
system components and hard starting.
U.S. Standard (ASTM D975)
• Biodiesel blend fuel is an excellent medium for
Use only clean, high quality diesel fuel, Grade Number microbial growth and contamination which can cause
2-D or Grade Number 1-D. corrosion and plugging of fuel system components.

Ultra low sulfur diesel fuel must be used in this machine. • Use of biodiesel blend fuel may result in premature
Ultra low sulfur is defined as 15 mg/kg (15 ppm) sulfur failure of fuel system components, such as plugged
maximum. fuel filters and deteriorated fuel lines.

The following is one suggested blending guideline that • Shorter maintenance intervals may be required, such
should prevent fuel gelling during cold temperatures: as cleaning the fuel system and replacing fuel filters
and fuel lines.
TEMPERATURE GRADE 2-D GRADE 1-D
• Using biodiesel blended fuels containing more than
Above -9°C (+15°F) 100% 0% five percent biodiesel can affect engine life and cause
Down to -21°C (-5°F) 50% 50% deterioration of hoses, tubelines, injectors, injector
Below -21°C (-5°F) 0% 100% pump and seals.

Apply the following guidelines if biodiesel blend fuel is

NOTE: Biodiesel blend fuel may also be used in this
used:
machine. Biodiesel blend fuel must contain
no more than five percent biodiesel mixed
• Ensure the fuel tank is as full as possible at all times
with ultra low sulfur petroleum based diesel.
to prevent moisture from collecting in the fuel tank.
This biodiesel blend fuel is commonly
marketed as B5 blended diesel fuel. B5
• Ensure that the fuel tank cap is securely tightened.
blended diesel fuel must meet ASTM
specifications.
• Biodiesel blend fuel can damage painted surfaces,
remove all spilled fuel from painted surfaces
E.U. Standard (EN590)
immediately.
Use only clean, high quality diesel fuel that meets the
• Drain all water from the fuel filter daily before
EN590 specifications listed below:
operating the machine.
• Ultra low sulfur diesel fuel defined as 10 mg/kg (10
• Do not exceed engine oil change interval. Extended
ppm) sulfur maximum
oil change intervals can cause engine damage.
• Diesel fuel with cetane number of 51.0 and above.
• Before vehicle storage; drain the fuel tank, refill with
100% petroleum diesel fuel, add fuel stabilizer and
NOTE: Biodiesel blend fuel may also be used in this
run the engine for at least 30 minutes.
machine. Biodiesel blend fuel must contain
no more than seven percent biodiesel mixed
NOTE: Biodiesel blend fuel does not have long term
with ultra low sulfur petroleum based diesel.
stability and should not be stored for more
This biodiesel blend fuel is commonly
than three months.
marketed as B7 blended diesel fuel. B7
blended diesel fuel must meet EN590
specifications.

10-80-1 MT85 Service Manual

FUEL SYSTEM (CONT’D) Figure 10-80-2

Filling The Fuel Tank WRONG

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Stop and cool the engine before adding fuel. NO
SMOKING! Failure to obey warnings can cause an
explosion or fire.
W-2063-0807

B-23043

WARNING Use a clean, approved safety container to add fuel of the

correct specifications. Add fuel only in an area that has
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH free movement of air and no open flames or sparks. NO
Always clean up spilled fuel or oil. Keep heat, flames, SMOKING! [Figure 10-80-2].
sparks or lighted tobacco away from fuel and oil.
Failure to use care around combustibles can cause Install and tighten the fuel fill cap (Item 1) [Figure 10-80-
explosion or fire. 1].
W-2103-0508
Close and latch hood.
Be sure engine is cool then open the hood.

NOTE: Lift arms must be lowered, or fully raised with

lift arm support device installed before
opening the hood.

Figure 10-80-1

P-81882

Open the hood.

Remove the fuel fill cap (Item 1) [Figure 10-80-1].

10-80-2 MT85 Service Manual

FUEL SYSTEM (CONT’D) Engine and muffler must be cool before beginning.
Fuel Filter
Figure 10-80-4
See the Service Schedule for the service interval for
removing water from, or replacing the fuel filter. (See
SERVICE SCHEDULE on Page 10-50-1.)

Removing Water
Figure 10-80-3

1
P124013A

Loosen the thumb nut and open the access cover on the
right side of the machine [Figure 10-80-4].

Operate the hand pump (priming bulb) (Inset) [Figure

10-80-4] until the hand pump feels solid.
P124013B

Start the engine. It may be necessary to operate the

Loosen the thumb nut and open the access cover on the hand pump again to get the engine started.
right side of the machine [Figure 10-80-3].
If the engine still fails to start, you might need to loosen
Loosen the drain (Item 1) [Figure 10-80-3] at the bottom the vent on the top of the fuel filter while cranking the
of the filter to remove water from the filter. Tighten the engine.
drain.
Figure 10-80-5
Replacing Element
Remove the filter element (Item 2) [Figure 10-80-3].
Clean the area around the filter housing. Put clean oil on HOLE
the seal of the new filter element. Install the fuel filter
element and hand tighten.

Removing Air From The Fuel System

After replacing the filter or when the fuel tank has run out
of fuel, the air must be removed from the fuel system
before starting the engine.
2
1

WARNING P-59616B

AVOID INJURY OR DEATH Open the hood.

Diesel fuel or hydraulic fluid under pressure can The fuel filter (Item 1) [Figure 10-80-5] is located under
penetrate skin or eyes, causing serious injury or the air cleaner mounting bracket.
death. Fluid leaks under pressure may not be visible.
Use a piece of cardboard or wood to find leaks. Do Use a screwdriver (Item 2) [Figure 10-80-5] through the
not use your bare hand. Wear safety goggles. If fluid hole in the bracket to loosen the vent.
enters skin or eyes, get immediate medical attention
from a physician familiar with this injury. Crank the engine until it starts.
W-2072-0807
Tighten the vent and close the hood.

10-80-3 MT85 Service Manual

10-80-4 MT85 Service Manual
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM Engine Oil Chart

Checking And Adding Engine Oil Install the dipstick and close the hood.

Check the engine oil level every day before starting the Figure 10-90-2
engine for the work shift.
ENGINE OIL
Figure 10-90-1 RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY NUMBER
(LUBRICATION OILS FOR DIESEL ENGINE
CRANKCASE)

P-81881A

Open the engine cover and remove the dipstick (Item 1)

[Figure 10-90-1].
TEMPERATURE RANGE ANTICIPATED BEFORE
Keep the oil level between the marks on the dipstick NEXT OIL CHANGE (DIESEL ENGINES MUST USE API
[Figure 10-90-1]. CLASSIFICATION CI-4 OR BETTER)
[1] Synthetic Oil - Use recommendation from Synthetic
Oil Manufacturer.

Use good quality engine oil that meets API Service

Classification of CI-4 or better [Figure 10-90-2].

10-90-1 MT85 Service Manual

ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM (CONT’D) Figure 10-90-4

Removing And Replacing Oil And Filter 1

For the service interval for replacing the engine oil and
filter. (See SERVICE SCHEDULE on Page 10-50-1.) 2

Figure 10-90-3
3
1

P-59541B

Open the hood (Item 1). Loosen the thumb nut and open
the access cover (Item 2) [Figure 10-90-4] on the left
side of the machine.

P-48526A Remove the oil filter (Item 3) [Figure 10-90-4] (located

under the alternator) and clean the filter housing surface.

Remove the access cover (Item 1) [Figure 10-90-3] and Put clean oil on the oil filter gasket. Install the filter and
route the oil drain hose to a container at the front of the hand tighten.
machine.

Remove the cap from the drain hose (Item 2) [Figure 10-
90-3] and drain the oil. Dispose of the used oil in an
environmentally safe manner.
WARNING
Install cap on the drain hose and push the hose back into AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
the machine. Never service or adjust the machine when the engine
is running unless instructed to do so in the manual.
Install the access cover. W-2012-0497

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Always clean up spilled fuel or oil. Keep heat, flames,
sparks or lighted tobacco away from fuel and oil.
Failure to use care around combustibles can cause
explosion or fire.
W-2103-0508

10-90-2 MT85 Service Manual

ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM (CONT’D)

Removing And Replacing Oil And Filter (Cont’d)

Figure 10-90-5

P-81883

Remove the fill cap (Item 1) [Figure 10-90-5].

Put oil in the engine. (See Capacities on Page SPEC-10-

4.) (See Engine Oil Chart on Page 10-90-1.)

Install the fill cap.

Start the engine and let it run for several minutes.

Stop the engine and check for leaks at the oil filter.

Remove the dipstick and check the oil level.

Add oil as needed if it is not at the top mark on the

dipstick.

Install the dipstick and close the hood.

Close the side access cover.

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Always clean up spilled fuel or oil. Keep heat, flames,
sparks or lighted tobacco away from fuel and oil.
Failure to use care around combustibles can cause
explosion or fire.
W-2103-0508

10-90-3 MT85 Service Manual

10-90-4 MT85 Service Manual
HYDRAULIC / HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM Hydraulic / Hydrostatic Fluid Chart

Checking And Adding Fluid Figure 10-100-2

Use only recommended fluid in the hydraulic system. HYDRAULIC / HYDROSTATIC FLUID
(See (MT85) MINI TRACK LOADER SPECIFICATIONS RECOMMENDED ISO VISCOSITY GRADE (VG)
on Page SPEC-10-1.). AND VISCOSITY INDEX (VI)

Stop the loader on a level surface. Lower the lift arms and
tilt the attachment interface fully back.

Set the parking brake, stop the engine, and open the rear
door.

Figure 10-100-1

TEMPERATURE RANGE ANTICIPATED

2 DURING MACHINE USE
[1] VG 100; Minimum VI 130
[2] VG 46; Minimum VI 150
[3] BOBCAT All-Season Fluid
[4] BOBCAT Synthetic Fluid
1 [5] BOBCAT Biodegradable Hydraulic / Hydrostatic
Fluid (Unlike biodegradable fluids that are vegetable
based, Bobcat biodegradable fluid is formulated to
prevent oxidation and thermal breakdown at operating
temperatures.)
P124014B
Use only recommended fluid in the hydraulic system
[Figure 10-100-2]. (See Hydraulic System on Page
Check the fluid level in the sight gauge (Item 1) [Figure SPEC-10-4.)
10-100-1]. The correct level is at the center of the sight
gauge.

Clean the area around the fill cap (Item 2) [Figure 10-
100-1]. Add fluid until the correct hydraulic fluid level is
reached.

Install the fill cap. Be sure rubber gasket is installed

(Inset) [Figure 10-100-1].

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Diesel fuel or hydraulic fluid under pressure can
penetrate skin or eyes, causing serious injury or
death. Fluid leaks under pressure may not be visible.
Use a piece of cardboard or wood to find leaks. Do
not use your bare hand. Wear safety goggles. If fluid
enters skin or eyes, get immediate medical attention
from a physician familiar with this injury.
W-2072-0807

10-100-1 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC / HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM (CONT’D) Removing And Replacing Hydraulic Fluid

Removing And Replacing Hydraulic / Hydrostatic For the service interval (See SERVICE SCHEDULE on
Filter Page 10-50-1.)

Figure 10-100-3 The fluid must be replaced if it becomes contaminated or

after major repairs. If the fluid is replaced, the hydraulic
filter must be replaced.

Remove the reservoir fill cap (Item 2) [Figure 10-100-3].

Put a suction hose into the fill tube to remove the
hydraulic fluid.

Replace the hydraulic filter (Item 1) [Figure 10-100-3].

2
Add the correct fluid to the reservoir until the fluid level is
1 visible in the reservoir sight glass (Item 3) [Figure 10-
100-3] (Do not overfill). Install fill cap.
3
Start the engine and operate the hydraulic controls. Stop
the engine and check for leaks.
P124014

Check the fluid level in the reservoir and add as needed.

For the correct service intervals (See SERVICE
SCHEDULE on Page 10-50-1.)

Open the rear door. WARNING

Place a suitable container under the filter to catch any
fluid. Hydraulic fluid escaping under pressure can have
sufficient force to enter a person’s body by
Remove the filter (Item 1) [Figure 10-100-3]. penetrating the skin. This can cause serious injury
and possible death if proper medical treatment by a
Clean the surface of the filter housing where the seal physician familiar with this injury is not received
contacts the housing. immediately.
W-2145-0290
Put clean oil on the seal of the new filter.

Install and hand tighten the filter.

Start the engine and operate the hydraulic controls. Stop WARNING
the engine and check for leaks.
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Check the hydraulic fluid level is visible in the sight glass Always clean up spilled fuel or oil. Keep heat, flames,
(Item 3) [Figure 10-100-3] and add as necessary. sparks or lighted tobacco away from fuel and oil.
Failure to use care around combustibles can cause
Close the rear door.
explosion or fire.
W-2103-0508

Hydraulic Reservoir Breather

The reservoir fill cap (Item 2) [Figure 10-100-3] is also

the hydraulic breather. Replace the breather cap
according to the interval given. (See SERVICE
SCHEDULE on Page 10-50-1.)

10-100-2 MT85 Service Manual

BOB-TACH Figure 10-110-2

Inspection And Maintenance

Bob-Tach
Wedge

WARNING
Bob-Tach wedges must extend through the holes in
attachment. Lever(s) must be fully down and locked.
Failure to secure wedges can allow attachment to
come off and cause injury or death.
W-2102-0497 Wedge Must Contact
Lower Edge Of Hole In
The Attachment P-30904A
Figure 10-110-1

The wedges must extend through the holes in the

attachment mounting frame [Figure 10-110-2].

The spring loaded wedge must contact the lower edge of

the hole in the attachment [Figure 10-110-2].

If the wedge does not contact the lower edge of the hole
[Figure 10-110-2], the attachment will be loose and can
come off the Bob-Tach.

Figure 10-110-3

P-48412

Move the Bob-Tach levers to engage and disengage the

wedges [Figure 10-110-1]. The levers and wedges must
move freely.

B-17460

Inspect the mounting frame on the attachment and the

Bob-Tach, linkages and wedges for excessive wear or
damage [Figure 10-110-3]. Replace any parts that are
damaged, bent, or missing. Keep all fasteners tight.

Look for cracked welds.

Lubricate the wedges. (See SERVICE SCHEDULE on

Page 10-50-1.) (See LUBRICATING THE MINI LOADER
on Page 10-120-1.)

10-110-1 MT85 Service Manual

10-110-2 MT85 Service Manual
COMMON INDUSTRY INTERFACE Figure 10-111-2

Inspection And Maintenance

2
Bob-Tach
Wedge

WARNING
The Common Industry Interface locking pins must
extend through the holes in attachment frame.
Levers must be fully down and locked. Failure to
secure the locking pins can allow attachment to
come off and cause serious injury or death. Wedge Must Contact 1
1
W-2996-1015 Lower Edge Of Hole In
The Attachment P124037
P-30904A
P124036

Figure 10-111-1
P124036 The pins (Item 1) must extend through the holes in the
attachment mounting frame (Item 2) [Figure 10-111-2].
1
If the pin does not fully engage the attachment mounting
2
frame hole [Figure 10-111-2], the attachment will be
loose and can come off the interface.

Figure 10-111-3

P-48412

Move the Common Industry Interface (CII) levers (Item 1)

to engage and disengage the locking pins (Item 2)
[Figure 10-111-1]. The levers and pins must move freely.

P124025

Inspect the mounting frame on the attachment and the

Common Industry Interface, linkages, springs, and pins
for excessive wear or damage [Figure 10-111-3].
Replace any parts that are damaged, bent, or missing.
Keep all fasteners tight.

Inspect for cracked welds.

Lubricate the pins. (See SERVICE SCHEDULE on Page

10-50-1.) (See LUBRICATING THE MINI LOADER on
Page 10-120-1.)

10-111-1 MT85 Service Manual

10-111-2 MT85 Service Manual
LUBRICATING THE MINI LOADER Figure 10-120-3

Lubrication Locations

Lubricate the loader as specified for the best

performance of the mini loader. (See SERVICE
SCHEDULE on Page 10-50-1.)

Record the operating hours each time you lubricate the

Bobcat Mini Loader.

Always use a good quality lithium based multi-purpose

grease. Apply lubricant until extra grease shows.
5
Lubricate the following locations:
P-48550
Figure 10-120-1

2 5. Tilt Cylinder Rod End [Figure 10-120-3].

Figure 10-120-4

P124024
3 P124022

1
P124023
7
P124013
6
P-48549
1. Lift Cylinder Rod End (Both Sides) [Figure 10-120-1].

2. Lift Cylinder Base End (Both Sides) [Figure 10-120- 6. Bob-Tach Pivot Pin (Both Sides) [Figure 10-120-4] (If
1]. equipped).
3. Lift Arm Pivot (Both Sides) [Figure 10-120-1]. 7. Bob-Tach Wedge (Both Sides) [Figure 10-120-4] (If
equipped).
Figure 10-120-2

P124010

4. Tilt Cylinder Base End [Figure 10-120-2].

10-120-1 MT85 Service Manual

LUBRICATING THE MINI LOADER (CONT’D) Parking Brake Lubrication

Figure 10-120-5 Figure 10-120-6

8 8

9
9
P124025

P-48555

8. Common Industry Interface Pivot Pin (Both Sides)

[Figure 10-120-5] (If equipped).
Lubricate the parking brake pin (Item 1) [Figure 10-120-
6] with anti-seize compound only.
9. Common Industry Interface Locking Pin (Both Sides)
[Figure 10-120-5] (If equipped).
Move the parking brake lever back and forth to spread
the lubricant over the entire pin area.

Repeat the lubrication for the parking brake pin on the

other side.

10-120-2 MT85 Service Manual

SPARK ARRESTER MUFFLER

Cleaning Procedure
WARNING
For service interval for cleaning the spark arrester
muffler. (See SERVICE SCHEDULE on Page 10-50-1.)
Never use machine in atmosphere with explosive
Do not operate mini loader with a defective exhaust dust or gases or where exhaust can contact
system. flammable material. Failure to obey warnings can
cause injury or death.
W-2068-1285

WARNING Start the engine.

Wear safety goggles. Hold a block of wood over the outlet
Stop engine and allow the muffler to cool before of the muffler (with the engine running) for about 10
cleaning the spark chamber. Wear safety goggles. seconds.
Failure to obey can cause serious injury. This will force contaminants out through the clean-cut
W-2011-1285
hole.
Stop the engine and install the plug. Install the side
access cover and close the hood.

WARNING
WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
When an engine is running in an enclosed area, fresh When the engine is running during service, the
air must be added to avoid concentration of exhaust steering lever and hydraulic control levers must be in
fumes. If the engine is stationary, vent the exhaust neutral and the parking brake engaged.
outside. Exhaust fumes contain odorless, invisible W-2484-1003
gases which can kill without warning.
W-2050-0807

Stop the engine and open the hood.

Figure 10-130-1
IMPORTANT
This machine is factory equipped with a U.S.D.A.
Forestry Service approved spark arrester exhaust
system.

The spark arrester muffler, if equipped, must be

2 cleaned to keep it in working condition. The spark
arrester muffler must be serviced by dumping the
spark chamber every 100 hours of operation.

On some models, the turbocharger functions as the

spark arrester and must operate correctly for proper
spark arrester function.
1
If this machine is operated on flammable forest,
P-81879B
brush, or grass covered land, it must be equipped
with a spark arrester attached to the exhaust system
Open the side access cover (Item 1) [Figure 10-130-1]. and maintained in working order. Failure to do so will
be in violation of California State Law, Section 4442.
Remove the plug from the bottom of the muffler (Item 1) PRC. Refer to local laws and regulations for spark
[Figure 10-130-1]. arrester requirements.
I-2284-0111

10-130-1 MT85 Service Manual

10-130-2 MT85 Service Manual
PIVOT PINS

Inspection And Maintenance

Figure 10-140-1

P-45406

All lift arm and cylinder pivots have a large pin held in
position with a retainer and bolt (Item 1) [Figure 10-140-
1].

Check that the bolts are tightened to 24 - 27 N•m (18 - 20

ft-lb) torque.

10-140-1 MT85 Service Manual

10-140-2 MT85 Service Manual
LIFT AND TILT FUNCTION LOCKOUTS

Inspection WARNING
1. Stand on the Operator Platform and start the engine.
The Neutral Start Interlock, Auxiliary Hydraulic
2. Raise the lift arms about 914 mm (3 ft) off the ground. Interlock, and Lift / Tilt Lockouts must function
properly.
3. Turn the key OFF and wait for the engine to come to • The Neutral Start Interlock must prohibit the
a complete stop. Engage the parking brake. engine from cranking when the Drive / Steering
Joystick is not in the NEUTRAL position.
4. Make sure the area around the machine is clear of • The Auxiliary Hydraulic Interlock must prohibit
bystanders. the engine from cranking when the Auxiliary
Hydraulic Control Lever is not in the center
Figure 10-150-1 position.
• The Lift / Tilt Lockouts must deactivate the lift
and tilt functions when engine is off.
1
If any of these do not function properly, contact your
dealer for service. DO NOT modify system.
W-2998-1015

P116999

5. Move the Lift Arm / Tilt Joystick forward to lower the

lift arms (Item 1) [Figure 10-150-1]. The lever must
not move and the lift arms must not lower.

6. Move the Lift Arm / Tilt Joystick right to tilt the bucket
(or attachment) forward (Item 2) [Figure 10-150-1].
The lever must not move and the bucket must not tilt
forward.

10-150-1 MT85 Service Manual

10-150-2 MT85 Service Manual
LIFT ARM BYPASS CONTROL Inspection

Operation Figure 10-160-2

The lift arm bypass switch is used to lower the lift arms 1
when the engine is not running.

Figure 10-160-1

2
P116999

1. Stand at the operator station, start the engine and

raise the lift arms about 914, mm (3 ft) off the ground.
P124069 Stop the engine. Engage the parking brake.

2. Make sure the area around the machine is clear of

Press and hold the lift arm bypass switch (Item 1) [Figure
bystanders.
10-160-1].
3. Press and hold the switch for the lift arm bypass (Item
Move the Lift / Tilt Joystick (Item 2) [Figure 10-160-1]
1) [Figure 10-160-2].
forward to lower the lift arms.
4. Move the Lift Arm / Tilt Joystick forward slightly (Item
2) [Figure 10-160-2]. The lift arms should slowly
lower.

10-160-1 MT85 Service Manual

10-160-2 MT85 Service Manual
NEUTRAL START INTERLOCKS Inspecting Auxiliary Hydraulic Interlock

Inspecting Traction Drive Interlock 1. Stop the engine, engage the parking brake (Item 1)
[Figure 10-170-1] and place all controls in
Figure 10-170-1 NEUTRAL.
4 1 2. Make sure the area around the machine is clear of
3
bystanders.

3. Set the engine speed lever (Item 2) [Figure 10-170-

1] to slow.

4. Push and hold the Auxiliary Hydraulic Control Lever

forward (Item 4) [Figure 10-170-1] and turn the key
switch to START position.
2
5. The starter must not engage.

6. Repeat procedure with the Auxiliary Hydraulic Control

P124070 Lever pulled backward.

NOTE: If any of the controls in these previous

1. Stop the engine, engage the parking brake (Item 1) inspection procedures do not function
[Figure 10-170-1] and place all controls in properly (See NEUTRAL START SENSOR on
NEUTRAL. Page 60-60-1.) AND / OR (See CONTINOUS
FLOW SHUTOFF SYSTEM SENSOR on Page
2. Make sure the area around the machine is clear of 60-70-1.) DO NOT modify the system.
bystanders.

3. Set the engine speed to slow (Item 2) [Figure 10-170-

1].
WARNING
4. Partially move the Drive / Steering Joystick (Item 3)
[Figure 10-170-1] in the forward direction and turn the The Neutral Start Interlock, Auxiliary Hydraulic
key switch to START position. Interlock, and Lift / Tilt Lockouts must function
properly.
5. The starter must not engage. • The Neutral Start Interlock must prohibit the
engine from cranking when the Drive / Steering
6. Repeat procedure with the Drive / Steering Joystick Joystick is not in the NEUTRAL position.
being moved in the backward direction. • The Auxiliary Hydraulic Interlock must prohibit
the engine from cranking when the Auxiliary
7. Repeat procedure with the Drive / Steering Joystick Hydraulic Control Lever is not in the center
being moved in the right direction. position.
• The Lift / Tilt Lockouts must deactivate the lift
8. Repeat procedure with the Drive / Steering Joystick and tilt functions when engine is off.
being moved in the left direction. If any of these do not function properly, contact your
dealer for service. DO NOT modify system.
W-2998-1015

10-170-1 MT85 Service Manual

10-170-2 MT85 Service Manual
AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEM 1. Stop the engine and engage the parking brake (Item
1) [Figure 10-180-1].
Inspecting the Continuous Flow Shutoff Pedal
2. Make sure the area around the machine is clear of
Figure 10-180-1
bystanders.
3
5 3. Set the engine speed to slow (Item 2) [Figure 10-180-
1].

4. Turn the key (Item 3) [Figure 10-180-1] to the ON

position but DO NOT start the engine.
1
5. Stand on the Operator Platform and depress the
Continuous Flow Shutoff Pedal (Item 4) [Figure 10-
180-1].
2
6. Move the Auxiliary Hydraulic Control Lever (Item 5)
P116999 [Figure 10-180-1] fully forward into the locked
(DETENT) position.

7. Release the Continuous Flow Shutoff Pedal (Item 4)

[Figure 10-180-1].

8. The Auxiliary Hydraulic Control Lever (Item 5) [Figure

4 10-180-1] must return to the NEUTRAL position in
approximately one to three seconds.

9. Repeat the procedure with the Auxiliary Hydraulic

Control Lever (Item 5) [Figure 10-180-1] fully
P124071
backward into the locked (DETENT) position.

10-180-1 MT85 Service Manual

10-180-2 MT85 Service Manual
 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10-1

Glossary Of Hydraulic / Hydrostatic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10-1
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10-5

CYLINDER (LIFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-20-1

Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-20-1
Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-20-2
Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-20-3
Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-20-4

CYLINDER (TILT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-21-1

Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-21-1
Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-21-2
Rod End Pivot Pin Bushing And Seal Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-21-3
Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-21-4
Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-21-5

MAIN RELIEF VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-30-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-30-1
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-30-1
Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-30-3

PORT RELIEF VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40-1

Testing (Lift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40-1
Removal And Installation (Lift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40-3
Testing (Tilt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40-4
Removal And Installation (Tilt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40-6

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-50-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-50-1
Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-50-1
Identification Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-50-4
Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-50-5

HYDRAULIC PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-60-1

Direct Pump Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-60-1
Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-60-3
Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-60-4
Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-60-5

HYDRAULIC / HYDROSTATIC FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-70-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-70-1
Housing Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-70-1

HYDRAULIC FLUID RESERVOIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-80-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-80-1
Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-80-1

20-01 MT85 Service Manual

OIL COOLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-90-1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-90-1
Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-90-1

20-02 MT85 Service Manual

 HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC

MT85 (S/N B3TR11001 AND ABOVE)

(PRINTED NOVEMBER 2015)
V-1037legend

LEGEND
1 RESERVOIR:
Capacity . . . 10 L (10,6 qt) (DRY)

2 HYDRAULIC PUMPS - Gear Type

45,5 L/min (12.0 gpm) at High Engine RPM

3 LOAD CHECK VALVE

4 ORIFICE 1,5 mm (0.059 in)

5 RELIEF VALVE - PORT (WITH ANTIC VITATION VALVE)

See factory bench setting table for calibrated valve settings.

6 RELIEF VALVE - MAIN

See factory bench setting table for calibrated valve settings.

7 FILTER - HYDRAULIC (CANISTER)

8 RELIEF VALVE - Charge Pressure

5,9 bar ( 85 psi)

9 SWITCH - Charge Pressure - Normally Open

10 RELIE LENISHING VALVE

138 bar ( 2000 psi)
11 VA IABLE CAPACITY DISPLACEMENT
BIDIRECTIONAL HYDROSTATIC PUMP

12 FIXED CAPACITY DISPLACEMENT

BIDIRECTIONAL HYDRAULIC/
3
HYDROSTATIC MOTOR (24 in. /Rev.)
13 HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE
SWITCH . . . . . . 108-111 degrees C
(225-232 degrees F)
FACTORY BENCH SETTING
PRESSURE FLOW
5 175 bar (2540 psi) 10 L/min (2.6 gpm)

6 200 bar (2900 psi) 40 L/min (10.5 gpm)

NOTE: Unless otherwise specified

springs have NO significant
pressure value.

Printed in U.S.A. V-1037legend (10-20-15)

 DRIVE MOTOR DRIVE MOTOR

HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC 12 12

MT85 (S/N B3TR11001 AND ABOVE)

Printable Version Click Here WORKING CIRCUIT
HYDROSTATIC PUMP HYDROSTATIC PUMP
(PRINTED NOVEMBER 2015) PILOT CIRCUIT
V-1037
11
11 DRAIN CIRCUIT

COMPONENTS

10 10 10 10

LIFT CYLINDERS

TILT CYLINDER

FRONT AUXILIARY
QUICK COUPLERS

FEMALE MALE
(BOTTOM) (TOP)

WORKGROUP
CONTROL VALVE
A1 B1 A2 B2 A3 B3

5 5 5

HYDRAULIC PUMP 3 3 3 HYDRAULIC

7 FILTER
OIL COOLER
P
1
C4

HYDRAULIC TANK

2 CHARGE
6 13
TILT PRESSURE 9
AUXILIARY
CYLINDER
SPOOL
SPOOL LIFT CYLINDER
SPOOL

V-1037 (10-20-15)
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM INFORMATION

Glossary Of Hydraulic / Hydrostatic Symbols

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

FLOW LINES and CONNECTIONS BASIC and MISCELLANEOUS SYMBOLS

WORKING CIRCUITS - Continuous, RESTRICTION - Line with Fixed

Solid Line - Working (Main) Line, Restriction - Affected by Viscosity
Return Line (line conducting fluid (property of resistance to flowing
from working devices to the reservoir) fluid).
and Feed line (main line conductor).
VARIABLE ADJUSTMENT
RESTRICTION - Regulated or
Variable Restriction.
PILOT PRESSURE - Dashed Line -
Pilot Line (Line which conducts TEMPERATURE CONTROL -
control fluid). (Indication of temperature).

DRAIN CIRCUITS - Dotted Line -

TEMPERATURE INDICATOR -
Drain Line (drain or bleed line - line
(temperature measurement -
conducting fluid from a component
thermometer).
housing to the reservoir.
FILTER (strainer or screen) - For fluid
conditioning.
COMPONENTS - Long Chain Line -
Enclosure outline for several
components assembled in one unit. VENTED AND FILTERED
RESERVOIR (reservoir open to
atmosphere).
MECHANICAL CONNECTIONS -
Double Line (Shaft, Lever, Piston
Rod). PRESSURIZED, VENTED AND
FiLTERED RESERVOIR (Reservoir
uses a pressured cap).
CONNECTED JUNCTION OF OIL
LINES (Flow Line Connection). OIL COOLER (heat exchanger) - The
arrows in the diamond indicate the
extraction of heat (heat dissipation).

OIL LINES CROSSING (NOT PRESSURE SENSOR - Varies

Connected). electric signal with pressure.

DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
COUPLER - Quick - Acting Coupling SWITCH - Switch activates when
(uncoupled, closed by non-return pressure difference reaches specified
valve). level.

PRESSURE SWITCH - Switch

activates when pressure reaches
specified level.

MUFFLER (silencer) - Reduces

noise.

20-10-1 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM INFORMATION (CONT’D)

Glossary Of Hydraulic / Hydrostatic Symbols (Cont’d)

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

CYLINDER: Equipment to convert hydraulic energy into CONTROL MECHANISMS

linear energy and in which the fluid pressure operates
alternately in both directions (forward and backward CONTROL VALVE WITH DETENT
strokes). (Holds Valve in Position) - device for
maintaining a given position
DOUBLE ACTING HYDRAULIC (mechanical).
CYLINDER, UNEQUAL
DISPLACEMENT - With single piston CONTROL VALVE ACTIVATED BY A
rod. PULL BUTTON (manual).

DOUBLE ACTING HYDRAULIC

CYLINDER, UNEQUAL CONTROL VALVE ACTIVATED BY A
DISPLACEMENT and CUSHION ON PUSH-PULL BUTTON (manual).
ONE END - With single piston rod.

CONTROL VALVE ACTIVATED BY A

LEVER (manual).
PUMP: To convert mechanical energy into hydraulic
energy.
CONTROL VALVE ACTIVATED BY A
PEDAL (manual).
FIXED CAPACITY DISPLACEMENT
HYDRAULIC PUMP - With one
direction of flow.
CONTROL VALVE WITH SPRING
RETURN (mechanical).
VARIABLE CAPACITY
DISPLACEMENT BIDIRECTIONAL
HYDRAULIC PUMP - With two CONTROL VALVE ACTIVATED BY
directions of flow (bidirectional). AN ELECTRIC SOLENOID
(electrical).

MOTOR: To convert hydraulic energy into rotary CONTROL VALVE ACTIVATED BY A

mechanical energy. PROPORTIONAL ELECTRICAL
SOLENOID (electrical).

FIXED CAPACITY DISPLACEMENT CONTROL VALVE ACTIVATED BY

BIDIRECTIONAL HYDRAULIC DUAL ELECTRICAL SOLENOID
MOTOR - With two directions of flow (electrical).
(bidirectional.
CONTROL VALVE ACTIVATED BY
PILOT PRESSURE (indirect control,
pilot actuated by application of
pressure).

20-10-2 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM INFORMATION (CONT’D)

Glossary Of Hydraulic / Hydrostatic Symbols (Cont’d)

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

NON-RETURN VALVE, SHUTTLE VALVE: Valve which DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVE: Valve providing for the
allows free flow in one direction only. opening (fully or restricted) or the closing of one or more
flow paths (represented by several squares).

NON-RETURN VALVE (Check Valve) TWO PORTS and CLOSED FLOW

OUT IN - Used as Replenishing Valve, Lock PATHS
Check Valve or Anticavitation Valve -
Opens if the Inlet pressure is higher
than the Outlet pressure. Often SOLENOID ACTIVATED
contains internal spring which has NO DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVE
significant pressure value. (Two Position) - controlled by an
electric solenoid (with return spring).
SPRING LOADED VALVE (bypass
OUT IN Valve) - Opens if the Inlet pressure is PILOT ACTIVATED DIRECTIONAL
greater than the Outlet pressure plus CONTROL VALVE (Two Position) -
the spring pressure. controlled by pressure (with return
spring).
PILOT CONTROLLED NON-
RETURN VALVE- It is possible to MANUALLY ACTIVATED DIRECTION
open the valve by pilot pressure. CONTROL VALVE (Variable Position)
T
OUT IN
Joystick Controlled, variable pressure
P
to shift the pilot activated directional
control valve spool.
SHUTTLE VALVE - The Inlet port
IN IN connected to the higher pressure is
OUT
automatically connected to the Outlet MANUALLY ACTIVATED FLOW
port while the other Inlet port is CONTROL VALVE (Two Position)
closed. allows for changing pilot flow to
ST

O
IS
D

FRONT

BACK
control switching joystick functions for
STD / ISO Control (Excavators Only).

STEERING CONTROL VALVE

(Variable Position) - Used for
controlling the hydraulic flow for the
steering cylinders in relationship to
the amount the steering wheel is
rotated.

20-10-3 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM INFORMATION (CONT’D)

Glossary Of Hydraulic / Hydrostatic Symbols (Cont’d)

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE: Valve ensuring the MISCELLANEOUS

control of pressure.
ACCUMULATOR - Supplies
RELIEF VALVE - When the Inlet temporary reserve pressure to the
pressure overcomes the opposing hydraulic system when the engine
IN OUT
force of the spring, the valve opens has been stopped.
permitting flow from the Outlet port.

RELIEF / REPLENISHING VALVE or

RELIEF / ANTICAVITATION VALVE -
When the Inlet pressure overcomes
IN OUT
the opposing force of the spring, the
valve opens permitting flow from the
Outlet port - Allows free flow in the
opposite direction.

DUAL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE -

When the Inlet pressure overcomes
IN OUT
the opposing force of the spring, the
valve opens permitting flow from the
Outlet port. Pilot pressure provides a
second pressure value.

LOCK VALVE - hydraulic pressure is

applied to open the valve to allow the
hydraulic cylinder to move.

FLOW CONTROL VALVE: Valve controlling the flow in

one or both directions.

ONE WAY RESTRICTOR VALVE

(Non-Return Valve with Restriction) -
Unit allowing free flow in one direction
but restricted flow in the other
direction.

TOW VALVE - Normally in closed

position.

LOAD SENSE BLEED VALVE -

Regulates small amount of fluid flow
(leakage).

20-10-4 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM INFORMATION (CONT’D)

Troubleshooting

KEY TO CORRECT THE CAUSE

1. The hydraulic fluid level is low or air in the system.
2. The control lever linkage is disconnected.
3. The hydraulic pump has damage.
4. The control lever does not have smooth movement and / or is not returning to neutral position.
5. Relief valve is not at the correct pressure.
6. Suction leak on the inlet side of the hydraulic pump.
7. Fluid is cold. Wrong viscosity fluid. (See (MT85) MINI TRACK LOADER SPECIFICATIONS on Page SPEC-10-1.)
8. Using the loader for more than its rated capacity.
9. Internal leak in the cylinder(s).
10. External leak from the cylinder(s).
11. Damaged lift spool.
12. Excessive auxiliary hydraulics load.
13. Plugged oil cooler. (Air flow restricted)
14. Loose mounting hardware.
15. Lift or tilt lockout circuit or engine or pressure switch circuit failure.
16. Tilt or drive function over relief.
17. Spool not fully stroked.
18. Activate auxiliary control lever in both directions to release pressure.
19. Loose or damaged gear pump to engine coupler. (See Troubleshooting on Page 60-10-5.)
20. Electric cooling fan not operating.
21. Check Charge Pressure Relief setting

NOTE: The orifice between the lift and auxiliary valve

sections provides flow to the auxiliary while
the lift is being actuated. The lift function will
be reduced at low flow conditions such as low
engine speed.

* Engine OFF - Always engage parking brake.

20-10-5 MT85 Service Manual

20-10-6 MT85 Service Manual
CYLINDER (LIFT) If there is leakage from the open base end port of the lift
cylinder, remove the lift cylinder for repair.
Testing
Attach tubeline before testing the other lift cylinder.
Fully lower the lift arms.
Figure 20-20-2
Stop the engine.

Engage the park brake.

Hold down the lift arm bypass switch and move the lift
lever back and forth to release the hydraulic pressure. 2

WARNING
Hydraulic fluid escaping under pressure can have
sufficient force to enter a person’s body by
penetrating the skin. This can cause serious injury
P121688
and possible death if proper medical treatment by a
physician familiar with this injury is not received
immediately. Disconnect the hose (Item 1) [Figure 20-20-2] from the
W-2145-0290
right lift cylinder base end port fitting at the main control
valve.
Figure 20-20-1
Install a cap on the fitting (Item 2) [Figure 20-20-2] at the
main control valve and tighten the cap.

Start the engine, run at high idle, and push the lift lever
1 forward and until system relief pressure is reached. DO
NOT PUSH THE JOYSTICK INTO THE FLOAT
POSITION.

There should be no oil leaking from the hose from the

base end port.

If there is leakage from the hose on the open base end

port of the lift cylinder, remove the right lift cylinder for
repair.
P121692

Check only one cylinder at a time.

Disconnect the tubeline (Item 1) [Figure 20-20-1] from

the left lift cylinder base end port fitting.

Install a plug in the tubeline and tighten the plug.

Start the engine, run at high idle, and push the joystick
forward until system relief pressure is reached. DO NOT
PUSH THE JOYSTICK INTO THE FLOAT POSITION.

There should be no oil leaking from the fitting from the

base end port on the cylinder.

20-20-1 MT85 Service Manual

CYLINDER (LIFT) (CONT'D) Figure 20-20-5

Removal And Installation

Engage the park brake.

Figure 20-20-3

P121690

Remove the retainer screw, retainer, and the base pin

(Item 1) [Figure 20-20-5] from the lift cylinder and
mainframe.
P-31750 P-31749
Installation: Tighten the screw to 20 - 27 N•m (15 - 20 ft-
lb) torque. Ensure the retainer is seated in the groove of
Raise the lift arms and install jackstands under the lift the lift cylinder base pin (Item 1) [Figure 20-20-5].
arms [Figure 20-20-3].
Pull the cylinder away from the frame as far as it will
Pull the lift arm bypass control knob and move the lift allow, and lower the rod end of the cylinder to the track.
lever back and forth to release the hydraulic pressure.
Figure 20-20-6
Figure 20-20-4

P121692
P121689

Mark the hoses for correct installation.

Remove retainer screw, retainer, and the rod pin (Item 1)
[Figure 20-20-4] from the lift cylinder. Disconnect the hoses (Item 1) [Figure 20-20-6] from the
lift cylinder.
Installation: Tighten the screw to 20 - 27 N•m (15 - 20 ft-
lb) torque. Ensure the retainer is seated in the groove of Remove the cylinder from the loader.
the lift cylinder rod pin (Item 1) [Figure 20-20-4].

20-20-2 MT85 Service Manual

CYLINDER (LIFT) (CONT'D)

Parts Identification

14

15

14

15

2
5
4
3
16

9
10
11

12
8
1. Case
2. Nut 7
3. Piston
4. Seal 13
5. O-ring
6. Quad Seal
7. O-ring*
8. Back-up Ring*
9. Rod Seal
10. O-ring
11. Head
12. Wiper Seal
13. Rod
14. Plug
15. O-ring
16. Spacer

* 7 and 8 were replaced by a one-piece seal. 

See parts manual for replacement parts. NA9848S

20-20-3 MT85 Service Manual

CYLINDER (LIFT) (CONT'D) Figure 20-20-8

Disassembly And Assembly

2 3
Figure 20-20-7
1

P-59268

Remove the head and the rod assembly from the cylinder
P-59267 [Figure 20-20-8].

Put the rod end in a vise.

Use the following tools to disassemble and assemble the
cylinder: Remove the nut (Item 1), piston (Item 2) and head (Item
3) [Figure 20-20-8].
MEL1074 - O-ring Seal Hook
MEL1396 - Seal Installation Tool Installation: Lift: Tighten the nut to 407 N•m (300 ft-lb)
MEL1033 - Rod Seal Installation Tool torque. Apply light grease to the piston before assembly.
Piston Ring Compressor
Spanner Wrench Figure 20-20-9

Hold the hydraulic cylinder over a drain pan and move the
rod in and out slowly to remove the fluid from the cylinder. 3

Put the base end of the cylinder in a vise.

2
Use a spanner wrench to loosen the head [Figure 20-20- 1
7].

Assembly: Tighten the head [Figure 20-20-7] to 271

N•m (200 ft-lb) torque.

P-59269

Remove the seal (Item 1) and O-ring (Item 2) from the

piston (Item 3) [Figure 20-20-9].

20-20-4 MT85 Service Manual

CYLINDER (LIFT) (CONT'D) Figure 20-20-12

Disassembly And Assembly (Cont'd)

Figure 20-20-10

1
2

P7424

Install the new seal on the tool and slowly stretch it until it
fits the piston [Figure 20-20-12].
P-59270

Allow the seal to stretch for 30 seconds before installing it

Remove the thick O-ring (Item 1) and the back-up washer on the piston.
(Item 2) from the groove in the head. Remove the thin O-
ring (Item 3) [Figure 20-20-10]. Use a ring compressor to compress the seal to the
correct size. Leave the piston in the compressor for about
NOTE: O-ring (Item 1) and back-up ring (Item 2) three minutes.
[Figure 20-20-10] were replaced by a one-
piece seal. Use the version currently supplied Figure 20-20-13
through parts.

Figure 20-20-11

2
1

P7427

P-59271
Install the rod seal on the rod seal tool [Figure 20-20-13].

NOTE: During installation, the spring side of the seal

Remove the wiper seal (Item 1), and the rod seal (Item 2)
must be toward the inside of the cylinder.
[Figure 20-20-11].

Wash the cylinder parts in solvent and air dry them. Rotate the handles to collapse the rod seal.

Inspect the cylinder parts for nicks, scratches or other

damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Always install new O-rings and seals during assembly.

Lubricate all O-rings and seals with hydraulic oil during

installation.

20-20-5 MT85 Service Manual

CYLINDER (LIFT) (CONT'D)

Disassembly And Assembly (Cont'd)

Figure 20-20-14

P7425

Install the rod seal in the head [Figure 20-20-14].

Install the wiper seal with the wiper toward the outside of
the head.

Assemble the cylinder(s) in the reverse order.

20-20-6 MT85 Service Manual

CYLINDER (TILT) Figure 20-21-2

Testing

Fully lower the lift arms and roll the Bob-Tach back fully.

Engage the park brake.

Stop the engine.

1

WARNING
Hydraulic fluid escaping under pressure can have
P124074
sufficient force to enter a person’s body by
penetrating the skin. This can cause serious injury
and possible death if proper medical treatment by a Start the engine and move the joystick (Item 1) to the left
physician familiar with this injury is not received until relief pressure is reached [Figure 20-21-2].
immediately.
W-2145-0290
Figure 20-21-3

Figure 20-21-1

P-45994

P-48031
There should be no oil leaking from the open base end
port (Item 1) [Figure 20-21-3].
Disconnect the hose (Item 1) [Figure 20-21-1] from the
tilt cylinder base end port. If there is leakage from the open base end port of the tilt
cylinder, remove the tilt cylinder for repair.
Install a plug in the hose and tighten the plug.

20-21-1 MT85 Service Manual

CYLINDER (TILT) (CONT’D) Figure 20-21-6

Removal And Installation

Tilt the Bob-Tach fully forward until it rests on the floor.

Stop the engine, and engage the park brake. 1

Figure 20-21-4

P-48031
1

Remove the hoses (Item 1) [Figure 20-21-6] from the tilt

cylinder fittings.

3 Figure 20-21-7

P-31878
2

Remove the screw (Item 1) and retainer (Item 2) [Figure

20-21-4] from the Bob-Tach.
1
Installation: Tighten the screw to 24 - 27 N•m (18 - 20 ft-
lb) torque.

Remove pivot pin (Item 3) [Figure 20-21-4] from the Bob-

Tach.

Figure 20-21-5
P-48030

Remove the screw (Item 1) and retainer (Item 2) [Figure

20-21-7] from the base end of the tilt cylinder.

1 Installation: Tighten the screw to 24 - 27 N•m (18 - 20 ft-

lb) torque.

P-48032

Remove the two screws (Item 1) and the shield bracket

(Item 2) [Figure 20-21-5].

Installation: Tighten the screws to 20 - 27 N•m (15 - 20

ft-lb) torque.

20-21-2 MT85 Service Manual

CYLINDER (TILT) (CONT’D) Rod End Pivot Pin Bushing And Seal Removal And
Installation
Removal And Installation (Cont’d)
Figure 20-21-9
Figure 20-21-8

1
1

N-18556
P-31882

Remove the rod end of the cylinder from the Bob-Tach.

NOTE: Support the tilt cylinder before removing pivot (See Removal And Installation on Page 20-21-2.)
pin.
Use a seal pick to remove the seals (Item 1) [Figure 20-
Remove the pivot pin (Item 1) [Figure 20-21-8] from the 21-9] on both sides of the pivot bushing.
tilt cylinder base end and the lift arm frame.
Figure 20-21-10
Remove the tilt cylinder from the loader.

N-18555

Remove and replace bushing with a driver tool and

hammer [Figure 20-21-10].

Reverse the removal procedure to install the pivot pin

bushing and seals.

20-21-3 MT85 Service Manual

CYLINDER (TILT) (CONT'D)

Parts Identification

3
2

4
5
6 2
3
7

10
11
12
13

1. Case 14
2. O-ring
3. Plug
4. Nut 8*
5. Seal 9*
15
6. O-ring
7. Piston 16
8. O-ring *
9. Seal *
10. Quad Seal
11. Rod Seal
12. O-ring
13. Head
14. Wiper Seal
15. Rod
16. Wear Bushing
17. Seal
* 8 and 9 were replaced by a one-piece seal. 
See parts manual for replacement parts.
NA9849S

20-21-4 MT85 Service Manual

CYLINDER (TILT) (CONT'D) Figure 20-21-12

Disassembly And Assembly

2 3
Use the following tools to disassemble and assemble the
cylinder: 1

MEL1074 - O-ring Seal Hook

MEL1396 - Seal Installation Tool
MEL1033 - Rod Seal Installation Tool
Piston Ring Compressor
Spanner Wrench

Hold the hydraulic cylinder over a drain pan and move the
rod in and out slowly to remove the fluid from the cylinder.
P-59273
Figure 20-21-11

Remove the head and the rod assembly from the cylinder
[Figure 20-21-12].

Put the rod end in a vise.

Remove the nut (Item 1), piston (Item 2) and head (Item
3) [Figure 20-21-12].

Installation: Tilt: Tighten the nut to 407 N•m (300 ft-lb)

torque. Apply light grease to the piston before assembly.

Figure 20-21-13

P-59272
3

Put the base end of the cylinder in a vise. 2

1
Use a spanner wrench to loosen the head [Figure 20-21-
11].

Assembly: Tighten the head [Figure 20-21-11] to 373

N•m (275 ft-lb) torque.

P-59274

Remove the seal (Item 1) and O-ring (Item 2) from the

piston (Item 3) [Figure 20-21-13].

20-21-5 MT85 Service Manual

CYLINDER (TILT) (CONT'D) Figure 20-21-16

Disassembly And Assembly (Cont'd)

Figure 20-21-14

2 3
1

P7424

Install the new seal on the tool and slowly stretch it until it
fits the piston [Figure 20-21-16].
P-59275

Allow the seal to stretch for 30 seconds before installing it

Remove the thick O-ring (Item 1) and the back-up washer on the piston.
(Item 2) from the groove in the head. Remove the thin O-
ring (Item 3) [Figure 20-21-14]. Use a ring compressor to compress the seal to the
correct size. Leave the piston in the compressor for about
NOTE: O-ring (Item 1) and back-up ring (Item 2) three minutes.
[Figure 20-21-14] were replaced by a one-
piece seal. Use the version currently supplied Figure 20-21-17
through parts.

Figure 20-21-15

P7427

P-59276 Install the rod seal on the rod seal tool [Figure 20-21-17].

Remove the wiper seal (Item 1) and the rod seal (Item 2) NOTE: During installation the spring side of the seal
[Figure 20-21-15]. must be toward the inside of the cylinder.

Wash the cylinder parts in solvent and air dry them. Rotate the handles to collapse the rod seal.
Inspect the cylinder parts for nicks, scratches or other
damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Always install new O-rings and seals during assembly.

Lubricate all O-rings and seals with hydraulic oil during

installation.

20-21-6 MT85 Service Manual

CYLINDER (TILT) (CONT'D)

Disassembly And Assembly (Cont'd)

Figure 20-21-18

P7425

Install the rod seal in the head [Figure 20-21-18].

Install the wiper seal with the wiper toward the outside of
the head.

Assemble the cylinder(s) in the reverse order.

20-21-7 MT85 Service Manual

20-21-8 MT85 Service Manual
MAIN RELIEF VALVE Figure 20-30-1

Description

The main relief valve limits the hydraulic system pressure

by opening at a certain pressure and allowing the 4 3
hydraulic oil to flow back to the hydraulic reservoir.

The main relief valve is adjustable and is located on the 1

bottom of the hydraulic control valve near the back of the
loader.
2
Testing

WARNING P-45995

Connect the IN port (Item 1) of the hydraulic tester to the

Hydraulic fluid escaping under pressure can have bottom (female) quick coupler on the loader (Item 2)
sufficient force to enter a person’s body by [Figure 20-30-1].
penetrating the skin. This can cause serious injury
and possible death if proper medical treatment by a Connect the OUT port (Item 3) of the hydraulic tester to
physician familiar with this injury is not received the top (male) quick coupler on the loader (Item 4)
immediately. [Figure 20-30-1].
W-2145-0290

WARNING WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH • Movement of the attachment will occur if the tilt
When operating the machine: control is NOT in neutral when the engine is
• Operate only from the operator’s position at the started.
rear of the loader. • Always check that all levers are in neutral before
• Always keep your hands on the controls. starting the engine.
• Stay away from the tracks. W-2482-1003
W-2407-0801

The tools listed will be needed to do the following

procedure:

MEL10003 - Hydraulic Tester

IMPORTANT
MEL10006 - Hydraulic Test Kit
The hydraulic tester must be in the fully open
position before you start the engine.
Turn the engine off. I-2024-0284

Move the auxiliary hydraulic lever forward and back to

release hydraulic pressure. Return lever to neutral
position.

20-30-1 MT85 Service Manual

MAIN RELIEF VALVE (CONT'D) To release from continuous operation, release the
continuous flow shutoff pedal (Item 1) [Figure 20-30-2]
Testing (Cont'd) after an approximate one second delay, the auxiliary
hydraulics lever (Item 2) [Figure 20-30-3] should return
Figure 20-30-2 to the neutral position.

The free flow should be approximately 43.5 L/min (11.5

U.S. gpm) @ 3750 rpm @ 95.5% efficiency. Turn the
restrictor control on the tester until the highest pressure
is obtained. The factory bench setting pressure for the
main relief is 19994,8 kPa (199,9 bar) (2900 psi) +/-
344,7 kPa (3,4 bar) (50 psi) @ 39,7 L/min (10.5 U.S.
1 gpm).

Figure 20-30-4

2 1

P124071

Figure 20-30-3

P121693

If the pressure is not correct, adjust the main relief valve.

Loosen the jam nut (Item 1) [Figure 20-30-4].

Turn the adjusting screw (Item 2) [Figure 20-30-4]

clockwise to increase the pressure or counterclockwise
P124074 to decrease the pressure.

Turn the adjusting screw to the correct pressure.

Put the controls in neutral position and engage parking
brake. Tighten the jam nut.
Start the engine and run at low idle. Retest the main relief valve after adjustment.
Watch the flow meter on the hydraulic tester to make sure NOTE: If the correct pressure can not be reached,
the flow direction is correct. Increase the engine speed to replace the main relief valve. Check the
full rpm. pressure setting of the new relief valve.
NOTE: Make sure flow meter is open when starting
operation.

Hold the continuous flow shutoff pedal (Item 1) [Figure

20-30-2] down then push the front auxiliary hydraulics
lever (Item 2) [Figure 20-30-3] forward to give the front
quick couplers a constant flow of fluid. Run the engine
until the hydraulic fluid is at 49°C (120°F).

20-30-2 MT85 Service Manual

MAIN RELIEF VALVE (CONT’D) Figure 20-30-6

Removal And Installation

Figure 20-30-5

1
P-59211A

Clean the main relief valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-30-6] in

P121693 clean solvent. Use air pressure to dry the valve.

Inspect the O-rings and seals (Item 2) [Figure 20-30-6]

Clean the area around the control valve. Loosen and on the main relief valve. Replace if needed. Check the
remove the main relief valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-30-5]. pressure again. (See Testing on Page 20-30-1.)

Installation: Tighten the main relief valve to 42 N•m (31

ft-lb) torque.

IMPORTANT
When repairing hydrostatic and hydraulic systems,
clean the work area before disassembly and keep all
parts clean. Always use caps and plugs on hoses,
tubelines and ports to keep dirt out. Dirt can quickly
damage the system.
I-2003-0888

20-30-3 MT85 Service Manual

20-30-4 MT85 Service Manual
PORT RELIEF VALVES

Testing (Lift) WARNING

NOTE: Do the following procedure only after the
main relief valve has been checked for correct When the engine is running during service, the
operating pressure, and the hydraulic oil has steering levers and hydraulic control levers must be
reached 38 - 49°C (100 - 140°F). in neutral and the parking brake engaged. The
Operation Mode Selector Lever must be fully
The main relief valve is set at a higher pressure. The port engaged.
relief valves are set at a lower pressure for the lift and tilt W-2414-1201
cylinders.
Figure 20-40-2
Lower the lift arms to the ground.

Put the controls in neutral position and engage parking

brake.

Open the rear door.

Remove the instrument panel. (See Removal And

Installation on Page 50-50-1.)

Figure 20-40-1

P121695

Install a 34,5 MPa (344,8 bar) (5000 psi) pressure gauge

1 on the main control valve where the upper lift base end
hose (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-1] was removed.

Secure the gauge during the test [Figure 20-40-2].

2
3 Start the engine.

P121694 Run the engine at full engine speed.

Clean the area around the fittings on the main control

valve and remove the lift base end hoses (Item 1) and
(Item 2) [Figure 20-40-1].

Cap the lift base end hoses (Item 1) and (Item 2) and the
fitting (Item 3) where the lower hose (Item 2) was
removed [Figure 20-40-1].

20-40-1 MT85 Service Manual

PORT RELIEF VALVES (CONT’D) Figure 20-40-4

Testing (Lift) (Cont’d)

Figure 20-40-3

P121694

Disconnect and cap the upper lift rod end hose (Item 1).
P124040 Cap the fitting (Item 3) [Figure 20-40-4] where the hose
was removed.

Slowly pull the hydraulic control lever (Item 1) [Figure 20- Disconnect and cap the lift rod end hose (Item 2) and
40-3] backward until you hear the hydraulics go over connect a 34,5 MPa (344,8 bar) (5,000 psi) pressure
relief. Record the pressure. gauge to the fitting (Item 3) [Figure 20-40-4].

The port relief valve has a pressure setting of 18,6 MPa Figure 20-40-5
(186,2 bar) (2700 psi) @ high idle.

Remove pressure gauge and install base end hose and

tubeline to main control valve.

P121696

Secure the gauge during the test [Figure 20-40-5].

20-40-2 MT85 Service Manual

PORT RELIEF VALVES (CONT'D) Removal And Installation (Lift)

Testing (Lift) (Cont’d) Open the rear door.

Figure 20-40-6 Remove the instrument panel. (See Removal And

Installation on Page 50-50-1.)

Figure 20-40-7

1
P124040

Start the engine.

P-74962

Run the engine at full engine speed.

Clean the area around the control valve. Loosen and
Slowly push the hydraulic control lever (Item 1) [Figure remove the base port relief valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-
20-40-6] forward until you hear the hydraulics go over 7].
relief. Record the pressure.
Figure 20-40-8
NOTE: Do not push the hydraulic control lever all the
way forward to the float position.
1
The port relief valve has a pressure setting of 18,6 MPa
(186,2 bar) (2700 psi) @ high idle.

Remove pressure gauge and install rod end tubeline and

hose to main control valve. P115025

P-51317

Remove the control lever and boot (Item 2) [Figure 20-

40-8]. (See Removal And Installation on Page 20-50-1.)

Remove the rod port relief valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-

8].

20-40-3 MT85 Service Manual

PORT RELIEF VALVES (CONT’D) Testing (Tilt)

Removal And Installation (Lift) (Cont’d) Figure 20-40-10

NOTE: The valve is shown removed for visual clarity

only.

Figure 20-40-9 1
2

3
2
1
P-51282A

4
NOTE: Do the following procedure only after the
main relief valve has been checked for correct
P115050 operating pressure, and the hydraulic oil has
reached 38 - 49°C (100 - 140°F).

Remove the cap (Item 1), O-ring (Item 2), spring (Item 3), The main relief valve is set at a higher pressure. The port
and poppet valve (Item 4) [Figure 20-40-9] from the relief valves are set at a lower pressure for the lift and tilt
valve section. cylinders.

Clean the port relief valve in clean solvent. Use air Lower the lift arms to the ground and tilt fully retracted.
pressure to dry the valve.
Put the controls in neutral position and engage parking
NOTE: The relief valve assemblies are not adjustable. brake.

Install new poppet valve, spring, O-ring and port relief Remove the two screws (Item 1) and shield bracket (Item
cap and tighten. Check the pressure again. (See Testing 2) [Figure 20-40-10].
(Lift) on Page 20-40-1.)
Figure 20-40-11
Installation: Tighten the port relief cap to 24 N•m (17.7
ft-lb) torque.

Reverse the removal procedure to install the lift relief

valve.

P-51284

Clean the area around the fittings on the tilt cylinder and
remove the base end hose (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-11]
from the fitting.

20-40-4 MT85 Service Manual

PORT RELIEF VALVES (CONT'D) Figure 20-40-13

Testing (Tilt) (Cont'd)

WARNING
When the engine is running during service, the
steering levers and hydraulic control levers must be 1
in neutral and the parking brake engaged. The
Operation Mode Selector Lever must be fully
engaged.
W-2414-1201

P124040
Figure 20-40-12

Start the engine.

Run the engine at full engine speed.

Slowly push the hydraulic control lever (Item 1) [Figure

20-40-13] to the right until you hear the hydraulics go
over relief. Record the pressure.

The port relief valve has the pressure setting of 18,6 MPa
(186,2 bar) (2700 psi) @ high idle.

Figure 20-40-14

P-51283

Install a 34,5 MPa (344,8 bar) (5000 psi) pressure gauge

on the base end hose and cap the base end cylinder
fitting [Figure 20-40-12].

Secure the gauge during the test [Figure 20-40-12].

P-51285A

Install a 34,5 MPa (344,8 bar) (5000 psi) pressure gauge

on the rod end hose and cap the rod end cylinder fitting
[Figure 20-40-14].

Secure the gauge during the test [Figure 20-40-14].

20-40-5 MT85 Service Manual

PORT RELIEF VALVE (CONT'D) Removal And Installation (Tilt)

Testing (Tilt) (Cont'd) Open the rear door.

Figure 20-40-15 Remove the instrument panel. (See Removal And

Installation on Page 50-50-1.)

Figure 20-40-16

1
1

P124040

Run the engine at full engine speed.

P-74962

Slowly move the hydraulic control lever (Item 1) [Figure

20-40-15] to the left until you hear the hydraulics go over Clean the area around the control valve. Loosen and
relief. Record the pressure. remove the base port relief valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-
16].
The port relief valves have a pressure setting of 18,6
MPa (186,2 bar) (2700 psi) @ high idle. Figure 20-40-17

P115025

P-51317

Remove the control lever and boot (Item 2) [Figure 20-

40-17]. (See Disassembly And Assembly on Page 20-50-
5.)

Remove the rod port relief valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-40-

17].

20-40-6 MT85 Service Manual

PORT RELIEF VALVE (CONT'D)

Removal And Installation (Tilt) (Cont’d)

NOTE: The valve is shown removed for visual clarity

only.

Figure 20-40-18

3
1
2

P115039

Remove the cap (Item 1), O-ring (Item 2), spring (Item 3),
and poppet valve (Item 4) [Figure 20-40-18] from both
the rod and base valve sections.

NOTE: The relief valve assemblies are not adjustable.

Clean the port relief valves in clean solvent. Use air

pressure to dry the valves.

Install new poppet valve, spring, O-ring and port relief

cap and tighten. Check the pressure again. (See Testing
(Tilt) on Page 20-40-4.)

Installation: Tighten the port relief caps to 24 N•m (17.7

ft-lb) torque.

Reverse the removal procedure to install the tilt relief

valve.

20-40-7 MT85 Service Manual

20-40-8 MT85 Service Manual
HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE Removal And Installation

Description

The hydraulic control valve is located behind the rear

door at the back of the machine. IMPORTANT
The hydraulic control valve is the component that uses When repairing hydrostatic and hydraulic systems,
spools to direct fluid to the lift and tilt functions. The clean the work area before disassembly and keep all
spools are operated by moving a control lever mounted to parts clean. Always use caps and plugs on hoses,
the top of the valve. tubelines and ports to keep dirt out. Dirt can quickly
damage the system.
NOTE: The valve design is a single-block design. I-2003-0888

Fully lower the lift arms.

Figure 20-50-1

P124071

Open the rear door (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-1].

20-50-1 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (CONT’D) Figure 20-50-4

Removal And Installation (Cont’d)

Figure 20-50-2

4
1
2

P115013
3
1 Disconnect the tilt hoses (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-4] from
the main control valve.
P-74968
Figure 20-50-5

Disconnect the auxiliary detent lockout (Item 1), auxiliary

neutral sensor (Item 2), tilt solenoid (Item 3) and lift
solenoid (Item 4) [Figure 20-50-2] connectors.

The main wire harness and main control valve electrical

connectors are marked with colored zip ties:

Tilt Lock Solenoid: orange zip tie 1

Lift Lock Solenoid: green zip tie

Auxiliary Neutral Sensor Solenoid: no zip tie

Figure 20-50-3 P121693

Disconnect the rod end lift hoses (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-

2 5] from the main control valve.
Figure 20-50-6

P115012

Mark all hoses and tubelines for ease of assembly. 1

Disconnect the inlet hose (Item 1) from the main control P121693
valve (Item 2) [Figure 20-50-3].
Disconnect the base end lift hoses (Item 1) [Figure 20-
50-6] from the main control valve.

20-50-2 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (CONT’D) Figure 20-50-9

Removal And Installation (Cont’d) 1

Figure 20-50-7

2
2

P115075

1
Remove the three bolts and nuts (Item 1) that attach the
P121697 main control valve (Item 2) [Figure 20-50-9] to the valve
mounting bracket.

Disconnect the outlet hose (Item 1) and the auxiliary Reverse the removal procedure to install the main control
hoses (Item 2) [Figure 20-50-7] from the main control valve.
valve.

Figure 20-50-8

1
P121698

Remove the two lower bolts (Item 1) that attach the main
control valve bracket (Item 2) to the mainframe (one bolt
not shown). Loosen the two top mounting bolts (Item 3)
[Figure 20-50-8]. Lift the assembly upward at an angle to
align the bolt heads with the larger openings. Remove the
valve and bracket assembly from the mini loader.

20-50-3 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (CONT’D)

Identification Chart

Figure 20-50-10

D1 D3

MR

B3 B2 B1
C3 C2 C1
T P T
C4 A3 A2 A1

D2 D4

NA9095

ITEM MT85 MINI TRACK LOADER

A1 Tilt Cylinder Base End
A2 Lift Cylinder Base End
A3 Auxiliary Hydraulics Base End
B1 Tilt Cylinder Rod End
B2 Lift Cylinder Rod End
B3 Auxiliary Hydraulic Rod End
C1 Load Check Valve Tilt Function
C2 Load Check Valve Lift Function
C3 Load Check Valve Auxiliary Function
C4 Outlet (To Cooler)
D1 Tilt Rod Port Relief 18,6 MPa (186,2 bar)
(2700 psi)
D2 Tilt Base Port Relief 18,6 MPa (186,2 bar)
(2700 psi)
D3 Lift Rod Port Relief 18,6 MPa (186,2 bar)
(2700 psi)
D4 Lift Base Port Relief 18,6 MPa (186,2 bar)
(2700 psi)
P Inlet (From Pump)
T Plug
MR Main Relief 20,0 MPa (199,9 bar) (2900 psi)

20-50-4 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (CONT’D) Figure 20-50-12

Disassembly And Assembly

1

IMPORTANT
When repairing hydrostatic and hydraulic systems,
clean the work area before disassembly and keep all
parts clean. Always use caps and plugs on hoses,
tubelines and ports to keep dirt out. Dirt can quickly
damage the system. 2
I-2003-0888

P115018
Clean the outside of the control valve before disassembly.

Figure 20-50-11 Remove the zip tie (Item 1) holding the protective boot
(Item 2) [Figure 20-50-12] onto the main control valve.

Remove the protective boot.

4
Figure 20-50-13

3 1
2

1 P115017

Note the following locations of the valve body functions

1
for assembly reference.
P115019
1. Supply / Return [Figure 20-50-11]

2. Tilt Valve [Figure 20-50-11] Remove the three tie rod nuts (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-13]
from the linkage assembly.
3. Lift Valve [Figure 20-50-11]
[Figure 20-50-13]Remove linkage assembly from the
4. Auxiliary Valve [Figure 20-50-11] fixed pivot (Item 2).

Assembly: Tighten tie rod nuts to 24 N•m (17.7 ft-lb)

torque. Pack the linkage assembly with grease before
installing protective boot (Item 2) [Figure 20-50-12].

20-50-5 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (CONT’D) Figure 20-50-16

Disassembly And Assembly (Cont'd)

Figure 20-50-14

P-74938

Rotate the spool and remove the joint holder (Item 1)

P115020 [Figure 20-50-16].

Remove the rod end (Item 2) [Figure 20-50-16] from the

Remove the two rod end screws (Item 1) [Figure 20-50- fixture.
14].
Figure 20-50-17
Assembly: Tighten the screws to 24 N•m (17.7 ft-lb)
torque. Apply a medium strength thread locker to the
threads of the screws.

Figure 20-50-15

1
1 1

P115023

Remove the four screws (Item 1) holding the fixed pivot

(Item 2) [Figure 20-50-17] to the main control valve.
P-74937
Assembly: Tighten the screws to 6,6 N•m (4.8 ft-lb)
torque. Apply a medium strength thread locker to the
Remove the rod end (Item 1) and pin (Item 2) [Figure 20- screws.
50-15].
Remove the fixed pivot from the main control valve.

20-50-6 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (CONT’D) Figure 20-50-20

Disassembly And Assembly (Cont'd)

Figure 20-50-18

1
2
P115026

Remove the lever assembly (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-20].

P115024
NOTE: Manually moving the lever (Item 2) [Figure 20-
50-20] on the lever assembly will help unseat
Remove the two dust seals (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-18]. the lever from the spool while removing.

Figure 20-50-19 Figure 20-50-21

1
1
2

P115025 P-51360

Remove the two screws (Item 1) from the lever assembly Remove boot (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-21] from lever
(Item 2) [Figure 20-50-19]. assembly and inspect lever assembly for wear or
damage, replace as needed.
Assembly: Tighten the screws to 6,6 N•m (4.9 ft-lb)
torque. Assembly: Grease pivot areas liberally and install boot.

20-50-7 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (CONT’D) Figure 20-50-24

Disassembly And Assembly (Cont'd)

Figure 20-50-22

P115029

1
Remove the plugs (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-24].
P115027
Remove the O-rings (Item 2) [Figure 20-50-24] from the
plugs.
Remove the main relief valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-22].
Assembly: Tighten plugs to 42 N•m (31 ft-lb) torque.
Assembly: Tighten main valve relief to 42 N•m (31 ft-lb)
torque. Figure 20-50-25

Figure 20-50-23

2
2
1 1

P115030
2
P115028
Remove the solenoid nut (Item 1), O-rings (Item 2), and
solenoid (Item 3) [Figure 20-50-25] from the solenoid
Remove the O-rings (Item 1) and back-up ring (Item 2) stem on the tilt section.
[Figure 20-50-23] from the main relief valve.
Assembly: Tighten solenoid nut to 11 - 16 N•m (96 - 144
Clean the main relief valve with solvent and dry with in-lb) torque.
compressed air.

20-50-8 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (CONT’D) Figure 20-50-28

Disassembly And Assembly (Cont'd)

Figure 20-50-26

2
1
2

5
1
4
3
P115033

Remove the tilt spool (Item 1) and O-ring (Item 2) [Figure

P115031 20-50-28].

Inspect parts for damage and replace as needed.

Remove the spool lock stem (Item 1) from the endcap
(Item 2) [Figure 20-50-26]. Assembly: Lubricate the spool liberally with hydraulic oil.

Remove the O-ring (Item 3) [Figure 20-50-26] from the Figure 20-50-29
spool lock stem.

Ensure plunger (Item 4) [Figure 20-50-26] moves freely

in and out of spool lock stem.

Inspect spool lock lands (Item 5) [Figure 20-50-26] on

spool for nicks or damage. 4

Figure 20-50-27 1

2 3

P115034

Remove the screws (Item 1), endcap (Item 2) and O-ring

2 (Item 3) from the valve body (Item 4) [Figure 20-50-29].

Inspect parts for damage and replace as needed.

1
Assembly: Tighten the screws to 6,6 N•m (4.8 ft-lb)
P115032 torque.

Loosen the two screws (Item 1) from the cap (Item 2)

[Figure 20-50-27]. Remove the cap.

20-50-9 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (CONT’D) Figure 20-50-32

Disassembly And Assembly (Cont'd)

Figure 20-50-30
1

2
1 1 2
2

P-59465

The spool lock mechanism adapter (Item 1) can be

P115035 removed by clamping the spool in a vise at the linkage
end (Item 2) [Figure 20-50-32].

Remove the O-rings (Item 1) and washers (Item 2) from Assembly: Apply a medium strength thread locker to the
the tilt valve section of the valve body (Item 3) [Figure threads on the spool lock mechanism adapter. Tighten
20-50-30]. spool lock mechanism adapter to 24 N•m (17.7 ft-lb)
torque.
Figure 20-50-31
Figure 20-50-33

P-59464 2
P-59471

The spool centering mechanism (Item 1) can be removed

by clamping the spool in a vise at the linkage end (Item 2) The spool adapter (Item 1) can be removed by clamping
[Figure 20-50-31]. the spool in a vise at the linkage end (Item 2) [Figure 20-
50-33].
Loosen the spool centering mechanism with an Allen
wrench [Figure 20-50-31]. Assembly: Apply a medium strength thread locker to the
threads on the spool adapter. Tighten spool adapter to 42
Assembly: Apply a medium strength thread locker to the N•m (31 ft-lb) torque.
threads on the spool centering mechanism. Tighten
spool centering mechanism to 9,8 N•m (7.2 ft-lb) torque.

20-50-10 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (CONT’D) Figure 20-50-36

Disassembly And Assembly (Cont'd)

Figure 20-50-34

2
1

1 2 3 4 P115037

Inspect the check valve (Item 1) for free movement and

P-59472 remove the O-ring (Item 2) [Figure 20-50-36].

Replace parts as needed.

Inspect the spool (Item 1), spool adapter (Item 2), spool
lock mechanism adapter (Item 3) and spool centering Figure 20-50-37
mechanism (Item 4) [Figure 20-50-34] for damage and
replace as needed.

Figure 20-50-35

1
1

P115038

Remove the rod end relief valve cap (Item 1) [Figure 20-
P115036 50-37] from the tilt valve section.

Assembly: Tighten relief valve to 24 N•m (17.7 ft-lb)

Remove the check valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-35] from torque.
the tilt valve section.

Assembly: Tighten check valve to 24 N•m (17.7 ft-lb)

torque.

20-50-11 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (CONT’D) Figure 20-50-40

Disassembly And Assembly (Cont'd)

Figure 20-50-38

1
3
2
2

3
P115041

1
Remove the poppet (Item 1), spring (Item 2) and O-ring
P115039 (Item 3) [Figure 20-50-40].

Figure 20-50-41
Remove the poppet (Item 1), spring (Item 2) and O-ring
(Item 3) [Figure 20-50-38].

Figure 20-50-39

2 2
1
3
1 P115042

Remove the solenoid nut (Item 1), O-rings (Item 2), and
P115040 solenoid (Item 3) [Figure 20-50-41] from the solenoid
stem on the lift section.

Remove the base end relief valve cap (Item 1) [Figure Assembly: Tighten solenoid nut to 11 - 16 N•m (96 - 144
20-50-39] from the tilt valve section. in-lb) torque.

Assembly: Tighten relief valve to 24 N•m (17.7 ft-lb)

torque.

20-50-12 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (CONT’D) Figure 20-50-44

Disassembly And Assembly (Cont'd)

Figure 20-50-42

5 2 1

4
3
P-51333

1 Inspect detent assembly inside cap (Item 1) [Figure 20-

P115043 50-44].

Assembly: Pack detent assembly with grease.

Remove the spool lock stem (Item 1) from the endcap
(Item 2) [Figure 20-50-42]. Figure 20-50-45

Remove the O-ring (Item 3) [Figure 20-50-42] from spool

lock stem.

Ensure plunger (Item 4) [Figure 20-50-42] moves freely

in and out of spool lock stem.

Inspect spool lock lands (Item 5) [Figure 20-50-42] on

spool for nicks or damage.

Figure 20-50-43

P115045

3 Remove the lift spool (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-45].

Inspect parts for damage and replace as needed.

Assembly: Lubricate the spool liberally with hydraulic oil.

1
2

P115044

Loosen the two screws (Item 1) from the cap (Item 2)

[Figure 20-50-43].

Remove the O-ring (Item 3) [Figure 20-50-43] from the

cap.

20-50-13 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (CONT’D) Figure 20-50-48

Disassembly And Assembly (Cont'd)

Figure 20-50-46

3
5
1
4

2
2
P-59465
3
4
1 3 Remove the spool lock mechanism adapter (Item 1) from
P115046 the lift spool by clamping spool in vise (Item 2) [Figure
20-50-48].

Remove the screws (Item 1), endcap (Item 2), O-rings Assembly: Tighten spool lock mechanism adapter to 42
(Item 3) and washers (Item 4) from the lift valve section N•m (31 ft-lb) torque. Apply medium strength thread
(Item 5) [Figure 20-50-46]. locker to threads.

Inspect parts for damage and replace as needed. Figure 20-50-49

Assembly: Tighten the screws to 6,6 N•m (4.8 ft-lb)

torque.

Figure 20-50-47
1

P-51341

2 The spool adapter (Item 1) can be removed by clamping

the spool in a vise at the linkage end (Item 2) [Figure 20-
P-59580 50-49].

Assembly: Apply a medium strength thread locker to the

The spool centering mechanism (Item 1) can be removed threads on the spool adapter. Tighten spool adapter to 42
by clamping the spool in a vise at the linkage end (Item 2) N•m (31 ft-lb) torque.
[Figure 20-50-47].

Loosen the spool centering mechanism with a wrench

[Figure 20-50-47].

Assembly: Apply a medium strength thread locker to the

threads on the spool centering mechanism. Tighten
spool centering mechanism to 24 N•m (17.7 ft-lb) torque.

20-50-14 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (CONT’D) Figure 20-50-52

Disassembly And Assembly (Cont'd)

Figure 20-50-50

2
3 1

1
4 P115048

Inspect the check valve (Item 1) for free movement and

P-59581 remove the O-ring (Item 2) [Figure 20-50-52].

Replace parts as needed.

Inspect the spool centering mechanism (Item 1) spool
lock mechanism adapter (Item 2), spool adapter (Item 3) Figure 20-50-53
and O-ring (Item 4) [Figure 20-50-50].

Replace parts as needed.

Figure 20-50-51

P115049

Remove the rod end relief valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-

53] from the lift valve section.
P115047
Assembly: Tighten relief valve to 24 N•m (17.7 ft-lb)
torque.
Remove the check valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-51] from
the lift valve section.

Assembly: Tighten check valve to 24 N•m (17.7 ft-lb)

torque.

20-50-15 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (CONT’D) Figure 20-50-56

Disassembly And Assembly (Cont'd)

Figure 20-50-54

2 1
3
2
1 3
P115052

Remove the poppet (Item 1), spring (Item 2) and O-ring

P115050 (Item 3) [Figure 20-50-56].

Figure 20-50-57
Remove the poppet (Item 1), spring (Item 2) and O-ring
(Item 3) [Figure 20-50-54].

Figure 20-50-55

2
1

P115053
1

Remove the nut (Item 1) and remove the coil (Item 2)

P115051 [Figure 20-50-57] from the auxiliary valve section.

Remove the base end relief valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-

55] from the lift valve section.

Assembly: Tighten relief valve to 24 N•m (17.7 ft-lb)

torque.

20-50-16 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (CONT’D) Figure 20-50-60

Disassembly And Assembly (Cont'd)

Figure 20-50-58

P115056

Remove the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-60] from the

1 P115054 neutral switch.

Figure 20-50-61
Check the O-rings (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-58] for
damage.

Figure 20-50-59

2
1

P115057

Remove the two screws (Item 1) from the stem assembly

P115055 (Item 2) [Figure 20-50-61].

Assembly: Tighten the screws to 6,6 N•m (4.8 ft-lb)

Remove the neutral switch (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-59] torque.
from the end-cap.

Assembly: Tighten the neutral switch to 9,8 N•m (7.2 ft-

lb) torque.

20-50-17 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (CONT’D) Figure 20-50-64

Disassembly And Assembly (Cont'd)

Figure 20-50-62 2

1
1

P115058

Remove the two screws (Item 1) and the end cap (Item 2)
P-74949 [Figure 20-50-64].

Assembly: Tighten the screws to 6,6 N•m (4.9 ft-lb)

Remove the stem assembly (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-62]. torque.

Figure 20-50-63 Figure 20-50-65

3
2
1

2 3 4

P-74950 P-82820

Remove the O-ring (Item 1), rod (Item 2), disk (Item 3) Remove the bushing (Item 1), push ring (Item 2) and ball
and spring (Item 4) [Figure 20-50-63] from the stem. carrier bushing (Item 3) [Figure 20-50-65] from the end
cap.

Assembly: Use a small amount of grease to hold the

three balls in place for the ball carrier bushing (Item 3)
[Figure 20-50-65].

20-50-18 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (CONT’D) Figure 20-50-68

Disassembly And Assembly (Cont'd)

Figure 20-50-66

P-74957

The spool centering mechanism (Item 1) can be removed

P115059 by clamping the spool in a vise at the linkage end (Item 2)
[Figure 20-50-68].

Remove the spool (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-66] from the Loosen the spool centering mechanism with an Allen
auxiliary valve section. wrench [Figure 20-50-68].

Assembly: Lubricate the spool liberally with hydraulic oil. Assembly: Apply a medium strength thread locker to the
threads on the spool centering mechanism. Tighten
Figure 20-50-67 spool centering mechanism to 9,8 N•m (7.2 ft-lb) torque.

2 Figure 20-50-69

2 3 2 1
1
1

P115060

P-74958
Remove the O-rings (Item 1) and centering ring (Item 2)
[Figure 20-50-67] from the auxiliary valve section.
Inspect the positioner pin (Item 1) bushings (Item 2) and
spring (Item 3) [Figure 20-50-69] for damage. Replace
as needed.

20-50-19 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (CONT’D) Figure 20-50-72

Disassembly And Assembly (Cont'd)

Figure 20-50-70
1

1
P115063

Remove the check valve (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-72] from

P115061 the lift valve section.

Assembly: Tighten check valve to 24 N•m (17.7 ft-lb)

Remove the washer (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-70] from the torque.
auxiliary valve section.
Figure 20-50-73
Figure 20-50-71

2
1
1

P115064
P115062

Remove the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-73] from the

Check the washer (Item 1) for wear or damage and check valve.
remove the O-ring (Item 2) [Figure 20-50-71].

20-50-20 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (CONT’D) Figure 20-50-76

Disassembly And Assembly (Cont'd)

Figure 20-50-74

1
P115067

Remove the plugs (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-76].

P115065
Figure 20-50-77

Remove plugs (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-74].

Figure 20-50-75

P115068

1 Remove the O-rings (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-77] from the

P115066 plug.

Remove the O-rings (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-75] from the

plug.

20-50-21 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (CONT’D) Figure 20-50-80

Disassembly And Assembly (Cont'd)

Figure 20-50-78

1 P115071

Remove the plug (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-80].

P115069
Figure 20-50-81

Remove the plug (Item 1) [Figure 20-50-78].

Figure 20-50-79

1 P115072
2
Remove the O-rings (Item 1) and seal (Item 2) [Figure
1 20-50-81] from the plug.
P115070

Clean all parts in solvent and dry with compressed air.

Remove the O-rings (Item 1) and seal (Item 2) [Figure
20-50-79] from the plug. Inspect all parts for wear or damage. Replace and worn
or damaged parts.

Always install new seals and O-rings. Lubricate all

seals and O-rings with clean hydraulic fluid before
installation.

20-50-22 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC PUMP Figure 20-60-2

Direct Pump Testing

The tools listed will be needed to do the following

procedure:

MEL10003 - Hydraulic Tester

MEL10006 - Hydraulic Test Kit 3

Open the rear door.

WARNING 1
2
P121727A

AVOID INJURY OR DEATH

• Movement of the attachment will occur if the tilt Connect the INLET hose (Item 1) from the tester to the
control is NOT in neutral when the engine is OUTLET hose (Item 2) of the gear pump. Connect the
started. OUTLET hose (Item 3) from the tester to the main control
• Always check that all levers are in neutral before valve fitting (Item 4) [Figure 20-60-2].
starting the engine.
W-2482-1003

Figure 20-60-1
IMPORTANT
The hydraulic tester must be in the fully open
position before you start the engine.
I-2024-0284

P121697

Disconnect the pump OUTLET hose (Item 1) [Figure 20-

60-1] from the main control valve.

20-60-1 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC PUMP (CONT'D) NOTE: Due to engine horsepower limitations in the
MT52, the engine rpm will quickly decrease
Direct Pump Testing (Cont'd) when the auxiliary flow approaches maximum
pressure. Maximum pressure can be obtained
Figure 20-60-3 for one to three seconds during this test.
EXAMPLE: TESTER
CONNECTION Without exceeding system relief pressure*, turn the
restrictor control (Item 1) [Figure 20-60-3] until the
highest pressure is reached. DO NOT EXCEED
SYSTEM RELIEF PRESSURE*, PUMP DAMAGE WILL
RESULT.

Record the highest pressure (psi) and flow (L/min [U.S.

gpm]). The high pressure flow must be at least 80% of
Hydraulic Pump free flow.
Out In
Hydraulic Control
Valve

1 HIGH PRESSURE FLOW (L/min [U.S. gpm]) X 100

%=
BH-00196 FREE FLOW (L/min [U.S. gpm])

Sample tester connection shown [Figure 20-60-3]. A low percentage may indicate a failed pump.
Start the engine and run at low idle rpm. * For system relief pressure and full rpm (See (MT85)
MINI TRACK LOADER SPECIFICATIONS on Page
Push the auxiliary hydraulics lever forward to engage the SPEC-10-1.)
front auxiliary hydraulics.

If no flow is indicated on the tester, the hoses are

connected wrong / backwards.

With the hoses connected correctly, increase the engine

speed to full rpm*.

Warm the fluid to 38 - 49°C (100 - 140°F) by turning the

restrictor control (Item 1) [Figure 20-60-3] on the tester
to about 6,9 MPa (68,95 bar) (1000 psi). DO NOT
EXCEED SYSTEM RELIEF PRESSURE*, PUMP
DAMAGE WILL RESULT.

Open the restrictor control fully and record the free flow
(L/min [U.S. gpm]) at full rpm*.

20-60-2 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC PUMP (CONT'D) Figure 20-60-5

Removal And Installation

WARNING
Hydraulic fluid escaping under pressure can have
sufficient force to enter a person’s body by 1 1
penetrating the skin. This can cause serious injury
and possible death if proper medical treatment by a
physician familiar with this injury is not received
immediately.
W-2145-0290
P121701

Remove the two mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure 20-60-5]

IMPORTANT from the hydraulic gear pump.

Installation: Tighten the bolts to 71 - 79 N•m (52.5 - 58.5

When repairing hydrostatic and hydraulic systems, ft-lb) torque. Use antisieze on the splines of the gear
clean the work area before disassembly and keep all pump shaft.
parts clean. Always use caps and plugs on hoses,
tubelines and ports to keep dirt out. Dirt can quickly Remove the hydraulic gear pump from the loader.
damage the system.
I-2003-0888

Open the tailgate.

Drain the hydraulic reservoir.

Figure 20-60-4

P121700

Remove the suction hose (Item 1) from the hydraulic gear

pump (Item 2) [Figure 20-60-4].

Disconnect and cap the two hydraulic pump hoses

(Item 3) [Figure 20-60-4].

20-60-3 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC PUMP (CONT'D)

Parts Identification

1
2

3
5 4

8
9
10
12
11

13

14
15

16

1. Bolt
2. Sealing Washer
3. Snap Ring
4. Shaft Seal
5. Washer
6. Housing
7. Plug
8. O-ring
9. Seal
10. Back-up Seal
11. Plate
12. Drive Gear
13. Idler Gear
14. Body
15. O-ring
16. Cover

P-59353

20-60-4 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC PUMP (CONT'D) Figure 20-60-7

Disassembly And Assembly

1 1

IMPORTANT
When repairing hydrostatic and hydraulic systems,
clean the work area before disassembly and keep all
parts clean. Always use caps and plugs on hoses,
tubelines and ports to keep dirt out. Dirt can quickly
damage the system. 2 2
I-2003-0888
P-59061

Figure 20-60-6
Remove the eight bolts (Items 1 and 2) [Figure 20-60-7]
from the pump.

Assembly: Tighten the bolts 33 - 38 N•m (25 - 28 ft-lb)

torque.

NOTE: Use new sealing washers under bolts (Item 1)

[Figure 20-60-7] during assembly.

Remove the pump from the vise.

Figure 20-60-8

1
P-59060
2

NOTE: Always use new O-rings, gaskets, and seals

when assembling the hydraulic pump. 3

Put the hydraulic pump in a vise.

Put marks across the housing of the pump for correct

assembly (Item 1) [Figure 20-60-6].

P-59062

Remove the front cover (Item 1) [Figure 20-60-8] from

the pump.

Remove the O-ring (Item 2) [Figure 20-60-8] from the

front cover.

Remove the pressure plate (Item 3) [Figure 20-60-8]

from the pump.

20-60-5 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC PUMP (CONT’D) Figure 20-60-11

Disassembly And Assembly (Cont’d) 1 2

Figure 20-60-9

3 2 1

P-59065

Remove the pump body (Item 1) [Figure 20-60-11] from

P-59063 the rear cover of the pump.

Remove the O-ring (Item 2) [Figure 20-60-11] from the

Remove the back-up ring (Item 1) and seal (Item 2) from rear cover.
the pressure plate (Item 3) [Figure 20-60-9].
Wash all parts in clean solvent and use air pressure to
Check the pressure plate for wear. dry them.

Figure 20-60-10 Check the pump body and rear cover for wear.

Figure 20-60-12

1 2

P-59064

P19839A
Remove the pump gears [Figure 20-60-10].

Check the gears for wear [Figure 20-60-10]. Remove the seal (Item 1) and washer (Item 2) from the
front cover (Item 3) [Figure 20-60-12].

Installation: The washer is installed between the front

cover and seal.

NOTE: Only the Seal Kit is available for the hydraulic

pump. If any other parts are worn, replace the
entire pump assembly.

20-60-6 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC / HYDROSTATIC FILTER Figure 20-70-2

Description

The hydraulic / hydrostatic filter helps to remove

contaminants from the hydraulic fluid when the hydraulic /
hydrostatic systems are operating.

The hydraulic / hydrostatic filter removes contaminants

after the oil cooler.
1
Housing Removal And Installation

WARNING P-48983

Hydraulic fluid escaping under pressure can have Remove the two bolts (Item 1) [Figure 20-70-2] from the
sufficient force to enter a person’s body by filter housing.
penetrating the skin. This can cause serious injury
and possible death if proper medical treatment by a Remove the filter housing from the loader.
physician familiar with this injury is not received
immediately.
W-2145-0290

Figure 20-70-1

1
4
3

P-48984

Open the tailgate.

Disconnect the wire (Item 1) [Figure 20-70-1] from

hydraulic pressure sensor.

Disconnect electrical connector (Item 2) [Figure 20-70-1]

from the sender.

Disconnect the inlet and outlet hoses (Item 3) [Figure 20-

70-1] from the filter housing.

20-70-1 MT85 Service Manual

20-70-2 MT85 Service Manual
HYDRAULIC FLUID RESERVOIR Removal And Installation

Description Open the rear door.

The hydraulic fluid reservoir is made of a plastic material Drain the Hydraulic Fluid Reservoir.
and the hydraulic fittings are installed into a metal
threaded insert. The torque for tightening the fittings is
very crucial to preventing leaks at the insert. Over-
tightening fittings may cause the threaded metal insert to
move and create a leak.
WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Always clean up spilled fuel or oil. Keep heat, flames,
sparks or lighted tobacco away from fuel and oil.
Failure to use care around combustibles can cause
explosion or fire.
W-2103-0508

Figure 20-80-1

P121702

Disconnect the hydraulic suction hose (Item 1) [Figure

20-80-1] from the hydraulic fluid reservoir. Install a plug in
the hose.

IMPORTANT
When repairing hydrostatic and hydraulic systems,
clean the work area before disassembly and keep all
parts clean. Always use caps and plugs on hoses,
tubelines and ports to keep dirt out. Dirt can quickly
damage the system.
I-2003-0888

20-80-1 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC FLUID RESERVOIR (CONT’D) Figure 20-80-4

Removal And Installation (Cont’d)

Figure 20-80-2
1

2
1

P-59622

Disconnect and cap the drain hoses (Item 1) [Figure 20-

P-48939 80-4] from the front of the reservoir.

Remove the hydraulic reservoir from the loader.

Remove the screw (Item 1) that fastens the lower half of
the reservoir bracket (Item 2) [Figure 20-80-2] to the Figure 20-80-5
mainframe of the loader.

Figure 20-80-3

1
1

P-66107

P121703 The proper torque for the larger fitting (Item 1) [Figure
20-80-5] leading to the gear pump is 54 - 81 N•m (40 - 60
ft-lb) torque. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN FITTING!
Remove the screw (Item 1) that fastens the upper half of
the reservoir bracket (Item 2) [Figure 20-80-3] to the The proper torque for the smaller fitting (Item 2) [Figure
mainframe of the loader. Remove the reservoir bracket. 20-80-5] leading from the drain hoses is 29 - 33 N•m (22
- 24 ft-lb) torque. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN FITTING!
Once the reservoir bracket is removed, pull the reservoir
part way out of the loader to gain access to the drain Reverse the removal procedure to install the hydraulic
hoses at the front of the hydraulic reservoir. reservoir.

20-80-2 MT85 Service Manual

OIL COOLER Figure 20-90-2

Description

The oil cooler is used to cool the loaders hydraulic and

hydrostatic oil. Oil passages are coiled into a heat 1
exchanger. The cooling fan forces air around the
passages cooling the oil.

The oil cooler is located below the hood.

Removal And Installation

WARNING P-62640

Hydraulic fluid escaping under pressure can have Disconnect the inlet and outlet hoses from the cooler.
sufficient force to enter a person’s body by
penetrating the skin. This can cause serious injury Install tool MEL1558 (Item 1) [Figure 20-90-2] to the
and possible death if proper medical treatment by a outside of the rubber seal.
physician familiar with this injury is not received
immediately. Slide the rubber sleeve in toward the radiator and the
W-2145-0290
connector will release (Item 2) [Figure 20-90-2].

NOTE: When installing the cooler hoses, the fittings

should make a clicking sound when seated.

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Always clean up spilled fuel or oil. Keep heat, flames,
sparks or lighted tobacco away from fuel and oil.
Failure to use care around combustibles can cause
explosion or fire.
W-2103-0508

Figure 20-90-1

P121704

Disconnect the wire connector (Item 1) [Figure 20-90-1]

from the hydraulic oil cooler fan.

20-90-1 MT85 Service Manual

OIL COOLER (CONT’D) Figure 20-90-5

Removal And Installation (Cont’d)

Figure 20-90-3

1 1

1
P-62642

Remove the shoulder bolt, lock washer and nut (Item 1)

P-62641 [Figure 20-90-5] from the hose guard bracket. (if
equipped)

Remove the four bolts (Item 1) [Figure 20-90-3] from the Figure 20-90-6
oil cooler fan.

Remove the cooling fan.

Figure 20-90-4
1 1

2
1 2

P-62643
3

Remove the four bolts (Item 1) [Figure 20-90-6] from the

hydraulic oil cooler.
P121705B
Remove the hydraulic oil cooler and hose guard bracket
(Item 2) [Figure 20-90-6].
Support the hood (Item 1) with a strap (Item 2) to the
reference bar (Item 3) [Figure 20-90-4] on the control Reverse the removal procedure to install the hydraulic oil
panel. cooler.

20-90-2 MT85 Service Manual

 HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM

HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-10-1

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-10-1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-10-2

HYDROSTATIC MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-20-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-20-1
Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-20-1
Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-20-4
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-20-5
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-20-11
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-20-13

CHARGE PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-30-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-30-1
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-30-1
Sender Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-30-2
Replacing Poppet Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-30-2

HYDROSTATIC PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-40-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-40-1
Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-40-1
Replenishing / High Pressure Relief Valve Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-40-3
Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-40-4
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-40-5
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-40-11

DRIVE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-50-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-50-1
Shield Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-50-1
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-50-1
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-50-2
Belt Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-50-3
Tensioner Pulley Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-50-3

HYDROSTATIC CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-60-1

Pump Controls Disassembly and Assembly (Early Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-60-1
Pump Controls Disassembly and Assembly (Later Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-60-2
Pump Controls Disassembly and Assembly (All Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-60-3
Pump Controls Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-60-5
Travel Control Lever Adjustment (Early Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-60-7
Travel Control Lever Adjustment (Later Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-60-7
Full Forward Travel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-60-8
Steering Drift Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-60-9

30-01 MT85 Service Manual

30-02 MT85 Service Manual
HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM INFORMATION

Troubleshooting WARNING
The following troubleshooting chart is provided for
assistance in locating and correcting problems which are Check for correct function after adjustments, repairs
most common. Many of the recommended procedures or service. Failure to make correct repairs or
must be done by authorized Bobcat Service Personnel adjustments can cause injury or death.
only. W-2004-1285

PROBLEM CAUSE
No drive function. 1, 2
No drive on one side in both directions. 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9
No drive on one side in one direction. 2, 5, 7, 8, 10
Machine does not drive in reverse. 11
Machine does not move in straight line. 1, 3, 7, 8, 11, 12
Hydrostatic system overheating. 9, 13, 14, 15
Hydraulic / Hydrostatic warning light comes on. 2, 16, 17

KEY TO CORRECT THE CAUSE

1. Belt slippage.
2. Low or no charge pressure.
3. Sheared key on drive motor and / or loose castle bolt.
4. Hydrostatic system has fluid leak.
5. Steering linkage loose, damaged or needs adjustment.
6. Hydrostatic pressure relief valve is defective.
7. Hydrostatic pump has defect.
8. Hydrostatic motor has defect.
9. Hydrostatic fluid not at correct level.
10. Drive relief on hydrostatic pump is stuck open.
11. Inspect straight tracking adjustment.
12. Steering lever is obstructed.
13. Restricted oil cooler.
14. Plugged case drain.
15. Hydraulic cooling fan not operable (Refer to Electrical Troubleshooting).
16. Electrical defect.
17. Hydraulic oil temp too high.

30-10-1 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM INFORMATION (CONT’D)

Description

The hydrostatic system consists of a tandem hydrostatic

pump and two hydrostatic motors. The hydrostatic
system allows forward and reverse motion of the loader.

The hydrostatic pump is connected to the engine by a

drive belt and provides fluid to the hydrostatic motors.
The charge pressure system assists in replenishing the
fluid that is lost due to internal leakage in the components
of the hydrostatic system.

IMPORTANT
When repairing hydrostatic and hydraulic systems,
clean the work area before disassembly and keep all
parts clean. Always use caps and plugs on hoses,
tubelines and ports to keep dirt out. Dirt can quickly
damage the system.
I-2003-0888

30-10-2 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC MOTOR Figure 30-20-2

Description

There are two hydrostatic motors, one on each side of

the machine. 1

The hydrostatic motors do not have an internal brake. 2

The hydrostatic motors are driven by high pressure from

the hydrostatic pumps.

Removal And Installation

Lift and block the loader. (See Procedure on Page 10-10-

1.) P-48938

Remove the engine access plate from under the bottom

of the loader. (See Removal And Installation on Page 50- Remove the cotter pin (Item 1) and nut / spacer (Item 2)
80-1.) [Figure 30-20-2] from the drive sprocket shaft.

Figure 30-20-1 Installation: Tighten the nut to 644 N•m (275 ft-lb) torque
plus torque required to align slotted nut with shaft cross
hole.

Figure 30-20-3

P-31750 P121687

After the loader has been properly lifted and blocked,

raise the lift arms approximately 152,4 mm (6 in). P-48936

Install floor jacks under the Bob-Tach [Figure 30-20-1] to

provide clearance for track removal. Remove the drive sprocket (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-3]
from the drive motor shaft using a puller.
Remove the track. (See Track Removal And Installation
on Page 40-20-3.)

30-20-1 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC MOTOR (CONT’D) Outside View

Removal And Installation (Cont’d) Figure 30-20-6

Right Side

Figure 30-20-4 1 1

1 1
2

P121709

1
Inside View
1
P121707
Figure 30-20-7

Left Side
1
Figure 30-20-5
1
1
2

1
P121706

Remove the four bolts and nuts (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-6]

P121708 and (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-7] holding the drive motor to
the frame.

From behind the loader, disconnect and cap the hoses Installation: Tighten the bolts to 135,6 N•m (100 ft-lb)
(Item 1) [Figure 30-20-4] and (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-5] torque.
connected to the drive motor.

Remove fittings (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-4] and (Item 2)

[Figure 30-20-5] from drive motor so the drive motor can
be removed from outside of frame.

NOTE: When removing the left drive motor, you must

first remove the hydraulic reservoir. (See
Removal And Installation on Page 20-80-1.)

30-20-2 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC MOTOR (CONT’D)

Removal And Installation (Cont’d)

Figure 30-20-8

P-48953

Rotate the drive motor until it’s shape matches the frame
cutout (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-7].

Remove the drive motor.

Reverse removal procedure to install the drive motor.

30-20-3 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC MOTOR (CONT’D)

Parts Identification

16

14
13 15

12
10 11
9
7 8

4 6
5
3

2 27

22
23
21
26

1 25
22 23 24
6
19
17 18 20

1. Seal Slinger 15. Valve Drive

2. Exclusion Seal 16. Valve Plate
3. Bearing Housing 17. O-ring
4. O-ring 18. Valve
5. Back-up Washer 19. Balance Ring
6. Shaft Seal 20. Inner Face Seal
7. Key 21. Outer Face Seal
8. Bearing & Shaft Assembly 22. Pin
9. Shaft Face Seal 23. Spring
10. Wear Plate 24. Plug
11. O-ring 25. O-ring
12. Drive Shaft 26. Valve Housing
13. Geroler® 27. Bolt
14. O-ring B-16390A

30-20-4 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC MOTOR (CONT’D) Figure 30-20-10

Disassembly

IMPORTANT
When repairing hydrostatic and hydraulic systems,
clean the work area before disassembly and keep all
parts clean. Always use caps and plugs on hoses,
tubelines and ports to keep dirt out. Dirt can quickly
damage the system.
I-2003-0888

P-28985
NOTE: Clean the outside of the motor before
disassembly. Keep all the parts of the motor
clean. Lift the valve housing straight up [Figure 30-20-10]. If
done carefully the balance ring assembly and springs will
Figure 30-20-9 stay on the valve plate for easy removal.

1 Figure 30-20-11
1
1

P-28987A

P-28983
1
P-28986
Mark the drive motor sections for correct assembly
[Figure 30-20-9].
Remove the O-rings (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-11] from the
Remove the four bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-9] from the valve housing.
motor.

30-20-5 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC MOTOR (CONT’D) Figure 30-20-14

Disassembly (Cont'd)
2
Figure 30-20-12

2
P-34301

P-28994

P-28996

1 Remove the outer face seal (Item 1) from the balance

P-28992 ring (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-14].

NOTE: Remember outer face seal orientation for

Remove the plug (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-12]. assembly.

Inspect the O-ring (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-12] and Figure 30-20-15

replace as needed.

Figure 30-20-13
1

1 P-34303
1
2
2

P-28998

P-28988 Remove the inner face seal (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-15].

NOTE: Remember inner face seal orientation for

Remove the two springs (Item 1) and pins (Item 2) assembly.
[Figure 30-20-13] from the valve housing.

Remove the balance ring assembly (Item 3) [Figure 30-

20-13].

30-20-6 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC MOTOR (CONT’D) Figure 30-20-18

Disassembly (Cont'd) 1

Figure 30-20-16

P-34307

1
1

P-30007

Remove the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-18] from the

P-30001 valve plate.

Figure 30-20-19
Remove the valve (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-16].

Figure 30-20-17 1

P-30009

P-30006 Remove the valve drive (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-19].

Remove the valve plate (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-17].

30-20-7 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC MOTOR (CONT’D) Figure 30-20-22

Disassembly (Cont'd)

Figure 30-20-20
1

1
2

P-30017 P-30016

Remove the wear plate (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-22].

P-30010
Remove the shaft face seal (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-22]
from the wear plate.
Remove the Geroler® (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-20]. Make
sure the seven rollers are kept in place. NOTE: Remember shaft face seal orientation for
assembly.
Figure 30-20-21
Figure 30-20-23

1 1

P-30014

P-30021

Remove the drive shaft (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-21].

Remove the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-23] from the
Remove the O-ring (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-21] from the bearing housing.
wear plate.

30-20-8 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC MOTOR (CONT’D) Figure 30-20-26

Disassembly (Cont'd)

Figure 30-20-24

1
2

P-30035

Figure 30-20-27
P-30030
1

Remove the key (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-24] from shaft

and bearing assembly.

Remove the shaft and bearing assembly (Item 2) [Figure P-30037

30-20-24] from the housing.

NOTE: A press may be needed to remove the shaft

and bearing assembly from the bearing 2
housing.
1
Figure 30-20-25
P-30036

Remove the shaft seal (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-26] and

[Figure 30-20-27] and back-up washer (Item 2) [Figure
30-20-27] from the bearing housing.

NOTE: Do not damage bore or housing and

remember shaft seal orientation for assembly.

P-30034

NOTE: The individual parts of the shaft and bearing

assembly are not serviced separately.
Replace as an assembled unit [Figure 30-20-
25].

30-20-9 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC MOTOR (CONT’D)

Disassembly (Cont'd)

Figure 30-20-28

P-51142

Remove the slinger seal (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-28] from

the bearing housing.

Figure 30-20-29

2
1

P-51145

After removing the slinger seal (Item 1) remove seal (Item

2) [Figure 30-20-29] from the bearing housing.

NOTE: Remember the slinger seal orientation for

assembly.

30-20-10 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC MOTOR (CONT’D) Figure 30-20-32

Inspection

Figure 30-20-30

P-30007

Check the valve plate for wear or scratches [Figure 30-

P-30095 20-32].

Figure 30-20-33
Before the motor is assembled, check the following items:

Check the Geroler® (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-30] for wear

or scratches.

Figure 30-20-31

P-30096

Check the valve [Figure 30-20-33].

P-30094

Check the Geroler® rollers [Figure 30-20-31].

Check the rotor.

NOTE: Put all the rollers back in their original

position.

30-20-11 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC MOTOR (CONT’D) Figure 30-20-35

Inspection (Cont’d)

Figure 30-20-34

P-30097

Check the end plate for scratches [Figure 30-20-35].

P-28996
Check all the contact surfaces. Replace any parts that
have scratches or are worn.
Check the balance plate [Figure 30-20-34].
Clean all the parts in solvent and use air pressure to dry
Check the valve drive shaft and main drive shaft for wear. the parts. DO NOT use cloth or paper because some
material may get into the hydraulic system and cause
Check all the contact surfaces. Replace any parts that damage. DO NOT use sandpaper or a file to remove
have scratches or are worn. scratches on any of the parts.

Clean all the parts in solvent and use air pressure to dry
the parts. DO NOT use cloth or paper because some
material may get into the hydraulic system and cause
damage. DO NOT use sandpaper or a file to remove
scratches on any of the parts.

30-20-12 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC MOTOR (CONT’D) Figure 30-20-37

Assembly

2
IMPORTANT
Use grease such as Dow Corning #44 or Vaseline
petroleum jelly to hold seals, O-rings and bearings in
position during assembly.
I-2010-0597
1

Figure 30-20-36
3
P-30036

Install the back-up washer (Item 1) into seal bore (Item 2)

[Figure 30-20-37] of the bearing housing.

Press the shaft seal (Item 3) into the seal bore (Item 2)
1 [Figure 30-20-37] of the bearing housing.
2

NOTE: Shaft seal (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-36] groove

must be facing the bearing.

Protect the end of the shaft to prevent seal damage.

Apply petroleum jelly to the inside diameter of the shaft
P-51145 seal and exclusion seal.

Figure 30-20-38
NOTE: Always use a NEW seal kit when assembling
the hydraulic drive motor. Lubricate all seals 2
(prior to installation) with petroleum jelly.

Install the seal (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-36] into the

bearing housing. 1

Install the slinger seal (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-36] onto

the bearing housing.

P-30022

Install the shaft and bearing assembly (Item 1) (a press

may be necessary) into the bearing housing (Item 2)
[Figure 30-20-38].

30-20-13 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC MOTOR (CONT'D) Figure 30-20-41

Assembly (Cont’d)

Figure 30-20-39 2
1

P-30017

Install the shaft face seal (Item 1) in the wear plate (Item
P-30021 2) [Figure 30-20-41].

NOTE: Do not distort the seal. Shaft face seal taper

Apply petroleum jelly to the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 30- must face away from the wear plate and
20-39] and install the O-ring into the bearing housing. towards the bearing.

Figure 30-20-40 Figure 30-20-42

200 mm (8 in)

Approx
13 mm (0.50 in) 25 mm (1.00 in)

9,5 mm (0.375 in) Dia. Steel Rod

3/8-24 UNF
Grind flat spots on each side thread

2
8 mm (0.312 in)
B-16126 P-30015

NOTE: Alignment studs can be very helpful in Install the wear plate (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-42].
reassembly of the motor, but are not
necessary. The alignment stud [Figure 30-20- Apply a light film of petroleum jelly on the O-ring and
40] can be made to help in the assembly install the O-ring (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-42] in the wear
alignment process. If the alignment studs are plate.
used, install the two studs diagonally
opposed in bearing housing.

30-20-14 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC MOTOR (CONT’D) Figure 30-20-45

Assembly (Cont'd)
1
Figure 30-20-43
2

P-30009

Install the valve drive (Item 1) into the Geroler® (Item 2)

P-30014 [Figure 30-20-45].

Install the drive (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-43] into the

bearing housing.

Figure 30-20-44

P-30010

Align the notch on the outside of the Geroler® with the

notch on the wear plate. Install the Geroler® (Item 1)
against the wear plate (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-44]. Hold
the rollers in the Geroler® while installing it.

30-20-15 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC MOTOR (CONT’D) Figure 30-20-47

Assembly (Cont'd) Balance

Ring Outer
Outer Seal
Seal
Figure 30-20-46
Rotate valve clockwise 1/2
tooth max. to engage spline

Valve
1
Valve
Drive
Inner
Seal

2
B-9930
P-28996
2 Any one of the six
port open to the
outside of the valve Apply petroleum jelly on the inner and outer seals and
install the seals on the balance ring [Figure 30-20-47].
Drive Geroler®
Valve Plate B-16127
Largest Opening Figure 30-20-48

The timing of the motor controls the direction of the

rotation of the drive shaft of the motor. The timing parts
are as follows [Figure 30-20-46]:

1. Geroler®

2. Valve Drive
1
3. Valve Plate

4. Valve

Locate the largest open pocket in the Geroler® and mark

P-28992
the outside of the Geroler® at that location [Figure 30-
20-46].
Install the plug and O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-48] on
Apply petroleum jelly to the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 30- the valve housing and tighten to 6 N•m (50 in-lb) torque.
20-46] and install the O-ring on the valve plate.

Align the notch on the outside of the valve plate with the
notch (Item 2) [Figure 30-20-46] on the Geroler®. Install
the valve plate (O-ring side toward the Geroler®) on the
Geroler®.

Align the slot opening in the valve plate with the largest
opening of the Geroler®.

Align the valve on the valve plate so that any one of the
openings is in alignment with the open slot in the valve
plate that is inline with the largest opening of the
Geroler® [Figure 30-20-46]. Turn the valve CLOCKWISE
1/2 tooth to engage the drive. This will provide the proper
rotation when pressurized

30-20-16 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC MOTOR (CONT’D) Figure 30-20-51

Assembly (Cont'd)

Figure 30-20-49

P-30115

1 Slide an object through the port in the valve housing to

P-30114 hold the balance ring in position [Figure 30-20-51]. Hold
the balance ring in position until the valve housing is in
place against the valve plate.
Install the springs (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-49] in the valve
housing. NOTE: After installing the valve housing on the valve
plate check for proper placement by pushing
Figure 30-20-50 down on the valve housing. You should get a
slight spring action.
3
Figure 30-20-52
3
1
P-28996
1
1

1
P-30114

Install the pins (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-50] in the valve

P-28984
housing.

Apply petroleum jelly to the O-ring (Item 2) [Figure 30- Install the tie bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-20-52] and tighten
20-50] and install on the valve housing. all four bolts alternately to 50 N•m (42 ft-lb) torque.

Align the pin notches (Item 3) [Figure 30-20-50] in the NOTE: If alignment studs were used, install two bolts
balance ring with the pins and springs in the valve opposite the studs and tighten bolts finger
housing and Install the balance ring assembly in the tight. Remove the alignment studs and
housing. replace with bolts. Tighten bolts to the above
torque.

30-20-17 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC MOTOR (CONT’D)

Assembly (Cont'd)

Figure 30-20-53

CLOCKWISE
ROTATION
COUNTER
CLOCKWISE
ROTATION

B-16128

Verify that the motor has proper rotation when

pressurized [Figure 30-20-53].

30-20-18 MT85 Service Manual

CHARGE PRESSURE Figure 30-30-1

Description

Charge pressure is a supply of oil to the hydrostatic

pumps. Charge pressure is regulated by a charge relief
valve located inside the filter housing. 2

Charge pressure is used to replenish hydrostatic fluid

removed from the drive circuit, pump and motor “internal
leakage” and from the hydrostatic motors shuttle
(flushing) valve.
1
The charge pressure sender is located on the charge
filter housing.
P-48931
Testing

Disconnect the connector (Item 1) [Figure 30-30-1] from

the charge pressure sender.
WARNING Remove the charge pressure sender (Item 2) [Figure 30-
30-1] from the fitting
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
• Movement of the attachment will occur if the tilt Install a gauge in charge pressure sender fitting.
control is NOT in neutral when the engine is
started. Start the engine.
• Always check that all levers are in neutral before
starting the engine. If the charge pressure does not read at least 586,1 kPa
W-2482-1003
(5,9 bar) (85 psi), remove and inspect the valve poppet
and spring assembly and replace if needed.

NOTE: The charge pressure sensor is electrically

WARNING closed at 186,2 kPa (1,9 bar) (27 psi) and
above, the sensor is electrically open at 172,4
kPa (1,7 bar) (25 psi) and below.
Hydraulic fluid escaping under pressure can have
sufficient force to enter a person’s body by
penetrating the skin. This can cause serious injury
and possible death if proper medical treatment by a
physician familiar with this injury is not received
immediately.
W-2145-0290

Open the tail gate.

30-30-1 MT85 Service Manual

CHARGE PRESSURE (CONT’D) Replacing Poppet Assembly

Sender Removal And Installation Figure 30-30-3

Open tailgate.

Figure 30-30-2

3
1 2
2

1 P-48946

If the charge pressure is not correct remove hose (Item 1)

P-48931 from the connector bypass fitting (Item 2) [Figure 30-30-
3].

Disconnect the connector (Item 1) from the charge Remove the connector bypass fitting (Item 2) [Figure 30-
pressure sender (Item 2) [Figure 30-30-2]. 30-3]

Remove the charge pressure sender (Item 2) from the Figure 30-30-4
port block (Item 3) [Figure 30-30-2].

P-48952

Remove the valve poppet and spring assembly (Item 1)

[Figure 30-30-4] and replace with a new one if needed.

Assembly: Always use a new O-ring. Tighten the plug to

torque.

30-30-2 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC PUMP Figure 30-40-2

Description

There are two individual hydrostatic pumps. The pumps

provide bi-directional flow to two separate hydrostatic
drive motors. The pump flow and direction are controlled
by linkages connected to the steering control panel.

The pumps contain replenishing valves. The function of

these valves is to give replacement fluid to the low
pressure side of the hydrostatic circuit. Replacement is
needed because of normal internal leakage and the 1
controlled flow to the oil cooler for cooling.

The hydrostatic pumps are located below the hood and P-51055
are mounted to the frame.

Removal And Installation Installation: Install the key in the hydrostatic pump shaft
(Item 1) [Figure 30-40-2] before installing the pump drive
Remove the muffler. (See Removal And Installation on pulley.
Page 70-30-1.)
Installation: Tighten the bolt to 47,5 - 54,2 N•m (35 - 40
Remove the drive belt. (See Belt Removal And ft-lb) torque.
Installation on Page 30-50-3.)

Figure 30-40-1

P-51060

Install a puller (Item 1) on the hydrostatic pump drive

pulley (Item 2) [Figure 30-40-1] and remove the pulley
from the pump shaft.

30-40-1 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC PUMP (CONT’D) Figure 30-40-5

Removal And Installation (Cont’d)

Bottom View

Figure 30-40-3

P121710

1 Remove connecting rod (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-5] from

1
right side pump.

P-48954 NOTE: The left pump must be removed before

removing the connecting rod, and the
connecting rod must be reattached before
Top View installing the pump.

Figure 30-40-4 Figure 30-40-6

2
1
1
1

1 1
P-51064 P-51061

Disconnect and cap all the hoses on the pump (Item 1) Remove the two mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-6]
[Figure 30-40-3] and (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-4]. holding the hydrostatic pump to frame.

Remove the hydrostatic pump (Item 2) [Figure 30-40-6]

from the loader.

Reverse the removal procedure to install the hydrostatic

pump.

30-40-2 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC PUMP (CONT’D) Figure 30-40-9

Replenishing / High Pressure Relief Valve Removal

And Installation

Figure 30-40-7
1

1
P-43912

Inspect the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-9] for damage.

Replace as needed.
P-43911
Installation: Torque the replenishing / high pressure
relief valve to 128,8 - 142,4 N•m (95 - 105 ft-lb).
Figure 30-40-8
If the replenishing / high pressure relief valve must be
replaced, it must be replaced as a unit.

The pressure setting for a new high pressure relief valve

is 13,8 MPa (137,9 bar) (2000 psi).

P-43914

Remove the two relief valves (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-7]

and [Figure 30-40-8] from the pump housing.

30-40-3 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC PUMP (CONT'D)

Parts Identification

1. Snap Ring
2. Seal
3. Washer
4. Race
7
5. Bearing
6. O-ring 6
7. Plug
8. Key
9. Shaft
10. Crush Ring 19
12 6
11. Cover
12. Bolt
13. Housing
18
14. Swash Plate
15. Plate
16. Rotating Group 6
17. Gasket 19
18. Pin 18
5
19. Relief Valve 13

15 17

16 12
3
5
15
7
6

8
5 11
4
13 6
14
5
9
3
12 8

4 6 6
7
2 10 1
4
5
4
1
11 3
2
1

P-74774

30-40-4 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC PUMP (CONT’D) Figure 30-40-11

Disassembly

IMPORTANT
When repairing hydrostatic and hydraulic systems,
clean the work area before disassembly and keep all
parts clean. Always use caps and plugs on hoses, 1
tubelines and ports to keep dirt out. Dirt can quickly
damage the system.
I-2003-0888

P-43872
Figure 30-40-10

Remove and inspect the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-

11] for damage. Replace as needed.
2
Figure 30-40-12

1
1
1 2

P-43868

1
Remove the two bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-10] from 1
the pump housing.
P-43869
Remove the cover (Item 2) [Figure 30-40-10] from the
pump housing.
Remove the four bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-12] from
the pump housing.

Remove the end housing from the pump (Item 2) [Figure

30-40-12].

30-40-5 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC PUMP (CONT’D) Figure 30-40-15

Disassembly (Cont’d)

Figure 30-40-13

P-43873

Remove the gasket (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-15] from the

P-43870 pump housing.

Remove and inspect the wear plate (Item 1) [Figure 30-

40-13] for damage. Replace as needed.

Figure 30-40-14

P-43871

Remove and inspect the bearing (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-

14] for damage. Replace as needed.

30-40-6 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC PUMP (CONT’D) Figure 30-40-18

Disassembly (Cont’d) 3

Figure 30-40-16 2

P-43420

Check the cylinder block bores for wear and scratches

P-43874 (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-18].

Check the spherical washer (Item 2) [Figure 30-40-18]

Remove the piston assembly (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-16] for wear or damage.
from the pump housing.
Inspect the three pins (Item 3) [Figure 30-40-18], the
Figure 30-40-17 pins must not be bent and the same length.

If there is any defect in the piston assembly, the complete

unit must be replaced.
3
Figure 30-40-19
2

4 P-43876
1

Check that each piston moves freely in its bore [Figure

30-40-17].
P-43881
Remove and inspect each piston (Item 1) and piston
shoe (Item 2) [Figure 30-40-17] for wear or scratches.
Remove the snap ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-19] from
Inspect the shoe plate (Item 3) [Figure 30-40-17], the the pump housing.
shoe plate must be flat with no signs of cracks or wear.

Inspect the end of the cylinder block (Item 4) [Figure 30-

40-17], the surface must be smooth and free of
scratches.

Remove the shoe plate (Item 3) [Figure 30-40-17] and

pistons from the cylinder block.

30-40-7 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC PUMP (CONT’D) Figure 30-40-22

Disassembly (Cont’d) 4
2
Figure 30-40-20 1

5
3

1
P-43907

Remove and inspect the snap ring (Item 1), thrust washer
P-43910 (Item 2), thrust bearing (Item 3), thrust washer (Item 4),
and snap ring (Item 5) [Figure 30-40-22] for damage.
Replace as needed.
Remove the shaft (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-20] from the
pump housing. Figure 30-40-23

Figure 30-40-21

1 1

P-43877

2
P-43906
Remove the three bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-23] from
the pump housing.
Remove and inspect the seal (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-21]
for damage. Replace as needed. Remove the cover (Item 2) [Figure 30-40-23] from the
pump housing.
Remove spacer (Item 2) [Figure 30-40-21] from the
shaft.

30-40-8 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC PUMP (CONT’D) Figure 30-40-26

Disassembly (Cont’d)

Figure 30-40-24

1 1
1
2

P-43878

Remove the three bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-26] from

P-43962 the pump housing.

Remove the cover (Item 2) [Figure 30-40-26] from the

Remove and inspect the bearing race (Item 1) [Figure pump housing.
30-40-24] for damage. Replace as needed.
Figure 30-40-27
Figure 30-40-25

2
2

P-43963
P-43880

Remove and inspect the bearing race (Item 1) [Figure

Remove the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-25] from the 30-40-27] for damage. Replace as needed.
pump housing.
The crush ring (Item 2) [Figure 30-40-27] does not need
Remove the bearing (Item 2) [Figure 30-40-25] from the to be removed. The only time that the crush ring will be
swash plate. removed is when the cover, swash plate, or the pump
housing is replaced. A shim kit is then required in the
crush ring’s place.

30-40-9 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC PUMP (CONT’D) Figure 30-40-30

Disassembly (Cont’d)

Figure 30-40-28

P-43885

NOTE: Be sure to note on which side of the housing

P-43893 the control shaft protrudes before removing
the swash plate.

Remove and inspect the seal (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-28] Remove the swash plate from the pump housing [Figure
for damage. Replace as needed. 30-40-30].

Figure 30-40-29 Figure 30-40-31

P-43879 P-43888

Remove and inspect the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-40- Inspect the bearing (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-31] for
29] for damage. Replace as needed. damage. Replace as needed.

30-40-10 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC PUMP (CONT’D) Assembly

Disassembly (Cont’d) Figure 30-40-34

Figure 30-40-32

1 1
2

P-43888

P-43884
Install the bearing (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-34] into the
pump housing.
Remove and inspect the bearing (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-
32] for damage. Replace as needed. Figure 30-40-35

Remove and inspect the wear plate (Item 2) [Figure 30-

40-32] for damage. Replace as needed.

Figure 30-40-33 2 1

P-43884

Lubricate and install the bearing (Item 1) and the wear

plate (Item 2) [Figure 30-40-35] onto the swash plate.
P-43883

Inspect the swash plate for damage [Figure 30-40-33].

Replace as needed.

30-40-11 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC PUMP (CONT’D) Figure 30-40-38

Assembly (Cont’d) 6
2
4
Figure 30-40-36 5

1
3
2
P-43890

P-43907

Install the snap ring (Item 1) into the second groove (Item
P-43885 6) [Figure 30-40-38] from the end of the shaft.

Install the thrust washer (Item 2), thrust bearing (Item 3),
Install the swash plate (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-36] into the and thrust washer (Item 4) [Figure 30-40-38] onto the
pump housing. shaft.

Lubricate and install the O-ring (Item 2) [Figure 30-40- Install the snap ring (Item 5) [Figure 30-40-38] into the
36] into the pump housing. first groove on the shaft.

Figure 30-40-37 Figure 30-40-39

P-43908
2

1
P-43880 P-43906

Lubricate and install the bearing (Item 1) [Figure 30-40- Install the spacer (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-39] onto the
37] onto the swash plate. shaft.

Lubricate and install the O-ring (Item 2) [Figure 30-40- Install the seal (Item 2) [Figure 30-40-39] onto the shaft.
37] into the pump housing.
NOTE: The lip of the shaft seal must face the inside
of the pump.

30-40-12 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC PUMP (CONT’D) Figure 30-40-42

Assembly (Cont’d)

Figure 30-40-40

P-43962

1
Install the bearing race (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-42] into
P-43910 the cover.

Figure 30-40-43
Install the shaft (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-40] into the pump
housing.

NOTE: A seal driver may be needed to press the seal

inward until the snap ring will fit into the
groove.

Figure 30-40-41
2
2

2
1
P-43877

Install the cover (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-43] onto the

1
pump housing.

Install and tighten the three bolts (Item 2) [Figure 30-40-

43] to 39,3 N•m (29 ft-lb) torque.
P-43881

Install the snap ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-41] into the

housing.

30-40-13 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC PUMP (CONT’D) Figure 30-40-46

Assembly (Cont’d)

Figure 30-40-44

2 1

P-43874

Install the piston assembly (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-46]

P-43963 into the pump housing.

Figure 30-40-47
Install the seal (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-44] with the lip of
the seal facing the inside of the pump.

Install the bearing race (Item 2) [Figure 30-40-44] into

the cover.

Figure 30-40-45

2 2

P-43873

1
Install the new gasket (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-47] onto
the pump housing.
2

P-43878

Install the cover (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-45] onto the

pump housing.

Install and tighten the three bolts (Item 2) [Figure 30-40-

45] to 39,3 N•m (29 ft-lb) torque.

30-40-14 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC PUMP (CONT’D) Figure 30-40-50

Assembly (Cont’d)

Figure 30-40-48 2

1
2
P-43869

Install the pump end section (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-50]

P-43871 onto the pump housing.

Install and tighten the four bolts (Item 2) [Figure 30-40-

Install the bearing (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-48] into the 50] to 25 N•m (18.5 ft-lb) torque.
pump end section.
Figure 30-40-51
Figure 30-40-49

1
1

P-43872
P-43870

Lubricate and install the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-

Install the wear plate (Item 1) [Figure 30-40-49] onto the 51] onto the cap.
pump end section.

30-40-15 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC PUMP (CONT’D)

Assembly (Cont’d)

Figure 30-40-52

P-43868

Install the cap (Item 1) and two bolts (Item 2) [Figure 30-
40-52] onto the pump end section.

30-40-16 MT85 Service Manual

DRIVE BELT Adjusting

Description To adjust the drive belt tension, use the following

procedure:
The drive belt makes the mechanical connection from the
engine flywheel to the hydrostatic pump pulleys. Raise the lift arms and install the lift arm support device.
(See Installing on Page 10-20-1.)
The belt is a cord-reinforced rubber design.
Stop the engine and raise the hood.
Constant tension is applied to the belt by the use of a
spring-loaded belt tensioner. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable. (See Removal
And Installation on Page 60-20-1.)

Shield Removal And Installation Remove the belt shield. (See Shield Removal And
Installation on Page 30-50-1.)
Figure 30-50-1
Figure 30-50-2

1 1

1
P-59653
1 P124009

Loosen the four belt shield fasteners (Item 1) [Figure 30-

50-1]. Loosen screws (Item 1) fastening side access cover (Item
2) [Figure 30-50-2] to the loader.
Remove the belt shield (Item 2) [Figure 30-50-1].
Swing open side access cover.
Installation: Ensure the belt shield is not resting directly
on the drive belt or the drive belt pulleys. Figure 30-50-3

P-62131

The pulley tensioner (Item 1) [Figure 30-50-3] is located

just under the right hydrostatic pump pulley.

30-50-1 MT85 Service Manual

DRIVE BELT (CONT’D) Alignment

Adjusting (Cont’d) Alignment of the drive belt is adjustable only at the pulley
tensioner and the engine mounts. The goal is to align the
Figure 30-50-4 tensioner pulley and the engine flywheel pulley groove
with the hydrostatic pump pulleys, which are not
adjustable.

The mainframe of the loader has slots for the engine

mounts making them adjustable.

By loosening the three rubber engine mounts, one rear

and two side mounts; the engine can be moved forward
and backward to align the flywheel pulley groove with the
1 tensioner and hydrostatic pump pulleys.

Information on the engine mounts. (See Engine Mount

Replacement on Page 70-10-13.)

P-59655 NOTE: If alignment is still unacceptable, check the

rubber engine mounts for damage.
Loosen tensioner mounting bolt (Item 1) [Figure 30-50-4] The tensioner pulley can be aligned with the hydrostatic
located on the back side of tensioner. pump pulleys by using washers as shims.
While facing the idler pulley, place a wrench on the
square base portion (Item 2) [Figure 30-50-3] of the idler
pulley

Rotate wrench until the pointer (Item 3) [Figure 30-50-3]

reaches 25°.

While holding the pointer (Item 3) [Figure 30-50-3] at the

proper position (25°), tighten the idler mounting bolt (Item
1) [Figure 30-50-4] to 46 N•m (34 ft-lb) torque.

NOTE: The pointer (Item 3) [Figure 30-50-3] will be set

at 25° when under proper tension.

Install the belt shield and tighten the four fasteners.

Close the side access cover and tighten screws.

Reconnect the negative (-) battery cable. (See Removal

And Installation on Page 60-20-1.)

Run the engine and recheck the pointer position.

Readjust if necessary.

Remove the lift arm support device. (See Removing on

Page 10-20-1.)

30-50-2 MT85 Service Manual

DRIVE BELT (CONT’D) Figure 30-50-6

Belt Removal And Installation

Figure 30-50-5

DRIVE BELT ROUTING

1 1

P121708

Loosen the two bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-50-6] holding

the gear pump and slide the gear pump back.

Installation: Tighten the bolts to 71 - 79 N•m (52.5 - 58.5

ft-lb) torque. Use antisieze on the splines of the gear
PE2181
pump shaft.

Install the new drive belt (See Drive Belt Routing

Stop the engine. Open the hood. Diagram) [Figure 30-50-5].

Remove the negative (-) cable from the battery. Install the hydraulic gear pump.

Loosen the four fasteners (Item 1) and remove belt shield Install the belt shield and mounting bolts.
(Item 2) [Figure 30-50-1].
Install the negative (-) battery cable.
Loosen idler mounting bolt (Item 1) [Figure 30-50-4].

Tensioner Pulley Removal And Installation

Refer to Drive Belt section on Removing the Drive Belt

Shield, Adjusting the Drive Belt Tension, Drive Belt
Replacement and Drive Belt Alignment.

Remove the muffler. (See Removal And Installation on

Page 70-30-1.)

30-50-3 MT85 Service Manual

30-50-4 MT85 Service Manual
HYDROSTATIC CONTROLS Figure 30-60-3

Pump Controls Disassembly and Assembly (Early

Models)

Open the rear door and front hood.

Figure 30-60-1

1
1

3
3
P122747

1
Remove the steering rod ends (Item 1) from the pump
control arm (Item 2) and disconnect the neutral sense
switch connectors (Item 3) [Figure 30-60-1] from the
harness.

Figure 30-60-2
P122746

2 Disassemble the bracket and lever assembly as shown

and replace the swivel connection (Item 1) [Figure 30-
3 60-6], if needed.

P122763

Remove the steering rod ends (Item 1) from the pump

lever assembly (Item 2). Remove the lever assembly
mounting bolts and nuts (Item 3) [Figure 30-60-5] to
remove the lever assembly from the mainframe.

Assembly: Tighten tie rod nuts to 24 N•m (17.7 ft-lb)

torque.

30-60-1 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC CONTROLS (CONT’D) Figure 30-60-6

Pump Controls Disassembly and Assembly (Later

Models)

Open the rear door and front hood.

Figure 30-60-4

1
1

3
3
P122747A

1
Remove the steering rod ends (Item 1) from the pump
control arm (Item 2) and disconnect the neutral sense
switch connectors (Item 3) [Figure 30-60-1] from the
harness.

Figure 30-60-5
P122746A

2 Disassemble the bracket and lever assembly as shown

3
and replace the swivel connection (Item 1) [Figure 30-
60-6], if needed.

P127136

Remove the steering rod ends (Item 1) from the pump

lever assembly (Item 2). Remove the lever assembly
mounting bolts and nuts (Item 3) [Figure 30-60-5] to
remove the lever assembly from the mainframe.

Assembly: Tighten tie rod nuts to 24 N•m (17.7 ft-lb)

torque.

30-60-2 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC CONTROLS (CONT’D) NOTE: To disassemble without removing the sensor
switch, insert a pin through the hole (Item 3)
Pump Controls Disassembly and Assembly (All and into the mounting plate (Item 4). Failure to
Models) secure the arm will result in switch damage by
the spring forces.
NOTE: Hydrostatic pump assembly removed for
clarity, removal not needed for actual Assembly: Tighten bolts and nuts to 8 N•m (70 in-lb)
procedure. torque. Do NOT exceed the torque for the bolts or the
sensor may be damaged.
Figure 30-60-7
Figure 30-60-9

1
2
1
1

P122765

P122750

The pivot roller (Item 1) [Figure 30-60-7] centers in the

follower arm (Item 2) at the pump neutral position. Remove the bolts (Item 1) from the cam plate (Item 2)
[Figure 30-60-9] and remove the plate.
NOTE: Adjustments are made to the linkage arms,
connected to the control handles, to maintain Assembly: Tighten the bolts to 39 N•m (29 ft-lb) torque.
the correct handle position. (See Travel
Control Lever Adjustment (Early Models) on Figure 30-60-10
Page 30-60-7.) and (See Travel Control Lever
Adjustment (Later Models) on Page 30-60-7.)
1
Figure 30-60-8

4 P122751
3
2
1 Loosen the bolt (Item 1) on the pintle arm (Item 2)
P122749 [Figure 30-60-10] and remove the arm.

Assembly: Tighten the bolt to 39 N•m (29 ft-lb) torque.

Remove the bolts and nuts (Item 1) to remove the neutral
sensor switch (Item 2) [Figure 30-60-8] from the
mounting plate.

30-60-3 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC CONTROLS (CONT’D) Figure 30-60-12

Pump Controls Disassembly and Assembly (Cont’d)

Figure 30-60-11

2
1

P122753

Remove the bolts (Item 1) from the mounting plate (Item

1
P122752 2) [Figure 30-60-12] and remove the mounting plate.

Assembly: Tighten bolts to 39 N•m (29 ft-lb) torque.

Remove the bolts, nuts, spacers, and spring from the
centering arm (Item 1). Remove the centering arm bolt
and nut and remove the arm from the mounting plate
(Item 2) [Figure 30-60-11].

Assembly: Connect the ends of the spring over the

spacers. Tighten bolts and nuts to 39 N•m (29 ft-lb)
torque.

30-60-4 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC CONTROLS (CONT’D) Figure 30-60-14

Pump Controls Adjustment

NOTE: Carefully and completely read the adjustment

procedures, before starting any adjustments.

Adjustments to the pump controls may be required if

components are replaced and the steering control levers
are not centered in neutral or the loader creeps when the
control lever is in the center position. 1

NOTE: If the neutral start sensor is not activating,

inspect the pump control components for
damage, or wear. For information on the
neutral start sensor, (See NEUTRAL START P121777
SENSOR on Page 60-60-1.)

Lift and block loader. (See Procedure on Page 10-10-1.) Loosen the cam plate mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-
60-14] for the left hydrostatic pump.

Open the rear door.

WARNING Figure 30-60-15

MACHINE FALLING OR MOVING CAN CAUSE

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
Put jackstands under the front and rear of the
machine before running engine for service.
W-2718-0208

1
Figure 30-60-13

P122765

1
Loosen the cam plate mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure 30-
60-15] for the right hydrostatic pump.

NOTE: Access to the right pump controls is also

possible by raising the front cover.
P124016

Remove the left rear access panel (Item 1) [Figure 30-

60-13].

30-60-5 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC CONTROLS (CONT’D)

Pump Control Adjustment (Cont’d)

Disengage the parking brake and start the engine from

the operator area behind the machine.

NOTE: Hydrostatic pump removed for clarity,

removal not needed for actual procedure.

Figure 30-60-16

P122765

After the operation of the hydrostatic system, the pivot

rollers (Item 1) [Figure 30-60-16] will center in the cam
plate (Item 2) at the pump hydraulic neutral position.

The hydraulic and mechanical neutrals are now aligned

for the elimination of creep.

Tighten the bolts for the cam plates.

NOTE: Care should be taken when tightening the

bolts as the tracks may move due to the
forces exerted on the pump controls.

30-60-6 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC CONTROLS (CONT’D) Travel Control Lever Adjustment (Later Models)

Travel Control Lever Adjustment (Early Models) Figure 30-60-19

Figure 30-60-17

P121746

P121746
Figure 30-60-20

Figure 30-60-18

1 1

P127136

P122763
The travel control lever (Item 1) [Figure 30-60-19] is
adjusted vertically left-to-right by adjusting the linkage
The travel control lever (Item 1) [Figure 30-60-17] is rods (Item 1) [Figure 30-60-20].
adjusted vertically left-to-right by adjusting the linkage
rod ends (Item 1) [Figure 30-60-18]. NOTE: The linkage rod ends are right and left hand
threaded like a turnbuckle.
NOTE: The linkage rods are not right and left hand
threaded like a turnbuckle. In order to adjust Turn the linkage rod clockwise to shorten and move the
the length of the linkage rods, one of the top of the lever toward the adjusted side.
linkage rod ends must be removed first.
NOTE: Start the procedure with all the rod ends
Turn the upper rod end clockwise to shorten and move threaded to half the threaded length.
the top of the lever toward the adjusted side.

NOTE: Start the procedure with all the rod ends

threaded to half the threaded length.

30-60-7 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC CONTROLS (CONT’D) Figure 30-60-22

Full Forward Travel Adjustment Full Forward Travel

Perform the full forward travel adjustment with the engine

off and the loader on a flat, level surface with the parking 2
brake engaged. 3

Figure 30-60-21
1

1 P121741

Figure 30-60-23
Reverse Travel

P121721

Adjustment of the throat plate (Item 1) [Figure 30-60-21],

2
mounted on the bottom surface of the instrument panel,
will affect the full throttle position and the steering drift.

P121746

Loosen the front bolt (Item 1) [Figure 30-60-22] and rear

bolt (Item 1) [Figure 30-60-23] positioning the throat
plate (Item 2) [Figure 30-60-22] and [Figure 30-60-23].

Run the machine and stroke the lever to full forward

against the throttle plate.

NOTE: If the control lever contacts the reference bar

(Item 3) [Figure 30-60-22] before reaching full
stroke on the pumps, equally adjust both rod
ends clockwise to shorten the linkages.

Once the control lever seats in the forward position of the

throat plate and with full stroke on the pumps, tighten the
bolts.

30-60-8 MT85 Service Manual

HYDROSTATIC CONTROLS (CONT’D) Figure 30-60-25

Steering Drift Adjustment Reverse Travel

Adjustment for steering drift will require the machine to

be operated in an open area with the travel control lever
stroked in both the full forward and full reverse positions.

Figure 30-60-24 2

Full Forward Travel

1
2

P121746

1
Loosen the rear bolt (Item 1) holding the throat plate
(Item 2) [Figure 30-60-25] in position.

Run the machine and stroke the lever to full reverse

against the throttle plate. If the machine is drifting, tap the
P121741 lever enough to move the throat plate in the opposite
direction.

Loosen the front bolt (Item 1) holding the throat plate NOTE: Care should be taken, as the machine may
(Item 2) [Figure 30-60-24] in position. jump suddenly when tapping the lever.

Run the machine and stroke the lever to full forward Once the machine is steering straight in Reverse travel,
against the throttle plate. If the machine is drifting, tap the tighten the rear bolt (Item 1) [Figure 30-60-25] to 10 N•m
lever enough to move the throat plate in the opposite (90 in-lb) torque.
direction.

NOTE: Care should be taken, as the machine may

jump suddenly when tapping the lever.

Once the machine is steering straight in Forward travel,

tighten the front bolt (Item 1) [Figure 30-60-24] to 10
N•m (90 in-lb) torque.

30-60-9 MT85 Service Manual

30-60-10 MT85 Service Manual
 DRIVE SYSTEM

PARKING BRAKE (EARLY MODELS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-10-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-10-1
Handle Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-10-1
Cable Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-10-1
Cable Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-10-2
Linkage Assembly Removal And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-10-4
Brake Pin Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-10-5

PARKING BRAKE (LATER MODELS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-11-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-11-1
Handle Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-11-1
Cable Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-11-1
Cable Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-11-2
Linkage Assembly Removal And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-11-4
Brake Pin Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-11-5

TRACK CARRIAGE COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-1
Checking Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-1
Adjusting Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-2
Track Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-3
Idler (Front) Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-4
Idler (Front) Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-4
Idler (Rear) Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-5
Idler (Rear) Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-6
Idler (Rear) Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-7
Tensioner Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-8
Roller Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-8
Roller Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-9
Roller Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-10
Carriage Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-11
Track Damage Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-20-12

40-01 MT85 Service Manual

40-02 MT85 Service Manual
PARKING BRAKE (EARLY MODELS) Figure 40-10-2

Description

The parking brake is a hand operated system that uses

brake pins engaged in the splines of the drive motor hub
to prevent the machine from moving.

A cable connects the hand lever to a linkage assembly 1

which moves brake pins in and out preventing or allowing
the drive motor to turn.

Handle Removal And Installation

Remove the instrument panel. (See Removal And

Installation on Page 50-50-1.) P-51128

Figure 40-10-1
Remove the brake handle assembly (Item 1) [Figure 40-
10-2] from the loader.

Reverse the removal procedure to install the parking

1
brake handle.
2 Cable Removal And Installation

Remove the hydraulic fluid reservoir. (See Removal And

Installation on Page 20-80-1.)

Remove the instrument panel. (See Removal And

Installation on Page 50-50-1.)

P121712 Figure 40-10-3

Remove the rod end (Item 1) [Figure 40-10-1] from the

brake handle.
1
Remove the nut and washer (Item 2) [Figure 40-10-1] 3
2
from the brake handle.

Installation: Tighten the nut to 12 N•m (108 in-lb) torque.

P121712

Remove the rod end (Item 1) [Figure 40-10-3] from the

brake handle.

Loosen jambnut (Item 2) holding cable to upper cable

mount (Item 3) [Figure 40-10-3].

Remove cable from the upper cable mount.

40-10-1 MT85 Service Manual

PARKING BRAKE (EARLY MODELS) (CONT’D) Cable Adjustment

Cable Removal And Installation (Cont’d) Figure 40-10-5

Figure 40-10-4

1
2
2
3
1
5 mm
(0.20 in)

3 P-59898

P-59898
Turn the rod end (Item 1) all the way onto the bottom
cable and turn the jamb nut (Item 2) [Figure 40-10-5]
Remove the rod end (Item 1) from the lower cable mount until 5 mm (0.20 in) of threads are showing on the outer
(Item 2) [Figure 40-10-4]. edge.

Loosen jambnut (Item 3) holding cable to lower cable Install the cable and tighten the inner jambnut (Item 3)
mount (Item 2) [Figure 40-10-4]. [Figure 40-10-5].

Remove the cable.

NOTE: When replacing the cable with a new one

position the jam nuts and rod ends at
approximately the same position that they
were on the old one.

Reverse the removal procedure to install the cable.

40-10-2 MT85 Service Manual

PARKING BRAKE (EARLY MODELS) (CONT’D) Figure 40-10-7

Cable Adjustment (Cont’d)

Figure 40-10-6 1
2,5 mm
(0.10 in)

2
3

13 mm
(0.50 in)

P-51129

1
Adjust the cable by moving the jam nuts (Item 1) [Figure
P121712
40-10-6] up or down until the brake pins (Item 1) [Figure
40-10-7] protrude 2,5 mm (0.10 in) when the brake
handle is in the retracted position.
Install the two jam nuts (Item 1) onto the upper cable end
and turn the rod end (Item 2) [Figure 40-10-6] Tighten jam nuts (Item 1) [Figure 40-10-6] when the
completely onto the cable end. adjustments are completed.

Adjust the jam nuts (Item 1) [Figure 40-10-6] until 13 mm NOTE: If while operating machine you hear a ticking
(0.50 in) of threads are showing. sound emitting from the brake pin area you
may need to recheck the brake cable
Install cable onto upper cable mount (Item 3) and snug adjustment.
the jam nuts (Item 1) [Figure 40-10-6], finger tight.

40-10-3 MT85 Service Manual

PARKING BRAKE (EARLY MODELS) (CONT’D) NOTE: The removed view is shown for visual clarity
you do not need to remove the entire
Linkage Assembly Removal And Assembly assembly for inspection.

Remove the hydraulic fluid reservoir. (See Removal And Figure 40-10-10
Installation on Page 20-80-1.)

Remove the battery. (See Removal And Installation on

Page 60-20-1.)

Figure 40-10-8

1 1

4 1 1
5

2
1 P-51091

Inspect the nylon bushings (Item 1) [Figure 40-10-10] for

3 wear and replace if needed.

P-59898 Figure 40-10-11

Remove the rod end (Item 1) from the lower cable mount
(Item 2) [Figure 40-10-8]. 1 1
Loosen jambnut (Item 3) holding cable to lower cable
mount (Item 2) [Figure 40-10-8] and remove the cable.

Remove the linkage retainer and linkage (Item 4) from

the brake pin (Item 5) [Figure 40-10-8].

Figure 40-10-9
View From Engine Area

P-51089
1
Inspect levers (Item 1) [Figure 40-10-11] for unrestricted
movement, lubricate or replace parts as needed.

2
2
P-51092

To remove the entire assembly (Item 1) remove the four

bolts from the linkage mounting holes (Item 2) [Figure
40-10-9].

40-10-4 MT85 Service Manual

PARKING BRAKE (EARLY MODELS) (CONT’D)

Brake Pin Lubrication

Figure 40-10-12
Left Side Shown

P-59898

Figure 40-10-13

Left Side Shown

P-48933

Lubricate the parking brake pin (Item 1) [Figure 40-10-

12] and [Figure 40-10-13] with anti-seize only and move
the parking brake lever back and forth to lubricate the
entire pin area.

Repeat the lubrication for the parking brake pin on the

other side.

40-10-5 MT85 Service Manual

40-10-6 MT85 Service Manual
PARKING BRAKE (LATER MODELS) Figure 40-11-2

Description

The parking brake is a hand operated system that uses

brake pins engaged in the splines of the drive motor hub
to prevent the machine from moving.

A cable connects the hand lever to a linkage assembly 1

which moves brake pins in and out preventing or allowing
the drive motor to turn.

Handle Removal And Installation

Remove the instrument panel. (See Removal And

Installation on Page 50-50-1.) P-51128

Figure 40-11-1
Remove the brake handle assembly (Item 1) [Figure 40-
11-2] from the loader.

1 Reverse the removal procedure to install the parking

brake handle.

Cable Removal And Installation

2
Remove the hydraulic fluid reservoir. (See Removal And
Installation on Page 20-80-1.)

Remove the instrument panel. (See Removal And

1 Installation on Page 50-50-1.)

P-48968 Figure 40-11-3

1
Remove the rod end (Item 1) [Figure 40-11-1] from the
brake handle.

Remove the nut and washer (Item 2) [Figure 40-11-1]

from the brake handle.

Installation: Tighten the nut to 12 N•m (108 in-lb) torque.

2 3

P-48962

Remove the rod end (Item 1) [Figure 40-11-3] from the

brake handle.

Loosen jambnut (Item 2) holding cable to upper cable

mount (Item 3) [Figure 40-11-3].

Remove cable from the upper cable mount.

40-11-1 MT85 Service Manual

PARKING BRAKE (LATER MODELS) (CONT’D) Cable Adjustment

Cable Removal And Installation (Cont’d) Figure 40-11-5

Figure 40-11-4

1
2
2
3
1
5 mm
(0.20 in)

3 P-59898

P-59898
Turn the rod end (Item 1) all the way onto the bottom
cable and turn the jamb nut (Item 2) [Figure 40-11-5]
Remove the rod end (Item 1) from the lower cable mount until 5 mm (0.20 in) of threads are showing on the outer
(Item 2) [Figure 40-11-4]. edge.

Loosen jambnut (Item 3) holding cable to lower cable Install the cable and tighten the inner jambnut (Item 3)
mount (Item 2) [Figure 40-11-4]. [Figure 40-11-5].

Remove the cable.

NOTE: When replacing the cable with a new one

position the jam nuts and rod ends at
approximately the same position that they
were on the old one.

Reverse the removal procedure to install the cable.

40-11-2 MT85 Service Manual

PARKING BRAKE (LATER MODELS) (CONT’D) Figure 40-11-7

Cable Adjustment (Cont’d)

Figure 40-11-6 1
2,5 mm
(0.10 in)

13 mm 3
(0.50 in)

P-51129
1

Adjust the cable by moving the jam nuts (Item 1) [Figure

P-48962
40-11-6] up or down until the brake pins (Item 1) [Figure
40-11-7] protrude 2,5 mm (0.10 in) when the brake
handle is in the retracted position.
Install the two jam nuts (Item 1) onto the upper cable end
and turn the rod end (Item 2) [Figure 40-11-6] Tighten jam nuts (Item 1) [Figure 40-11-6] when the
completely onto the cable end. adjustments are completed.

Adjust the jam nuts (Item 1) [Figure 40-11-6] until 13 mm NOTE: If while operating machine you hear a ticking
(0.50 in) of threads are showing. sound emitting from the brake pin area you
may need to recheck the brake cable
Install cable onto upper cable mount (Item 3) and snug adjustment.
the jam nuts (Item 1) [Figure 40-11-6], finger tight.

40-11-3 MT85 Service Manual

PARKING BRAKE (LATER MODELS) (CONT’D) NOTE: The removed view is shown for visual clarity
you do not need to remove the entire
Linkage Assembly Removal And Assembly assembly for inspection.

Remove the hydraulic fluid reservoir. (See Removal And Figure 40-11-10
Installation on Page 20-80-1.)

Remove the battery. (See Removal And Installation on

Page 60-20-1.)

Figure 40-11-8

1 1

4 1 1
5

2
1 P-51091

Inspect the nylon bushings (Item 1) [Figure 40-11-10] for

3 wear and replace if needed.

P-59898 Figure 40-11-11

Remove the rod end (Item 1) from the lower cable mount
(Item 2) [Figure 40-11-8]. 1 1
Loosen jambnut (Item 3) holding cable to lower cable
mount (Item 2) [Figure 40-11-8] and remove the cable.

Remove the linkage retainer and linkage (Item 4) from

the brake pin (Item 5) [Figure 40-11-8].

Figure 40-11-9
View From Engine Area

P-51089
1
Inspect levers (Item 1) [Figure 40-11-11] for unrestricted
movement, lubricate or replace parts as needed.

2
2
P-51092

To remove the entire assembly (Item 1) remove the four

bolts from the linkage mounting holes (Item 2) [Figure
40-11-9].

40-11-4 MT85 Service Manual

PARKING BRAKE (LATER MODELS) (CONT’D)

Brake Pin Lubrication

Figure 40-11-12
Left Side Shown

P-59898

Figure 40-11-13

Left Side Shown

P-48933

Lubricate the parking brake pin (Item 1) [Figure 40-11-

12] and [Figure 40-11-13] with anti-seize only and move
the parking brake lever back and forth to lubricate the
entire pin area.

Repeat the lubrication for the parking brake pin on the

other side.

40-11-5 MT85 Service Manual

40-11-6 MT85 Service Manual
TRACK CARRIAGE COMPONENTS Figure 40-20-2

Description

The track carriage components consist of front and rear

idlers, rollers, the track, the drive sprocket and the track
carriage.

Checking Tension
1
Figure 40-20-1

114 mm
114 mm
(4.5 in)
(4.5 in)
P-51135

The adjusting bolt retainer plate doubles as a track

P-51137 tension adjustment check tool [Figure 40-20-2].

P124003

Track tension is important for good performance and to

prevent the tracks from coming off.

NOTE: The track wear and roller wear will vary with
the working conditions and different types of
soil conditions.

The tracks are adjusted correctly when the measurement

from the front end of the slot to the block is 114 mm (4.5
in) [Figure 40-20-1].

40-20-1 MT85 Service Manual

TRACK CARRIAGE COMPONENTS (CONT’D)

Adjusting Tension

Figure 40-20-3

1
3

P-51095

Park the loader on a level surface.

Remove the bolt retainer plate (Item 1) by removing the

retaining bolt (Item 2) [Figure 40-20-3].

Turn the adjustment bolt (Item 3) [Figure 40-20-3]

counterclockwise to tighten the track. (Increase the
distance from the slot to the block [Figure 40-20-1].)

Turn adjustment bolt clockwise to loosen the track.

(Decrease the distance from the slot to the block [Figure
40-20-1].)

Turn until the correct measurement is obtained [Figure

40-20-1]

NOTE: On a new track, the initial tension setting is

achieved by tightening the adjustment bolt
(Item 3) [Figure 40-20-3] to 270 N•m (200 ft-lb)
torque.

Turn bolt slightly if needed until one of the holes (Item 1)

[Figure 40-20-2] is aligned and install the bolt (Item 2)
[Figure 40-20-3].

40-20-2 MT85 Service Manual

TRACK CARRIAGE COMPONENTS (CONT’D) Figure 40-20-6

Track Removal And Installation

Park the loader on a level surface.

Lift and block the loader. (See Procedure on Page 10-10-

1.)

Figure 40-20-4

P-48518

Turn the adjustment bolt (Item 1) [Figure 40-20-6]

clockwise to loosen the track and the track tension spring
has no tension.

Figure 40-20-7

P-31750 P121687

Raise the lift arms 152,4 mm (6 in) and install floor jacks
under the Bob-Tach [Figure 40-20-4] to provide
clearance for track removal.

Figure 40-20-5

P-48935

NOTE: To protect your hands from injury, always

2 1
wear gloves before removal and installation of
the track.

With a pry bar (Item 1) [Figure 40-20-7] pry the track up

over the front idler assembly.
P-51095
Completely remove the track from the loader track frame
and drive sprocket.
Remove the bolt (Item 1) [Figure 40-20-5] holding the
retainer plate. Reverse the removal procedure to install the track.

Remove the retainer plate (Item 2) [Figure 40-20-5]. After re-installing the track, follow the Adjusting Tracks
procedure to set the correct track tension. (See Adjusting
Tension on Page 40-20-2.)

NOTE: When installing a new track, the track tension

should be readjusted after 8 hours of use.

40-20-3 MT85 Service Manual

TRACK CARRIAGE COMPONENTS (CONT’D) Idler (Front) Disassembly And Assembly

Idler (Front) Removal And Installation Lift and block the loader. (See Procedure on Page 10-10-
1.)
Lift and block the loader. (See Procedure on Page 10-10-
1.) Remove the track. (See Track Removal And Installation
on Page 40-20-3.)
Remove the track. (See Track Removal And Installation
on Page 40-20-3.) Figure 40-20-10

Figure 40-20-8

3
2

1 P-31791

P121730
Figure 40-20-11

Remove the nut (Item 1) and bolt (Item 2) [Figure 40-20-

8] from the idler assembly.
1 2 2 1
Remove the idler pin (Item 3) from the track frame using
a slide hammer (Item 4) [Figure 40-20-8].

Figure 40-20-9

2 2 P-31792

Remove the front idler, see [Figure 40-20-8].

Remove the shaft seals (both sides) (Item 1) [Figure 40-

20-10] and [Figure 40-20-11] from the idler.

P-51112A Remove the bushings (both sides) (Item 2) [Figure 40-

20-11] from the idler.

Remove the idler (Item 1) and washers (Item 2) [Figure NOTE: The shaft seal must be installed with the
40-20-9] from track frame. rubber seal facing in and the metal case
facing out.

Reverse the disassembly procedure to assemble the rear

idler.

40-20-4 MT85 Service Manual

TRACK CARRIAGE COMPONENTS (CONT’D) NOTE: The rear idler assembly contains the track
tension (spring) assembly.
Idler (Rear) Removal And Installation
NOTE: The tear drop of the track idler (Item 1) [Figure
NOTE: New style machines have a notch in the loader 40-20-12] is facing down towards the ground
frame to allow removal of the rear idler for installation.
without separating the track carriage from the
loader frame. Figure 40-20-13

Lift and block the loader. (See Procedure on Page 10-10- 2

1.)

Remove the track. (See Track Removal And Installation

on Page 40-20-3.)

Older style machines without notch in frame. Remove the

carriage frame assembly from the loader frame. (See
Carriage Removal And Installation on Page 40-20-11.)

NOTE: On older machines the rear idler assembly

can be removed from the track carriage while 1 1
drive motor hoses are still connected. This
eliminates the need to remove the hydraulic P-51112
hoses from drive motor. Swing track carriage
out far enough to remove rear idler assembly
after removing track carriage mounting bolts. Assembly: Place the washers (Item 1) between the idler
(Item 2) [Figure 40-20-13] and the track frame.
Figure 40-20-12
Reverse the removal procedure to install the rear idler.

Install the track. (See Track Removal And Installation on

Page 40-20-3.)
1

4 2

P-51110

Remove the nut (Item 1) and bolt (Item 2) [Figure 40-20-

12] from both sides of the track idler assembly.

Remove the idler pin (Item 3) [Figure 40-20-12] from the

idler frame.

Remove the idler arm (Item 4) [Figure 40-20-12] from

the frame by sliding it out towards the rear of the loader.

NOTE: To protect your hands from injury always

wear gloves before removal and installation of
the track idler.

40-20-5 MT85 Service Manual

TRACK CARRIAGE COMPONENTS (CONT’D)

Idler (Rear) Parts Identification

1. Idler Plate
2. Compression Spring
3. Idler Arm
4. Bolt
5. Idler Pin
6. Nut
7. Thrust Washer
8. Shaft Seal
9. Bushing
10. Idler
11. Grease Fitting
12. Tensioner Rod

4
4

3
5

2
6
10 6
7
8 9
9 8 7

12
1

11

PE1426C

40-20-6 MT85 Service Manual

TRACK CARRIAGE COMPONENTS (CONT’D) Figure 40-20-16

Idler (Rear) Disassembly And Assembly

Figure 40-20-14

P-31791

2
Figure 40-20-17
P-31793

Remove the nut (Item 1) and bolt (Item 2) [Figure 40-20- 1 2 2 1

14] from both sides of the track idler assembly.

Remove the idler pin (Item 3) [Figure 40-20-14] from the

idler frame.

Figure 40-20-15

1
2

2 P-31792

Remove the shaft seals (both sides) (Item 1) [Figure 40-

20-16] and [Figure 40-20-17] from the idler.

Remove the bushings (both sides) (Item 2) [Figure 40-

20-17] from the idler.

NOTE: The shaft seal must be installed with the

P-31790 rubber seal facing in and the metal case
facing out.

Remove the idler (Item 1) and washers (Item 2) [Figure Reverse the disassembly procedure to assemble the rear
40-20-15] from the idler frame. idler.

40-20-7 MT85 Service Manual

TRACK CARRIAGE COMPONENTS (CONT’D) Roller Removal And Installation

Tensioner Disassembly And Assembly Figure 40-20-20

Figure 40-20-18
1
3

1
2

5 2
4

P-31785

P-31465A
Remove the track. (See Track Removal And Installation
on Page 40-20-3.)
Remove the tensioner rod assembly (Item 1) and
compression spring (Item 2) [Figure 40-20-18] from the Remove the pin lock plate bolt (Item 1) [Figure 40-20-
idler assembly. 20].

Figure 40-20-19 Remove the keyed pin bolt (Item 2) [Figure 40-20-20].

Remove the two pin lock plates (Item 3) [Figure 40-20-

1 20].
2
Remove the keyed pin (Item 4) [Figure 40-20-20] from
the track roller and track frame.

Remove the track roller (Item 5) [Figure 40-20-20] from

the track frame.

NOTE: There are thrust washers between the idler

and track frame.

Reverse the disassembly procedure to assemble the

P-31467A track roller.

NOTE: One roller without a center rib must be

Thread (spin) the idler plate (Item 1) off the rod tensioner installed at the back on each side.
(Item 2) [Figure 40-20-19].

40-20-8 MT85 Service Manual

TRACK CARRIAGE COMPONENTS (CONT’D)

Roller Parts Identification

1. Thrust Washer
2. Shaft Seal
3. Bushing
4. Idler
5. Grease Fitting

2 4
5

2
1
3

5 3
1

PE1426B

40-20-9 MT85 Service Manual

TRACK CARRIAGE COMPONENTS (CONT’D)

Roller Disassembly And Assembly

Figure 40-20-21

1
1

P-31786

Remove the washers (Item 1) [Figure 40-20-21].

Figure 40-20-22

1 3
3 1

P-31787

Remove the shaft seals (both sides) (Item 1) from the

track roller (Item 2) [Figure 40-20-22].

Remove the bushings (both sides) (Item 3) [Figure 40-

20-22] from the idler.

NOTE: The shaft seal must be installed with the

rubber seal facing in and the metal case
facing out.

Reverse the disassembly procedure to assemble the

track roller.

40-20-10 MT85 Service Manual

TRACK CARRIAGE COMPONENTS (CONT’D) Figure 40-20-25

Carriage Removal And Installation

Lift and block the loader. (See Procedure on Page 10-10-

1.) 1
1
1
Remove the track. (See Track Removal And Installation
on Page 40-20-3.)
1
Remove the drive motor. (See Removal And Installation 1
on Page 30-20-1.)

Figure 40-20-23

P121729

Remove the seven nuts (Item 1) [Figure 40-20-25] from

the carriage bolts.
2
Figure 40-20-26

1
1

P121728

Remove the two bolts (Item 1) from the brake pin housing
(Item 2) [Figure 40-20-23].
1 1
Remove the brake pin housing.

Figure 40-20-24 P-48977

NOTE: Make sure the track frame is supported

properly before removing the three bolts.
1
Remove the three remaining nuts (Item 1) [Figure 40-20-
26] from the track frame.

Remove the track frame from the side of the loader.

Reverse the removal procedure to install track frame.

2
2 P-48974

Install a chain and hoist (Item 1) onto the track frame at

the points shown (Item 2) [Figure 40-20-24].

Protect the boom from scratches using a cloth or other

item.

40-20-11 MT85 Service Manual

TRACK CARRIAGE COMPONENTS (CONT’D) Figure 40-20-29

Track Damage Identification

Figure 40-20-27

PI-13035

Causes of the damage:

P-3864
When applied to rubber tracks under the following
circumstances, tension in excess of the breaking
Figure 40-20-28 strength of the embedded steel cords causes steel
cords to be cut:

When the rubber track is detracking, the idler or

sprocket rides on the projections of the embedded
metal [Figure 40-20-29].

When the rubber track is detracked, projections of

rubber tracks get stuck between the frame of the
undercarriage.

The rubber track is clogged with stones or foreign

obstacles.
Steel Cords
Furthermore, when moisture invades through a cut on
PI-13034 the lug side rubber surface, the embedded steel cords
will corrode. The deterioration of the design strength may
lead to the breaking off of the steel cords.
Cutting Of Steel Cords
Prevention:
The following pages show photos and illustrations of
track damage and the probable cause of the damage. It The following preventions should be taken to minimize
is intended to be used for identifying the reason for track the risk of this damage:
damage and how to avoid future track damage.
Periodical checking on site of the recommended track
Damage: tension. (See Checking Tension on Page 40-20-1.)
Embedded steel cords are cut off [Figure 40-20-27] Avoiding quick turns on bumpy and rocky fields.
and [Figure 40-20-28].
Drive carefully to avoid having stones and other
Replacement: articles clog the rubber tracks.
Replacement is required [Figure 40-20-27] and Driving over sharp objects should be avoided. If this
[Figure 40-20-28]. is impossible, do not make turns while driving over
sharp objects.

40-20-12 MT85 Service Manual

TRACK CARRIAGE COMPONENTS (CONT’D) Causes of the damage:

Track Damage Identification (Cont'd) When the track rollers, sprockets and idler gears roll over
the embedded metals, abrasion of embedded metals is
Figure 40-20-30 inevitable. The following cases sometimes accelerate
their abrasion:

Rubber tracks are driven with an extraordinary heavy

load on them.

Rubber tracks are used on sandy fields.

Prevention:

As long as rubber tracks are used under normal

operating conditions, abnormal abrasion is unlikely to
occur. The level of abrasion should be carefully checked
when the machines are used for dozing which generate a
heavy load for rubber tracks, and when they are operated
P-3865 under a sandy field condition for a long time.

Abrasion Of Embedded Metals

Damage:

In proportion to the service time, embedded metals

will gradually wear away by friction [Figure 40-20-30].

Figure 40-20-31

Abrasion

D D1 = 0.67D

PI-13037

Replacement:

Replacement is required when the width of the

embedded metals (D1) becomes 67% of their original
width (D) [Figure 40-20-31].

40-20-13 MT85 Service Manual

TRACK CARRIAGE COMPONENTS (CONT’D) When the idler continually rides on the projections of
embedded metals, the embedded metals will
Track Damage Identification (Cont'd) eventually peel off [Figure 40-20-33].

Figure 40-20-32 Figure 40-20-34

Guide

P-4379 PI-13040

When a rubber track is detracked, it becomes stuck

Separation Of Embedded Metals between the guide or the undercarriage frame,
causing the separation of embedded metals [Figure
Damage: 40-20-34].

Extraordinary outer forces applied to embedded Figure 40-20-35

metals cause their separation from the rubber track's
body [Figure 40-20-32].

Replacement:

Even a partial separation of embedded metals

requires replacement of the track.
Abrasion
Figure 40-20-33

Idler
PI-13041

Abnormally worn sprockets as shown will pull

Rubber embedded metals out [Figure 40-20-35].
Track
Prevention:

Similar to the prevention against the cutting of the steel

cords:
PI-13039
Recommended track tension should be periodically
checked. (See Checking Tension on Page 40-20-1.)
Causes of the damage:
Quick turns on bumpy and rocky fields should be
Embedded metals are adhered between the steel cords avoided.
and the rubber body. The following cases generate
external forces greater than the adhesion strength, If abnormal wear of sprockets is observed, they
causing separation of the embedded metals: should be immediately replaced.

40-20-14 MT85 Service Manual

TRACK CARRIAGE COMPONENTS (CONT’D) Figure 40-20-37

Track Damage Identification (Cont'd)

Embedded metal
Figure 40-20-36

Good

Separation of bonded
rubber cover
PI-13043

Causes of the damage:

P-4378
Embedded metals are bonded to the rubber body. The
following operating conditions cause embedded metals to
Separation Of Embedded Metals Due To Corrosion corrode, causing deterioration of the bonding, and finally
resulting in separation of the embedded metals from the
Damage: rubber body [Figure 40-20-37].

Due to corrosion of embedded metals, the adhesion Excessively salty fields, like the sea shore.
to the rubber body deteriorates, resulting in complete
separation [Figure 40-20-36]. Strong acidic or alkali soil conditions

Replacement: Compost spread grounds

Even a partial separation of embedded metals On tracks that are out of adjustment, the track rollers,
requires a rubber track replacement. idlers and sprockets will gradually wear the rubber
surface at track roller side, causing exposure of the
embedded metals. Consequently the embedded metals
will corrode resulting in their separation from the rubber
body.

Prevention:

If rubber tracks are used under such field conditions as

described under (Causes of the damage), they should be
washed with plenty of water. After being completely
dried, they should be stored correctly.

When the bonded rubber cover is separated from the

embedded metal projections and the metals in the rubber
body become loose, it is time to consider replacement of
the rubber track.

40-20-15 MT85 Service Manual

TRACK CARRIAGE COMPONENTS (CONT’D) Figure 40-20-39

Track Damage Identification (Cont'd)

Cuts
Figure 40-20-38

PI-13045

Causes of the damage:

P-4377
When rubber tracks drive over projections or sharp
stones in the fields, the concentrated forces applied
Cuts On The Lug Side Rubber cause cuts on the lug side rubber surface. In case of
making turns on projections, the lug side rubber surface
Damage: will have an even higher chance to be cut. If the cuts run
through the embedded steel cords, it might result in the
Cuts on the lug side rubber often occurs as one of the steel cords' breakage due to their corrosion. It is highly
most typical failure modes [Figure 40-20-38] recommended to repair the cuts with cold vulcanization
rubber as soon as they are observed [Figure 40-20-39].
Replacement:
Prevention:
When a cut on the lug side rubber reaches the
embedded steel cords, it should be immediately Machine operators are requested to drive with great
repaired with cold vulcanization rubber. attention to the ground's surface especially in terrains of
the following type:

Construction sites

Demolition sites

Paths covered with rocks and wood

Concrete ridges

Stumpy fields

When operating on terrains as mentioned above, high

speed, quick turns and overloading should be avoided.

40-20-16 MT85 Service Manual

TRACK CARRIAGE COMPONENTS (CONT’D) Causes of the damage:

Track Damage Identification (Cont'd) Because of wound stress applied to rubber tracks around
the undercarriage parts during operation, the fatigue
Figure 40-20-40 especially causes cracks on the lug side rubber surface.
Once the cracks occur, they gradually deteriorate with
even small external cracks. Also when operating near
seashores or under cold temperatures, rubber tracks are
more likely to suffer from ozone cracks.

Prevention:

Rubber tracks are designed with special rubber

compounds to prevent cracks due to fatigue. However,
external injuries on the lug side rubber sometimes cause
more chance of cracking. Machine operators should
observe soil conditions when driving, so as not to cause
external injuries to the lug side rubber. In order to
minimize the occurrence of ozone cracks, attention
P-4382 should be paid to the following instructions for
maintenance:
Figure 40-20-41 Avoid exposing stored tracks to direct sun light.

Avoid exposing stored tracks to direct rain and snow

fall.

Store tracks in well ventilated warehouses.

Use the tracks at least once a month.

P-4380

Cracks On The Lug Side Rubber Due To Fatigue

Damage:

Small cracks around the root of the lug as a result from

operation fatigue [Figure 40-20-40] and [Figure 40-20-
41].

Replacement:

When the cracks reach so deep that they expose the

steel cords, track replacement is required.

40-20-17 MT85 Service Manual

TRACK CARRIAGE COMPONENTS (CONT’D) Causes of the damage:

Track Damage Identification (Cont'd) Lug abrasion is more or less inevitable. Even if lug
abrasion is proceeding, the rubber track can be used.
Figure 40-20-42 However, as the traction performance deteriorates
accordingly, it is highly recommended to replace the
abraded tracks with new ones when the lug height
becomes less than 5 mm (0.2 in).

Prevention:

In order to prevent the rubber track from abnormal or

premature abrasion, following operating conditions
should be avoided:

Making quick and repeated turns on concrete and

asphalt roads

Driving up and down hilly paths with slippage

P-4381
Making frequent turns on paths covered with rocks
and wood
Figure 40-20-43
Figure 40-20-44

Lug abrasion

PI-13049

CD-13050

Lug Abrasion
Cracks And Cuts On The Lug Side Rubber
Damage:
Damage:
As its service time proceeds, the lug side inevitably
undergoes abrasion [Figure 40-20-42] and [Figure Sometimes cracks and cuts on the lug side rubber at
40-20-43]. the edges of the embedded metals can be observed
[Figure 40-20-44].
Replacement:
Replacement:
No replacement is required.
Basically, no replacement is required unless the cuts on
the lug side rubber are discovered all around the edges
of the embedded metals, as this will result in a complete
cut off.

40-20-18 MT85 Service Manual

TRACK CARRIAGE COMPONENTS (CONT’D) Abrasion Of The Track Roller Side

Track Damage Identification (Cont'd) Damage:

Figure 40-20-45 The rubber surface on which track rollers run is

gradually abraded. It will end in the exposure of the
embedded metals [Figure 40-20-46].

Replacement:

Crack at the edge of Cut on lug side It is recommended to replace the rubber track when
embedded metal rubber more than half of the embedded metals are
completely exposed.

Figure 40-20-47

Track roller
PI-13051
Abrasion

Causes of the damage:

When rubber tracks drive over sharp projections,

intensive stress is applied to the lug side rubber surface,
especially at the edges of embedded metals, causing
cracks and cuts in the area around the embedded metals
[Figure 40-20-45]. PI-13053

Prevention:
Causes of the damage:
To avoid extensive stress applied to the lug root where
metals are embedded, machine operators are requested The abrasion of the track roller side rubber surface
to avoid driving over stumps and ridges. occurs because of sand and gravel being clogged
between the rubber and the outside surface of the track
Figure 40-20-46 rollers. The stress pushes the sand and gravel against
the side of the rubber track to cause the abrasion [Figure
40-20-47].

The level of abrasion is highly dependent on terrain

conditions. A higher level of abrasion will occur when the
rubber tracks are operated in fields covered with many
stones and gravel. Small stones hardened with mud,
stuck to the track rollers increase the abrasion level. After
an extended period of abrasion, it will be more likely for
exposed embedded metals to catch moisture through the
inside steel cords, which can cause breakage of steel
cords and separation of the metals from the rubber body.

Prevention:
P-4383
After operation in wet fields containing many small
stones, wash off the mud that is stuck to the track rollers
completely. When operating on gravel paths and stony
grounds, machines should be driven slowly and the
turning radius should be big enough to prevent stones
and gravel from getting stuck to the track roller side
rubber.

40-20-19 MT85 Service Manual

TRACK CARRIAGE COMPONENTS (CONT’D) Figure 40-20-50

Track Damage Identification (Cont'd)

Figure 40-20-48

PI-13056

Causes of the damage:

P-4384
This damage is caused by objects on the field or by
interference with the machine frame.
Figure 40-20-49
In case of damage by objects on the operating ground:

The edges of rubber track are often deformed largely

due to a bumpy ground surface, stones and other
objects, which cause extensive stress on the edges
Edge Edge
resulting in the damage. Especially, when a machine
drives over concrete ridges, this type of damage
easily occurs [Figure 40-20-50].

PI-13055

Cuts On The Edges Of Track Roller Side

Damage:

Both edges of a rubber track have no special

reinforcements. It sometimes occurs during operation
that they are cut or torn off [Figure 40-20-48] and
[Figure 40-20-49].

Replacement:

In such case, the rubber track does not have to be

replaced.

40-20-20 MT85 Service Manual

TRACK CARRIAGE COMPONENTS (CONT’D)

Track Damage Identification (Cont'd)

Figure 40-20-51

Cut

Tear

PI-13057

In case of damage by interference with the machine

frame

If a machine continues operating with rubber tracks

being detracked, the rubber tracks may get caught up
in the machine frame or undercarriage parts resulting
in damage. Furthermore, when a machine travels
along side slopes, the rubber tracks are deformed so
much that they come into contact with the machine
frame and undercarriage parts, which causes cutting,
gouging and rubbing of rubber tracks in the end
[Figure 40-20-51].

Prevention:

When traveling, a machine operator should be careful not

to drive over any projections on the ground. He should
also prevent rubber tracks from coming into contact with
concrete walls, ditches and ridges. If rubber tracks are
detracked, the machine should be stopped immediately
for retracting.

40-20-21 MT85 Service Manual

40-20-22 MT85 Service Manual
 MAINFRAME

BOB-TACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-10-1
Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-10-1
Seal Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-10-2
Lever And Wedge Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-10-3

COMMON INDUSTRY INTERFACE (CII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-11-1

CII - Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-11-1
CII - Seal Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-11-2
CII - Lever And Wedge Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-11-3

LIFT ARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-20-1

Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-20-1

REAR DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-30-1

Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-30-1
Latch Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-30-2
Bumper (Adjusting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-30-2

FUEL TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-40-1

Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-40-1
Fuel Level Sender Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-40-3

INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-50-1

Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-50-1

GRAB BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-60-1

Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-60-1

HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-70-1
Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-70-1
Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-70-1
Latch Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-70-2
Striker (Adjusting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-70-2

BOTTOM ACCESS PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-80-1

Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-80-1

OPERATOR PLATFORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-90-1

Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-90-1
Operator Cushion Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-90-2
Continuous Flow Shutoff System Pedal Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-90-2

50-01 MT85 Service Manual

50-02 MT85 Service Manual
BOB-TACH Figure 50-10-3

Removal And Installation

Figure 50-10-1

P-66223

1 1
Remove the grease fitting (Item 1) and slightly loosen the
P-31880 bolt (Item 2) [Figure 50-10-3].

Cover the grease fitting hole with a rag and strike the
Tilt the Bob-Tach forward so it is parallel to the floor. Put pivot pin bolt with a hammer to loosen the tapered pin.
blocks under the Bob-Tach and lower the Bob-Tach onto
the blocks (Item 1) [Figure 50-10-1]. Repeat the procedure for the other side.

Figure 50-10-2 Remove bolts and washers from lift arms and Bob-Tach.

Remove the Bob-Tach.

Installation: Install the grease fitting and align the Bob-

2 Tach pivot pin with the lift arm hole (both sides).

Installation: Add grease to the fitting (Item 1) [Figure

1 50-10-3] to force pivot pin into the lift arm hole.

Installation: Install the bolt (Item 2) [Figure 50-10-3] in

the pivot pin. Tighten the bolt to 125 - 135 N•m (90 - 100
ft-lb) torque.

P-31878

Remove the screw (Item 1) and retainer (Item 2) [Figure

50-10-2] from the rod end pivot pin.

Remove the pin.

Remove the pivot pin from the tilt cylinder and the Bob-
Tach.

Installation: Tighten the retainer screw to 20 - 27 N•m

(15 - 20 ft-lb) torque.

50-10-1 MT85 Service Manual

BOB-TACH (CONT’D) Figure 50-10-5

Seal Removal And Installation

Figure 50-10-4

3
1 1

P19280

Remove the seal (Item 1) [Figure 50-10-5] from the Bob-

P19281 Tach. Check the condition of the seal and replace as
needed.

Remove the Bob-Tach. (See Removal And Installation on NOTE: Install the seal with the lip facing outward.
Page 50-10-1.)
NOTE: There is a plug located at the bottom of the
Remove the grease fitting (Item 1) [Figure 50-10-4] from bore in each Bob-Tach bushing. The plug
the pivot pin grease chamber. helps contain the grease inside the bushing
and is a very low service item.
Install the Bob-Tach mounting bolt (Item 2) [Figure 50-
10-4] in the pivot pin and remove the pivot pin.

Check for wear and damage. Replace the pivot pins as

needed.

Installation: Push the pivot pin into the Bob-Tach frame.

Position the end of the pin flush with the end of the Bob-
Tach bushing (Item 3) [Figure 50-10-4].

50-10-2 MT85 Service Manual

BOB-TACH (CONT’D) Figure 50-10-8

Lever And Wedge Disassembly And Assembly

Figure 50-10-6 2

1
4
P19286

Remove the spring, bolts, and clevis assembly (Item 1)

P19284 [Figure 50-10-8].

Remove the wedge (Item 2) [Figure 50-10-8] from the

Use the following procedure to remove and install the Bob-Tach frame.
Bob-Tach lever, spring, and wedge.
Always replace bent or broken wedges.
Remove the lever mounting bolt and nut (Item 1), washer
(Item 2), spring (Item 3), and lever (Item 4) [Figure 50- Figure 50-10-9
10-6].

Installation: Tighten the nut to 34 - 38 N•m (25 - 28 ft-lb) 4

torque.
3
Figure 50-10-7

1
1

P19287

If the bolt (Item 1), handle pivot (Item 2), spring (Item 3),
or clevis (Item 4) are damaged, put the assembly in a
vise. Loosen and remove the bolt (Item 1) [Figure 50-10-
P19285 9]. Replace the worn or damaged parts as needed

Assembly: Clean the threads and apply Loctite® 242 to

Use a punch and hammer, remove the roll pin (Item 1) the bolt (Item 1) [Figure 50-10-9], tighten to 88 - 95 N•m
[Figure 50-10-7] from the Bob-Tach wedge and spring, (60 - 70 ft-lb) torque.
bolt and clevis assembly.
Reverse the removal procedure to install the Bob-Tach
Lever and Wedge.

50-10-3 MT85 Service Manual

50-10-4 MT85 Service Manual
COMMON INDUSTRY INTERFACE (CII) Figure 50-11-3

CII - Removal And Installation

Figure 50-11-1

P-66223

1
Remove the grease fitting (Item 1) and slightly loosen the
P121713 bolt (Item 2) [Figure 50-11-3].

Cover the grease fitting hole with a rag and strike the
Tilt the CII forward so it is parallel to the floor. Put blocks pivot pin bolt with a hammer to loosen the tapered pin.
under the CII and lower the CII onto the blocks (Item 1)
[Figure 50-11-1]. Repeat the procedure for the other side.

Figure 50-11-2 Remove bolts and washers from lift arms and CII.

Remove the CII.

Installation: Install the grease fitting and align the CII

2 pivot pin with the lift arm hole (both sides).
1
Installation: Add grease to the fitting (Item 1) [Figure
50-11-3] to force pivot pin into the lift arm hole.

Installation: Install the bolt (Item 2) [Figure 50-11-3] in

the pivot pin. Tighten the bolt to 125 - 135 N•m (90 - 100
ft-lb) torque.

P-31878A

Remove the screw (Item 1) and retainer (Item 2) [Figure

50-11-2] from the rod end pivot pin.

Remove the pin.

Remove the pivot pin from the tilt cylinder and the CII.

Installation: Tighten the retainer screw to 20 - 27 N•m

(15 - 20 ft-lb) torque.

50-11-1 MT85 Service Manual

COMMON INDUSTRY INTERFACE (CII) (CONT’D) Figure 50-11-5

CII - Seal Removal And Installation

Figure 50-11-4

3
1 1

P19280

Remove the seal (Item 1) [Figure 50-11-5] from the CII.

P19281 Check the condition of the seal and replace as needed.

NOTE: Install the seal with the lip facing outward.

Remove the CII. (See CII - Removal And Installation on
Page 50-11-1.) NOTE: There is a plug located at the bottom of the
bore in each CII bushing. The plug helps
Remove the grease fitting (Item 1) [Figure 50-11-4] from contain the grease inside the bushing and is a
the pivot pin grease chamber. very low service item.

Install the CII mounting bolt (Item 2) [Figure 50-11-4] in

the pivot pin and remove the pivot pin.

Check for wear and damage. Replace the pivot pins as

needed.

Installation: Push the pivot pin into the CII frame.

Position the end of the pin flush with the end of the CII
bushing (Item 3) [Figure 50-11-4].

50-11-2 MT85 Service Manual

COMMON INDUSTRY INTERFACE (CII) (CONT’D) Figure 50-11-7

CII - Lever And Wedge Disassembly And Assembly

Figure 50-11-6
2

5 3

1 4 2

2 P121733

Remove the bolt (Item 1) and washers (Item 2). Lift the
P121731 lever and wedge assembly (Item 3) out of the hole for the
wedge and remove from the CII frame. Remove the
alignment plate (Item 4) [Figure 50-11-7].
Use the following procedure to remove and install the CII
lever, spring, and wedge. NOTE: Inspect bushing for wear (Item 5) [Figure 50-
11-7].
Remove the lever mounting nut (Item 1) and washer
(Item 2) [Figure 50-11-6]. Figure 50-11-8

Installation: Tighten the nut to 34 - 38 N•m (25 - 28 ft-lb)

torque. 1 4 5 6 7
2

P121734

Inspect the upper pivot (Item 1), bolt (Item 2), handle
pivot (Item 3), lower pivot (Item 4), spring (Item 5), spring
pivot (Item 6), and wedge pin (Item 7) [Figure 50-11-8].
Replace the worn or damaged parts as needed.

Assembly: Clean the threads and apply Loctite® 242 to

the bolt (Item 1) [Figure 50-11-8], tighten to 88 - 95 N•m
(60 - 70 ft-lb) torque.

Reverse the removal procedure to install the CII lever and

wedge assembly.

50-11-3 MT85 Service Manual

50-11-4 MT85 Service Manual
LIFT ARMS Figure 50-20-3

Removal And Installation

Remove the attachment control or case drain hose (if

equipped).

Remove the Bob-Tach (See Removal And Installation on

Page 50-10-1.) or the Common Industry Interface (See
CII - Removal And Installation on Page 50-11-1.) 1

Remove the tilt cylinder. (See Removal And Installation

on Page 20-21-2.)

Figure 50-20-1
P121697

Disconnect and cap the auxiliary hoses (Item 1) [Figure

50-20-3] from the main control valve.
Figure 50-20-4

1
P121736

Raise the lift arms and install jackstands under the front
of the lift arms [Figure 50-20-1].

Figure 50-20-2
P121780

Remove the cable ties (Item 1) [Figure 50-20-5] securing

the hoses to the mainframe upright.
Figure 50-20-5
1

P115012

Disconnect and cap the tilt hoses (Item 1) [Figure 50-20-

2] from the main control valve.
P121737
NOTE: Mark the tilt hoses (Item 1) [Figure 50-20-2]
and auxiliary hoses (Item 1) [Figure 50-20-3] for ease
Wrap the lifting strap around the lift arm as shown
of assembly.
[Figure 50-20-5] and attach to a chain hoist.

50-20-1 MT85 Service Manual

LIFT ARMS (CONT’D) Figure 50-20-8

Removal And Installation (Cont’d)

Figure 50-20-6
1

1
3
2

P121739

Remove the screw (Item 1) [Figure 50-20-8] from the

P121689 upright pivot pin retainer (both sides).

Installation: Tighten the retainer screw to 20 - 27 N•m

Remove the screw (Item 1) [Figure 50-20-6] from the lift (15 - 20 ft-lb) torque.
cylinder pivot pin retainer (both sides).
Remove the pin retainer and the pivot pin from the
Remove the pin retainer (Item 2) and the pin (Item 3) upright (both sides).
[Figure 50-20-6] from the lift cylinder (both sides).
Use the chain hoist to remove the lift arms from the
Installation: Tighten the screw to 20 - 27 N•m (15 - 20 ft- loader [Figure 50-20-8].
lb) torque. Ensure the retainer is seated in the groove of
the lift cylinder rod pin (Item 1) [Figure 50-20-6]. NOTE: The tilt hoses and auxiliary hoses will stay
with the lift arms during removal. Take care
Figure 50-20-7 not to damage the hoses.

Reverse the removal procedure to install the lift arms on

the loader.

P121738

Wrap the lifting strap around the lift arm as shown

[Figure 50-20-7] (both sides) and attach to a chain hoist.

50-20-2 MT85 Service Manual

REAR DOOR Figure 50-30-2

Removal And Installation

WARNING
Keep the rear door closed when operating the 2
machine. Failure to do so could seriously injury the 1
operator. 1
W-2410-0107

Figure 50-30-1
P121751

1
2 Remove the four bolts and nuts (Item 1) holding the
tailgate hinge to the rear door panel (Item 2) [Figure 50-
30-2].

Remove the rear door and hinge.

P124071

Pull the latch (Item 1) and open the rear door (Item 2)
[Figure 50-30-1].

50-30-1 MT85 Service Manual

REAR DOOR (CONT’D) Bumper (Adjusting)

Latch Removal And Installation Figure 50-30-4

Figure 50-30-3

2 2

1
1
2

P124014

P121717
Loosen jam nut (Item 1) [Figure 50-30-4].

To remove the latch (Item 1) from the rear door. Drill out Adjust the bumpers (Item 2) [Figure 50-30-4] until the
the four rivets (Item 2) [Figure 50-30-3] and remove the rear door latches properly and there is no movement
latch. after the rear door is closed.

When the adjustments are completed, tighten the jam nut

(Item 1) [Figure 50-30-4].

50-30-2 MT85 Service Manual

FUEL TANK Figure 50-40-2

The fuel tank is made of a plastic material and the fuel

fittings are installed into rubber inserts. Leak testing the
fuel tank with fittings installed is highly recommended
before installing the fuel tank in the loader.

A fuel level sender is located at the front of the fuel tank

and can be accessed from the front of the machine.

Removal And Installation 2

1
Remove the bottom access panel. (See Removal And
Installation on Page 50-80-1.)

Remove the radiator. (See Radiator Removal And P-51178

Installation on Page 70-50-1.)

Remove the engine. (See Engine Removal And Remove the fuel supply line (Item 1) and the fuel return
Installation on Page 70-10-9.) line (Item 2) [Figure 50-40-2] from the fuel tank.

Figure 50-40-1 Figure 50-40-3

2 1

P-51178 P-74801

Remove the supply line (Item 1) from the primer bulb Proper torque for the fuel sender (Item 1) [Figure 50-40-
(Item 2) [Figure 50-40-1] and drain the fuel into a 3] is: 6,8 N•m (5 ft-lb) torque. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN
container. SENDING UNIT!

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Always clean up spilled fuel or oil. Keep heat, flames,
sparks or lighted tobacco away from fuel and oil.
Failure to use care around combustibles can cause
explosion or fire.
W-2103-0508

50-40-1 MT85 Service Manual

FUEL TANK (CONT’D)

Removal And Installation (Cont’d)

Figure 50-40-4

P-51148

Disconnect the harness connector (Item 1) from the

sending unit (Item 2) [Figure 50-40-4].

Figure 50-40-5

P-51149

Remove the fuel tank (Item 1) [Figure 50-40-5] from the

loader.

Reverse the removal procedure to install the fuel tank.

50-40-2 MT85 Service Manual

FUEL TANK (CONT’D) Figure 50-40-7

Fuel Level Sender Removal And Installation

WARNING 1

Never work on a machine with the lift arms up unless 2

the lift arms are secured by an approved lift arm
support device. Failure to use an approved lift arm
support device can allow the lift arms or attachment
to fall and cause injury or death.
W-2059-0598

P-74978

WARNING Disconnect the harness connector (Item 1) from the

sending unit (Item 2) [Figure 50-40-7].
Repair the support device if damaged or if parts are
Remove the sending unit.
missing. Using a damaged support device or with
missing parts can cause lift arms or boom to fall
Installation: Proper torque for the fuel sender (Item 1)
causing serious injury or death. [Figure 50-40-7] is: 6,8 N•m (5 ft-lb) torque. DO NOT
W-2271-1007
OVERTIGHTEN SENDING UNIT!

Raise the lift arms and install the lift arm support device.
(See Installing on Page 10-20-1.)

Figure 50-40-6

1 1

1 1
2 P121718

Remove the six bolts (Item 1) and remove the screen

(Item 2) [Figure 50-40-6].

50-40-3 MT85 Service Manual

50-40-4 MT85 Service Manual
INSTRUMENT PANEL Figure 50-50-3

Removal And Installation

Figure 50-50-1

3
2
1
2

1
1 P121719

Disconnect the instrument harness connector (Item 1)

P121742 from the main harness connector (Item 2) [Figure 50-50-
3].

Remove the five screws (Item 1) from the front of the Remove the instrument panel (Item 2) [Figure 50-50-1]
instrument panel (Item 2) [Figure 50-50-1]. from the loader.

Remove the grab bar (Item 3) [Figure 50-50-1]. (See Reverse removal procedure to install the instrument
GRAB BAR on Page 50-60-1.) panel.

Figure 50-50-2 NOTE: Disconnect any switch harnesses for optional

accessories (if equipped).
3

1 1
1 1

P121779

Remove the six screws (Item 1) from the top of the

instrument panel (Item 2) [Figure 50-50-2].

Installation: Tighten the screws to 20 - 27 N•m (15 - 20

ft-lb) torque.

Remove the throttle handle grip (Item 3) [Figure 50-50-

2].

50-50-1 MT85 Service Manual

50-50-2 MT85 Service Manual
GRAB BAR Figure 50-60-2

Removal And Installation

1
Figure 50-60-1

2
3

P121744 P121745

1
1 Open the front cover (Item 1) [Figure 50-60-2].
P121743 P121740
Remove the center bolt (Item 2) securing the grab bar
(Item 3) [Figure 50-60-2] to the frame.
Remove the two side bolts (Item 1) securing the grab bar
(Item 2) [Figure 50-60-1] to the frame. Remove the grab bar.

Reverse the removal procedure to install the grab bar.

50-60-1 MT85 Service Manual

50-60-2 MT85 Service Manual
HOOD Disassembly And Assembly

Removal And Installation Remove the hood.

Disconnect hydraulic oil cooler connections. (See Remove the hydraulic oil cooler and electric fan.
Removal And Installation on Page 20-90-1.)
Figure 50-70-3
Figure 50-70-1

1 1
1

P-51163

P-51225
P-48405

Remove the seven screws (Item 1) [Figure 50-70-3] from

Raise the hood high enough to remove the hood prop the hood and the hood support (on both sides) to remove
(Item 1) from the latching mechanism (Item 2) [Figure the hood / hydraulic oil cooler support.
50-70-1]. (if equipped)
Figure 50-70-4
Figure 50-70-2

BACKSIDE OF HINGE

2 1
P-51100
1
2 2

3
P-51226
P-51162

Remove the five screws (Item 1) [Figure 50-70-4] from

Disconnect electrical connector (Item 1) [Figure 50-70-2] the hood and the hood support to remove the hood /
for the electric cooling fan. hydraulic oil cooler.

Remove the seven nuts (Item 2) from the backside of the Remove the hood / hydraulic oil cooler support from the
hood hinge (Item 3) [Figure 50-70-2]. hood.

Remove the hood. Remove the six screws (Item 2) [Figure 50-70-4] from
the hood and the latch support to remove the latch
Reverse the removal procedure to install the hood. support.

50-70-1 MT85 Service Manual

HOOD (CONT’D) Latch Removal And Installation

Disassembly And Assembly (Cont’d) Figure 50-70-7

Figure 50-70-5

2
1

P-51165

P-51227
To remove the latch (Item 1) from the hood. Drill out the
four rivets (Item 2) [Figure 50-70-7] and remove latch.
Remove the four screws (Item 1) [Figure 50-70-5] from
the hood to remove the latch support. Striker (Adjusting)

Figure 50-70-6 Figure 50-70-8

2
1
2 2
P-51224 P-81884

The latch support (Item 1) can be removed from the hood The hood latch striker (Item 1) is adjusted by loosening
once the latch (Item 2) [Figure 50-70-6] is removed. the two bolts (Item 2) [Figure 50-70-8] and sliding the
striker forward and back until the proper engagement is
obtained.

When the proper engagement is obtained, tighten the

bolts.

50-70-2 MT85 Service Manual

BOTTOM ACCESS PANEL

Removal And Installation

Lift and block the machine. (See Procedure on Page 10-

10-1.)

Figure 50-80-1

1 1

P-51176

Remove the four bolts (Item 1) holding the bottom access

panel (Item 2) [Figure 50-80-1] to the frame.

Installation: Tighten the bolts to 20 - 27 N•m (15 - 20 ft-

lb) torque.

Remove the bottom access panel from the frame.

Reverse the removal procedure to install the bottom

access panel.

50-80-1 MT85 Service Manual

50-80-2 MT85 Service Manual
OPERATOR PLATFORM Figure 50-90-2

Removal And Installation

WARNING 1

AVOID INJURY OR DEATH

Wear safety glasses to prevent eye injury when any
of the following conditions exist: 2
• When fluids are under pressure.
• Flying debris or loose material is present.
• Engine is running.
• Tools are being used.
W-2019-0907 P121747

Figure 50-90-1 Remove the tie-straps (Item 1) and disconnect the

continuous flow switch (Item 2) [Figure 50-90-2].

Figure 50-90-3

1
3 1

2
2

P121754

Remove the rear door (Item 1) [Figure 50-90-1]. (See P121748

Removal And Installation on Page 50-30-1.)

Support the operator platform (Item 2) [Figure 50-90-1]. Remove retainer nuts and bolts (Item 1) remove the
support pins (Item 2) [Figure 50-90-3] on both sides.

Remove the platform.

Inspect the bushings (Item 3) [Figure 50-90-3] for wear

and replace, if needed.

Reverse the removal procedure to install the platform.

50-90-1 MT85 Service Manual

OPERATOR RIDE-ON PLATFORM (CONT’D) Continuous Flow Shutoff System Pedal Removal And
Installation
Operator Cushion Removal And Installation
Figure 50-90-6
Remove the rear door (Item 1) [Figure 50-90-4]. (See
Removal And Installation on Page 50-30-1.)

Figure 50-90-4

2
1

P121755
2
Remove the nut (Item 1) [Figure 50-90-6] to remove the
P121754 pedal assembly.

Figure 50-90-7
Lift and support the operator platform (Item 2) [Figure
50-90-4].

Figure 50-90-5
3
1
1

1 2
3
4

2
4 5 P121759

Remove the nut (Item 1), bolt (Item 2), pedal (Item 3),
P121749 spring (Item 4), and bushings (Item 5) [Figure 50-90-7].

Installation: Insert the pedal (Item 3) through the

Remove the three nuts and bolts (Item 1) holding the platform, assemble the hardware and tighten the nut and
door mounting bracket (Item 3) [Figure 50-90-5] to the bolt to 39 N•m (29 ft-lb) torque.
frame.
NOTE: To install the spring onto the end tab of the
Remove the door bracket and cushion assembly from the pedal, it may be easier to loosen the bolts and
machine. remove the guard plate for the sensor (Item 2)
[Figure 50-90-6].
Remove the bolt and nut (Item 3) and remove the cushion
(Item 4) [Figure 50-90-5].

50-90-2 MT85 Service Manual

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM AND ANALYSIS

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-10-1

Glossary Of Electrical Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-10-1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-10-4
Fuse And Relay Location / Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-10-4
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-10-5
Solenoid Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-10-6

BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-20-1
Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-20-1
Battery Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-20-1
Using A Booster Battery (Jump Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-20-2

ALTERNATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-30-1
Belt Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-30-1
Belt Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-30-1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-30-2
Alternator Output Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-30-3
Full Field Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-30-3
Alternator Voltage Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-30-4
Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-30-5
Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-30-6

STARTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-40-1
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-40-1
Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-40-2
Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-40-4

INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-50-1

Component Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-50-1

NEUTRAL START SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-60-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-60-1
Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-60-1

CONTINOUS FLOW SHUTOFF SYSTEM SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-70-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-70-1
Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-70-2
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-70-3
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-70-3

ELECTRICAL / HYDRAULIC CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-80-1

Identification Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-80-1

ELECTRIC COOLING FAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-90-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-90-1
Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-90-1

60-01 MT85 Service Manual

60-02 MT85 Service Manual
 CONSOLE HARNESS
8000 TAN 16
CONNECTOR
1800 RNG 16 1750 RNG 16 1750 RNG 16

1000 RED 6
8250 TAN 16 8280 TAN 16 8270 TAN 16 8230 TAN 16 8230 TAN 16

8500 TAN 18

1100 RED/WHT 14 1100 RED/WHT 14

8200 TAN 12 8500 TAN 16

2090 BLK 16
8210 TAN 12 8520 TAN 16 3510 PNK 16 3510 LBL 18
2080 BLK 16
BATT RED 4

8510 TAN 16
8530 TAN 16
3420 LBL 18 3420 LBL 16

1010 RED 16 8810 TAN 14 3010 BLK 18

3410 LBL 18

2080 BLK 16
3415 LBL 16 3400 LBL 16 3400 LBL 18
8260 TAN 16 2060 BLK 16
8800 TAN 14
2220 BLK 16
1110 RED 12 1120 RED 12
1080 RED 4 2500 BLK 16 1620 RNG 16 1600 RNG 18

1125 RED 16 3200 LBL 16 3200 LBL 18

2060 BLK 16
1610 RNG 16
3300 LBL 16 3300 LBL 18
8000 TAN 16 2070 BLK 12

1055 RED 14 2310 BLK 16

1050 RED 16
1020 RED 16 1125 RED 16

1810 RNG 16 2330 BLK 16 2330 BLK 12

1820 RED 14 2090 BLK 16

1600 RNG 16 4205 LGN 16

1070 RED 14 1090 RED/WHT 14 2040 BLK 16

1720 RNG 14
ATTACHMENT
6835 PNK 16 3500 LBL 16

1130 RNG 14 2050 BLK 14

4100 LGN 14 2430 BLK 14

3520 LBL 18

4210 LGN 16 2210 BLK 16

6830 PNK 16

1810 RNG 16 4200 LGN 16 4205 LGN 16

Printable Version Click Here

4215 LGN 18 2200 BLK 16

(PRINTED NOVEMBER 2015)

7277741 (A)
 FRAME GROUNDS 2300 BLK 16

2500 BLK 16

2310 BLK 16

2330 BLK 16
8500 TAN 18
1100 RED/WHT 14
8230 TAN 16 2320 BLK 12 2430 BLK 14

2200 BLK 16
1750 RNG 16

2210 BLK 16

3010 BLK 18
3510 LBL 18

6820 PNK 18
2220 BLK 16

2010 BLK 16
3400 LBL 18

6810 PNK 18
1600 RNG 18 2050 BLK 14

3420 LBL 16 1890 RNG 18

1830 RNG 16

BATTERY POWER
3200 LBL 18 2330 BLK 12
1010 RED 16
2340 BLK 18
1850 RNG 18
1050 RED 16
2780 BLK 18
6840 PNK 16
6860 PNK 16 1080 RED 4 1060 RED 16

1070 RED 14

1110 RED 12

3300 LBL 18 6850 PNK 16

1880 RNG 18

Printable Version Click Here

1125 RED 16 4205 LGN 16

(PRINTED NOVEMBER 2015)

7277741 (A)
 AUXILIARY INTERLOCK CIRCUIT
2040 BLK 16
2010 BLK 16
1020 RED 16 4030 LGN 16 4050 LGN 16

8250 TAN 16
8260 TAN 16 4120 LGN 16 2020 BLK 16

2030 BLK 16
4060 LGN 16 4110 LGN 16 JUMPER
2035 BLK 16
4000 LGN 16
4040 LGN 16 4005 LGN 16

4020 LGN 16

4025 LGN 16
STATIONARY KIT ATTACHMENT
TIMER ASSEMBLY (replaces jumpered connector on C353)

BLUE RED
1025 RED 16 RED WHITE 4070 LGN 16
BLACK BLACK
2035 BLK 16 4090 LGN 16

4095 LGN 16

1060 RED 16 1210 RED/WHT 14

2300 BLK 16

Printable Version Click Here

(PRINTED NOVEMBER 2015)

7277741 (A)
 OPTIONS 3770 1950

C305 HARNESS 7110255 C304

8300 8300
8320 8320

8320
8310 8310
C306
HARNESS 7109823
C302
TILT LOCK

C115 C110

3780 1930
2740

2730
1730

1720

4800
4400

4300

4700
1940
1910 ENGINE SHUTDOWN SIGNAL
C106

1710
2710

6700 SHUTDOWN INDICATOR POWER

1900
IGNITION +

1960 2650
4200
4100

DELAY GRD 3730

2720
4300

ENG OIL PRESS SIGNAL

4400

3760
C800
3740 3700 HYD TEMP SIGNAL

HARNESS 7281566 3710

HARNESS 6736691 ENG COOLANT SIGNAL

ATTACH CONTROL KIT 7275444 SHUTDOWN KIT 7101695

6710
SHUTDOWN SIGNAL GRD

Printable Version Click Here

(PRINTED NOVEMBER 2015)

7277741 (A)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM INFORMATION

Glossary Of Electrical Symbols

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

CONNECTIONS COMPONENTS
CONNECTOR - Harness - Used for GROUND - Frame - Used to
3500 A A 3500 connecting 2 harnesses together or a represent an component that is
C107

3520 C C 3520
3510 B B 3510
harness to a component. The internally grounded.
connector can vary from a single pin
to any number of pins (Example: 3 pin
connectors shown). The connector LIGHT -
C107 pins can be numbered alphabetical
3500
A A
3500 (shown) or numerical (1, 2, 3 etc.).
C C
3520
B B
3520 The harness wires numbers are
3510 3510
called out next to the connector
(Example: 3500). SWITCH - Single Pole - Single Throw
(ON-OFF) Normally Open
The connector number is called out
next to the connector (Example:
C107). These connector numbers are
used for schematic identification only
and do not appear on the harness or
connector. SWITCH - Single Pole - Single Throw
(ON-OFF) Normally Closed.

COMPONENTS

- + BATTERY - Used for supplying and SWITCH - Single Pole - Double

storing electrical power for the Throw (ON-OFF-ON) - This switch
machine. can be in any of three positions.
(Some switches are spring activated
to return them to a certain position
+ when released.)
POSITIVE ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT -
Indicates positive battery circuit.
SWITCH - Double Pole - Single
Throw (ON-OFF) Open and Closed
positions will be specified depending
- NEGATIVE ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT - on switch application.)
Indicates battery ground circuit.
SWITCH - Double Pole - Double
Throw (ON-OFF) Open and Closed
ALTERNATOR - Used to create the positions will be specified depending
electrical current to supply voltage to on switch application.
G the battery and components.
POTENTIOMETER - Variable
+ - resistance - Provides variable
STARTER - Uses battery current to resistance.
M start the machine engine.

GROUND - Used to represent an

external ground connection.

60-10-1 MT85 Service Manual

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM INFORMATION (CONT’D)

Glossary Of Electrical Symbols (Cont’d)

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

COMPONENTS SOLENOID - Fuel and Traction Lock -

HOLD PULL
15 ohm B
Dual solenoids. (The ohm rating of
I SWITCH - Ignition - Multi position 0.5 ohm A the solenoid coils are listed next to
B
switch to activate various start the component [if available]). The pull
ST functions at different positions. solenoid is energized for a short time.

START
HORN - Audible alarm. Sound is
RUN
OFF
activated manually by a switch to
warn personnel.

BUZZER - Audible alarm. Sounds at a

1
SWITCH - Light - Multi position switch predetermined setting to warn the
2 to activate various lights at different operator of a component condition.
3
positions.
4 5 RESISTOR - Limits current flow.
6

DIODE - Allows electrical current to

ROTARY CONTROL - Provides flow in 1 direction only.
variable voltage proportional to
position.
L MOTOR - HVAC - Multi speed motor.
M
H M
GRD

87A 87 86 RELAY - Uses a low amp switch to MOTOR - Wiper - Single or multi
GRD
control a high amp component. PARK V speed motor.
30 85 M
HIGH

FUSE - Used to protect the wire MOTOR - Washer - Single speed.

M
harness from an overloaded circuit.
25A (The fuse rating is listed next to the
fuse.)
PUMP - FUEL

3700 3710 SPLICE (•) - Used to show when

3110
multiple wires are connected together
on the schematic. HOURMETER - Records the time the
+
H - engine is running.
SOLENOID - ON / OFF - Electrically
1 activated coil that controls movement
2 magnetically. (The ohm rating of the POWER PLUG - Supplies 12 volt
- +
7.7 ohm
solenoid coil is listed next to the power for customer supplied
component [if available]). accessories.

SOLENOID - VARIABLE - Electrically GAUGE - Instrument - Indicates

A G certain engine or other component
activated coil that controls movement
B conditions. (The different types of
7.5 ohm magnetically. (The ohm rating and I S
gauge are marked with a icon that
12V
voltage of the solenoid coil is listed represents what function the gauge is
next to the component [if available]). monitoring. Example: the gauge
shown is for fuel.)

60-10-2 MT85 Service Manual

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM INFORMATION (CONT’D)

Glossary Of Electrical Symbols (Cont’d)

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

SENDERS AND SENSORS

+
A
PRESSURE SENDER - Provides a
A variable voltage proportional to
C
C
-
B pressure. (Sender voltage rating is
B
0.5 - 7.5 V listed to show volts at high and low
setting.)

B
PRESSURE SWITCH - Switch opens
A or closes at a predetermined
pressure to active a function or to turn
on a warning light. (Switch is shown in
the open position.)

to TEMPERATURE SENDER - Provides

B a variable resistance (ohm) signal
A proportional to temperature. (Sender
500-3000 ohm
ohm rating is listed to show ohms at
high and low setting.)

A TEMPERATURE SWITCH - The

B switch opens or closes at a
predetermined temperature to active
a function or to turn on a warning
light. (Switch is shown in the closed
position.)

FUEL SENDER - Provides a variable

B
resistance, based on the fuel level in
A
the tank. (Sender ohm rating is listed
30-270 ohm to show ohms at full and empty
setting.)

C HALL EFFECT SENSOR - Detects

B linear or rotary position and provides
A a proportional variable voltage.

A
SPEED SENSOR - magnetic pickup -
detects rpm.
B

60-10-3 MT85 Service Manual

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM INFORMATION (CONT’D) Fuses

Description [Figure 60-10-2]

The loader has a 12 volt, negative ground alternator REF. DESCRIPTION AMP
charging system. The electrical system is protected by
fuses and relays. The fuses protect the electrical system F1 Lift Lock / Fan 20
when there is an electrical overload. The reason for the F2 Gauges 10
overload must be found before starting the engine again. F3 Attachment 25

Fuse And Relay Location / Identification F4 Cooling Fan 20

F5 Fuel 25
Figure 60-10-1 F6 Engine 30
F7 Starter 25
F8 Lights 25
F9 Aux Interlock 10
F10 Not Used
F11 Not Used
F12 Not Used

Relays
[Figure 60-10-2]
1
REF. DESCRIPTION
P124007
A Switched Power 2

Raise the hood. B Cooling Fan

C Lift Lock
The fuse panel is located under the hood at the right rear D Switched Power 1
side of the machine (Item 1) [Figure 60-10-1].
E Glow Plug
Remove the fuse panel cover. F Aux Int Neutral Start
Figure 60-10-2 G Aux Int Magnetic Detent
H Starter
J Fuel Timer
A B C D

E F G H

IMPORTANT
J
Do Not use silicone base sprays and / or sealants on
harness connectors or components.
I-2123-0397

P-59543B

60-10-4 MT85 Service Manual

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM INFORMATION (CONT’D)

Troubleshooting WARNING
The following troubleshooting chart is provided for
assistance in locating and correcting problems which are Check for correct function after adjustments, repairs
most common. Many of the recommended procedures or service. Failure to make correct repairs or
must be done by authorized Bobcat service personnel adjustments can cause injury or death.
only. W-2004-1285

PROBLEM CAUSE
Battery looses charge. 1,2,3,4,5,18
Alternator will not charge. 1,2,5,18
Starter will not turn the engine. 10,11,18,19,2,3,4,9,12,7,6,20
Auxiliary blower fan will not run when auxiliaries are engaged. 13,14,18
Lift arm does not lower with the engine running and activation of the lift lever. 15,16,17,18
Electric fan not operating with engine running. 17,18,9,13,14,8

KEY TO CORRECT THE CAUSE

1. Alternator belt is loose or damaged.
2. Battery connections are dirty or loose.
3. Battery is weak or failed.
4. The ground is not correct in the electrical system.
5. The alternator has a failure.
6. Engine seizure.
7. Starter has a failure.
8. Neutral start circuit failure. (wiring, relay, solenoid, connectors)
9. Fuse had a failure.
10. Auxiliary lever engaged.
11. Left or right drive lever engaged.
12. Starter relay has a failure.
13. Electric fan circuitry failure.
14. Electric fan motor.
15. Lift arm circuit has a failure. (fuse, relay, solenoid)
16. Engine oil pressure circuit has a failure. (fuse, relay, solenoid, switch)
17. Low engine oil pressure.
18. Loose, disconnected or damaged wiring.
19. Lift control lever, not in neutral position.
20. Continuous auxiliary hydraulic shutoff lever is engaged.

NOTE: Engine oil pressure controls lift and tilt

lockout functions, and the electric cooling
fan.

60-10-5 MT85 Service Manual

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM INFORMATION (CONT’D)

Solenoid Testing

Figure 60-10-3

P9175

Use a test meter to measure coil resistance [Figure 60-

10-3]. Coil wires do not have polarity. Correct resistance
for the pressure relief (small) coil is 7 - 10 ohm and the
other coils 5 - 8 ohm.

60-10-6 MT85 Service Manual

BATTERY Figure 60-20-2

Removal And Installation

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Batteries contain acid which burns eyes and skin on
contact. Wear goggles, protective clothing and
rubber gloves to keep acid off body.

In case of acid contact, wash immediately with water.

In case of eye contact get prompt medical attention
P-9590B
and wash eye with clean, cool water for at least 15
minutes.
Always clean the battery terminals and cable ends when
If electrolyte is taken internally drink large quantities installing the battery [Figure 60-20-2].
of water or milk! DO NOT induce vomiting. Get
prompt medical attention. When installing the battery in the loader, do not touch any
W-2065-0807 metal parts with the battery terminals.

Open rear door. (See REAR DOOR on Page 50-30-1.) Connect the negative (-) cable LAST to prevent sparks.
Connect and tighten the battery cables.
Figure 60-20-1
Close the rear door before operating the loader.
2 1
Battery Maintenance

Figure 60-20-3

P124020

Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable (Item 1) [Figure

60-20-1].

Disconnect the positive (+) battery cable (Item 2) [Figure P-9590B

60-20-1].

Remove the battery hold-down clamp (Item 3) [Figure The battery cables must be clean and tight [Figure 60-
60-20-1]. 20-3]. Check the electrolyte level in the battery. Add
distilled water as needed. Remove acid or corrosion from
Remove the battery from the loader. the battery and cables with a sodium bicarbonate and
water solution.

Put grease on the battery terminals and cable ends to

prevent corrosion.

60-20-1 MT85 Service Manual

BATTERY (CONT’D) Figure 60-20-4

Using A Booster Battery (Jump Starting) 4

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH 2
Batteries contain acid which burns eyes and skin on
contact. Wear goggles, protective clothing and
rubber gloves to keep acid off body.

In case of acid contact, wash immediately with water.

In case of eye contact get prompt medical attention
and wash eye with clean, cool water for at least 15
minutes. 1

If electrolyte is taken internally drink large quantities

of water or milk! DO NOT induce vomiting. Get
3
prompt medical attention. P124019A
W-2065-0807

If it is necessary to use a booster battery to start the Connect the end of the first cable (Item 1) [Figure 60-20-
engine, BE CAREFUL! The key switch must be OFF 4] to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery.
when connecting jumper cables. The booster battery Connect the other end of the same cable (Item 2) [Figure
must be 12 volt. 60-20-4] to the positive (+) terminal on the loader battery.

Connect the end of the second cable (Item 3) [Figure 60-

20-4] to the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery.

WARNING Connect the other end of the same cable (Item 4) [Figure
60-20-4] to the loader frame.

BATTERY GAS CAN EXPLODE AND CAUSE Keep cables away from moving parts. Start the engine.
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
After the engine has started, remove the ground (-) cable
Keep arcs, sparks, flames and lighted tobacco away
(Item 4) [Figure 60-20-4] first.
from batteries. When jumping from booster battery
make final connection (negative) at machine frame.
Remove the cable from the positive terminal (Item 2)
[Figure 60-20-4].
Do not jump start or charge a frozen or damaged
battery. Warm battery to 16°C (60°F) before
connecting to a charger. Unplug charger before
connecting or disconnecting cables to battery. Never
lean over battery while boosting, testing or charging.
W-2066-0910
IMPORTANT
Damage to the alternator can occur if:
• Engine is operated with battery cables
disconnected.
• Battery cables are connected when using a fast
charger or when welding on the loader. (Remove
both cables from the battery.)
• Extra battery cables (booster cables) are
connected wrong.
I-2023-1285

60-20-2 MT85 Service Manual

ALTERNATOR Figure 60-30-2

Belt Adjustment

IMPORTANT
1
Damage to the alternator can occur if:
• Engine is operated with battery cables
disconnected.
• Battery cables are connected when using a fast
charger or when welding on the loader. (Remove
both cables from the battery.)
• Extra battery cables (booster cables) are
P-48427
connected wrong.
I-2023-1285
Loosen the adjustment and mounting bolts for the
Stop the engine. alternator (Item 1) [Figure 60-30-2].

Figure 60-30-1 Figure 60-30-3

1
2

P124003 P-45379A

Open the hood (Item 1) [Figure 60-30-1]. Move the alternator away from the engine [Figure 60-30-
3] to increase belt tension.
Loosen the thumb nut (Item 2) [Figure 60-30-1] and
open the access cover on the left side of the machine. Move the alternator until the belt has 8,0 mm (5/16 in)
movement at the middle of the belt span (Item 1) [Figure
60-30-3] with 66 N (15 lbf) of force.

Tighten the adjustment and mounting bolts (Item 1)

[Figure 60-30-2].

Belt Replacement

Loosen the adjustment and mounting bolts for the

alternator (Item 1) [Figure 60-30-2] and loosen the belt
fully.

Remove the belt and install a new belt.

Adjust belt as shown above.

60-30-1 MT85 Service Manual

ALTERNATOR (CONT’D)

Description

Figure 60-30-4

1
3
4
2

5
P-10018A P10023

The output terminal (Item 1) [Figure 60-30-4].

The battery or power sensing terminal (Item 2) [Figure

60-30-4].

The ignition terminal (Item 3) [Figure 60-30-4].

Open terminal not used in the loader harness (Item 4)

[Figure 60-30-4].

Access hole for full field test (Item 5) [Figure 60-30-4].

Perform the following alternator tests in this order:

Alternator Output Test: Tests the alternator and regulator

output.

Full Field Test: Tests the maximum amperage output of

the alternator.

Alternator Regulator Test: Tests the regulator voltage

output.

60-30-2 MT85 Service Manual

ALTERNATOR (CONT’D) Full Field Test

Alternator Output Test Figure 60-30-6

WARNING
When the engine is running during service, the 1
steering lever and hydraulic control levers must be in
neutral and the parking brake engaged.
W-2484-1003

Figure 60-30-5

P10021

Start the engine and run at full rpm.

Place a small screw driver in the test port (Item 1)

[Figure 60-30-6] to provide a ground to the alternator
1 case. This will give maximum amperage output from the
alternator.

NOTE: The Full Field Test should only last long

P-34077 enough to get ammeter reading to prevent
damage to the alternator.
Check battery and battery connections. (See BATTERY
on Page 60-20-1.) The ammeter reading should be above 35 amps.

Turn the lights on (if equipped) or discharge the battery. If the ammeter reading is low, repair or replace the
alternator.
Use an induction meter and loop it around the positive
wires (Item 1) [Figure 60-30-5] at the alternator.

Start the engine and run at full rpm.

The ammeter reading should be between 35 and 40

amps.

If the ammeter reading is less than 35 amps do the full

field test.

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
When an engine is running in an enclosed area, fresh
air must be added to avoid concentration of exhaust
fumes. If the engine is stationary, vent the exhaust
outside. Exhaust fumes contain odorless, invisible
gases which can kill without warning.
W-2050-0807

60-30-3 MT85 Service Manual

ALTERNATOR (CONT'D) Figure 60-30-7

Alternator Voltage Testing

1
2

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
When an engine is running in an enclosed area, fresh
air must be added to avoid concentration of exhaust
fumes. If the engine is stationary, vent the exhaust
outside. Exhaust fumes contain odorless, invisible
gases which can kill without warning.
W-2050-0807
P-51140

Connect the positive (+) voltmeter lead to the positive (+)

battery terminal (Item 1) [Figure 60-30-7].

Connect the negative (-) voltmeter lead to the negative

(-) battery terminal (Item 2) [Figure 60-30-7].

WARNING
When the engine is running during service, the
steering lever and hydraulic control levers must be in
neutral and the parking brake engaged.
W-2484-1003

Start the engine and run at full rpm.

The voltmeter should read between 13.9 and 14.7 volts.

If the voltmeter reading is not within this range, replace

the alternator's regulator.

60-30-4 MT85 Service Manual

ALTERNATOR (CONT'D) Figure 60-30-9

Removal And Installation

4
1

IMPORTANT
Damage to the alternator can occur if:
• Engine is operated with battery cables
disconnected. 2 3
• Battery cables are connected when using a fast
charger or when welding on the loader. (Remove
both cables from the battery.)
• Extra battery cables (booster cables) are
P-51139
connected wrong.
I-2023-1285
Remove the upper alternator bolt (Item 1) [Figure 60-30-
Open the hood. 9].

Open the tailgate. Disconnect the negative (-) battery Remove the lower alternator bolt (Item 2) and nut
cable. (Item 3) [Figure 60-30-9].

Figure 60-30-8 Remove the belt (Item 4) [Figure 60-30-9] from the
alternator pulley.

NOTE: Medium strength threadlocker should be used

2
on mounting bolts and nuts.

1 Remove the alternator from the loader.

Reverse the removal procedure to install the alternator.

P-48167

Disconnect the wiring harness connector (Item 1)

[Figure 60-30-8] from the alternator.

Disconnect the red wires from the alternator (Item 2)

[Figure 60-30-8].

60-30-5 MT85 Service Manual

ALTERNATOR (CONT'D)

Parts Identification

1. Nut
2. Pulley
3. Spacer
4. Frame
5. Stator
6. Stud
7. Bearing
8. Cover 8
9. Plate 7
10. Bolt 11
11. Rotor
12. Frame End
13. Holder (Rectifier) 10
6 9
14. Regulator
15. Brush
5
16. Spring
17. Holder (Brush) 7
18. Insulator 4
19. Seal
20. Cover 10

3
2

1 20
10

10
17 19
1

18
1 10
16
15

10

14
10 13

12

C-3456A

60-30-6 MT85 Service Manual

STARTER Figure 60-40-2

Testing

Figure 60-40-1

1
P9976
1
Connect a jumper wire (OF AT LEAST 4 GAUGE IN
P9975 SIZE) between the battery terminal (Item 1) and the
motor terminal (Item 2) [Figure 60-40-2].

NOTE: The starter is removed from the loader for If the starter turns, the defect is in the solenoid.
clarity.
If the starter does not turn, the starter is defective.

WARNING
When the engine is running during service, the
steering lever and hydraulic control levers must be in
neutral and the parking brake engaged.
W-2484-1003

The key switch must be in the OFF position.

The battery must be at full charge.

The cable connections on the battery must be clean and

tight.

Connect a jumper wire between battery terminal (Item 1)

and the solenoid terminal (Item 2) [Figure 60-40-1].

If the starter turns but does not turn the engine, the
starter drive has a defect.

60-40-1 MT85 Service Manual

STARTER (CONT’D) Figure 60-40-4

Removal And Installation

Remove the lower access panel on the bottom of the

loader. (See Removal And Installation on Page 50-80-1.)
1
Raise the hood.

Remove the negative battery cable from the battery.

Figure 60-40-3

P-51122

1
Figure 60-40-5

2
P-51121 1

Remove the positive (+) battery cable (Item 1) [Figure

60-40-3] from the starter.

Remove the wire (Item 2) [Figure 60-40-3] from the (S)

terminal on the starter. P-51123

Remove the bolt (Item 1) [Figure 60-40-4] and locknut

(Item 1) [Figure 60-40-5] from the starter.

NOTE: An assistant may be necessary to hold the

locknut from the top while the bolt is loosened
from the bottom of the loader.

60-40-2 MT85 Service Manual

STARTER (CONT’D)

Removal And Installation (Cont’d)

Figure 60-40-6

1
2

P-51147

Remove the top starter mounting bolt (Item 1) [Figure

60-40-6] and locknut (Item 2) [Figure 60-40-5] and
[Figure 60-40-6].

NOTE: Always use a new locknut.

Remove the starter from the loader.

Reverse the removal procedure to install the starter.

60-40-3 MT85 Service Manual

STARTER (CONT’D)

Parts Identification

1. Bearing
2. Armature 7
3. Bearing
4. Frame 5 8 9
6
5. Brush Spring 11. Cover
6. Brush Holder 12. Gasket
7. Cover 4 13. Switch
8. Bolt 14. Nut
9. Bolt 15. Washer
10. Bolt 3 16. Nut
2 17. Washer
18. Roller
19. Retainer
20. Idler Gear

1 10

15 12
14 11

16

18 13
17
19
20

23 15
22
21

36 21. Ball
22. Spring
23. Housing
35
24. Screw
34 25. Washer
26. O-ring
33 27. Housing
26 32 28. O-ring
25 29 29. Snap Ring
31
24 30. Collar
30 31. Pinion Gear
29 32. Spring Seat
28
33. Spring
34. Clutch
35. Spring
36. Pinion Shaft
27

D-2297

60-40-4 MT85 Service Manual

INSTRUMENT PANEL Figure 60-50-2

Component Removal And Installation

3
2
Disconnect the battery. (See Removal And Installation on 2
Page 60-20-1.)

Remove the instrument panel. (See Removal And

Installation on Page 50-50-1.)
4
4 1
Figure 60-50-1
1 4
1

P-51246

Mark all wires for ease of assembly.

1
2 Remove the three nuts and wires (Item 1) and remove
the remaining wire (Item 2) [Figure 60-50-2] from the
temperature gauge.

Remove the three nuts and wires (Item 1) and unplug the
P-51098 bulb (Item 3) [Figure 60-50-2] from the fuel gauge by
rotating and pulling it out.

Disconnect the instrument harness connector (Item 1) Remove the two nuts and wires (Item 1) and disconnect
from the main harness connector (Item 2) [Figure 60-50- the remaining wire (Item 2) [Figure 60-50-2] from the
1]. voltmeter.

Remove the three retainers (Item 4) [Figure 60-50-2]

holding the gauges to the instrument panel.

Remove the gauges from the instrument panel.

60-50-1 MT85 Service Manual

INSTRUMENT PANEL (CONT’D) Figure 60-50-4

Component Removal And Installation (Cont’d)

Figure 60-50-3
2
4
1

1
2

P116991

1
Remove the retainer ring (Item 1) [Figure 60-50-4]
P121721 holding the switch to the instrument panel and remove
the switch from the instrument panel.

Remove the nuts and four wires (Item 1) [Figure 60-50- Push the tabs in on the back side and remove the
3] from the key switch. auxiliary hydraulic switch (Item 2) [Figure 60-50-4] from
the instrument panel.
Disconnect the two wires (Item 2) [Figure 60-50-3] from
the hour meter. Figure 60-50-5

Disconnect the two wires (Item 3) [Figure 60-50-3] from 2

the engine temperature warning light.

Disconnect the two wires (Item 4) [Figure 60-50-3] from

the hydraulic temperature warning light.

1 1

P121778

Remove the bolts, nuts and washers (Item 1) [Figure 60-

50-5] and remove the hourmeter.

Push the tabs in on the back side and remove the

warning light (Item 2) [Figure 60-50-5] from the
instrument panel.

Reverse the removal procedure on all components to

install.

60-50-2 MT85 Service Manual

NEUTRAL START SENSOR Figure 60-60-2

Description

Two neutral start sensors, one on each hydrostatic pump,

allow the machine to be started only when the drive
controls for both pumps are in the neutral position.

Removal And Installation

Remove the steering control panel. (See Removal And

Installation on Page 50-50-1.)
2
Figure 60-60-1

1 P121753

Remove the nuts and screws (Item 1) holding the neutral

start sensors (Item 2) [Figure 60-60-2] to the mounting
bracket and remove the sensors.
2
2 1
Assembly: Tighten bolts and nuts to 8 N•m (70 in-lb)
torque. Do NOT exceed the torque for the bolts or the
sensor may be damaged.

Reverse the removal procedure to install the neutral start

1 sensor.
P121752

Disconnect the wire harness (Item 1) from the neutral

start sensor connector (Item 2) [Figure 60-60-1].

60-60-1 MT85 Service Manual

60-60-2 MT85 Service Manual
CONTINOUS FLOW SHUTOFF SYSTEM SENSOR

Description

Figure 60-70-1

P124071

The continuous flow shutoff system (CFSS) sensor is

located under the pedal (Item 1) [Figure 60-70-1] located
on the front right area of the platform.

The sensor mounting bracket has slots for the mounting

screws that allow adjustment. If a CFSS sensor circuit
problem is suspected, check for the proper gap distance
between the sensor and the foot pedal bracket.

The pedal and CFSS sensor allows the auxiliary

hydraulics to be used in continuous flow (detent).

NOTE: Auxiliary hydraulics can be used without the

pedal depressed, but will not have the detent.

60-70-1 MT85 Service Manual

CONTINOUS FLOW SHUTOFF SYSTEM SENSOR Figure 60-70-4
(CONT’D)

Removal And Installation

Remove the operator platform and turn it upside down. 5

(See Removal And Installation on Page 50-90-1.)

Figure 60-70-2 4

3
2
1
1

P121776
2 1

Remove the bolts (Item1) and nuts (Item 2) to remove the

sensor (Item 3) and spacer (Item 4) from the bracket
(Item 5) [Figure 60-70-4].

Installation: Tighten bolts and nuts to 8 N•m (70 in-lb)

P121755 torque. Do NOT exceed the torque for the bolts or the
sensor may be damaged.

Loosen the nuts and bolts (Item 1) and remove the shield
plate (Item 2) [Figure 60-70-2].

Installation: Tighten the nuts and bolts to 39 N•m (29 ft-

lb) torque.

Figure 60-70-3

1
2

P121756

Remove the nuts and bolts (Item 1) and remove the

sensor and bracket assembly (Item 2) [Figure 60-70-3].

Installation: Tighten the bolts to 39 N•m (29 ft-lb) torque.

60-70-2 MT85 Service Manual

CONTINOUS FLOW SHUTOFF SYSTEM SENSOR Testing
(CONT’D)
Remove the rear door. (See Removal And Installation on
Adjustment Page 50-30-1.)

NOTE: The pedal must be installed prior to sensor Figure 60-70-6

adjustment. (See Continuous Flow Shutoff
System Pedal Removal And Installation on
Page 50-90-2.)

Figure 60-70-5 2
1 P121747A

2 P121747

Disconnect the sensor (Item 1). Connect an ohmmeter to

3
the black and blue wire terminals of the switch connector
P121757 (Item 2) [Figure 60-70-6].

Figure 60-70-7
Installation: Install the sensor and bracket assembly
(Item 1) [Figure 60-70-5] with loose mounting bolts.

With the pedal depressed, use a feeler gage to adjust the

gap (Item 2) [Figure 60-70-5] between the sensor and
pedal support (Item 3) to 2.54 mm (0.10 in).

Tighten the bracket assembly bolts (Item 1) [Figure 60-

70-3] to 39 N•m (29 ft-lb) torque.
1
NOTE: The gap should be parallel between sensor
and pedal support.

P121750

Depress the continuous flow shutoff pedal (Item 1)

[Figure 60-70-7] there should be continuity.

If there is no continuity, inspect the gap (See Adjustment

on Page 60-70-3.). If the gap is correct, replace the
sensor.

60-70-3 MT85 Service Manual

60-70-4 MT85 Service Manual
ELECTRICAL / HYDRAULIC CONTROLS

Identification Chart

Attachment
Flipper Chute Control Switch Harness
Control Control Switch Terminal Terminal Attachment Harness
Switch Switch Number Connector
Activated Activated
1 3 C Fourteen Pin
3 Connector Viewed
1 2 1 D from front
(pin side of
3 3 F connector)
4 2 4 1 E of loader.
P116998a

8 10
6 3
5 2
4 1
7 9
P-34222
B-16449
P-34229

NOTE: Control switch terminals #8 are ground and the pin B on the 14 pin connector is also ground. Control
switch terminals #2 are power.

60-80-1 MT85 Service Manual

60-80-2 MT85 Service Manual
ELECTRIC COOLING FAN

Description

The electric cooling fan provides air flow to dissipate heat

from the oil cooler.

The electric cooling fan is located in the hood.

Removal And Installation

Figure 60-90-1

2 2

P-74985

Disconnect the electrical connector (Item 1) [Figure 60-

90-1].

Remove the four bolts (Item 1) [Figure 60-90-1] from the

electric cooling fan.

Remove the electric cooling fan from the oil cooler.

60-90-1 MT85 Service Manual

60-90-2 MT85 Service Manual
 ENGINE SERVICE

ENGINE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-10-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-10-1
Specifications (Kubota D902-EB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-10-2
Torque Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-10-6
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-10-7
Engine Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-10-9
Engine Mount Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-10-13
Compression - Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-10-14

ENGINE SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-20-1

Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-20-1
Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-20-2
Cable Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-20-2

MUFFLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-30-1
Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-30-1

AIR CLEANER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-40-1

Housing Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-40-1

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-50-1

Radiator Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-50-1
Fan Blade Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-50-4
Water Pump Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-50-4
Water Pump Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-50-4
Thermostat Housing Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-50-5

LUBRICATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-60-1

Oil Pan Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-60-1
Oil Pump Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-60-2
Oil Pump Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-60-2
Engine Oil Pressure - Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-60-3

FUEL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-70-1

Fuel Camshaft Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-70-1
Fuel Camshaft Governor Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-70-1
Fuel Shutoff Solenoid - Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-70-2
Fuel Injection Pump Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-70-2
Fuel Injection Pump - Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-70-4
Fuel Injector Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-70-6
Fuel Injector Nozzle Pressure - Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-70-7
Nozzle Spray Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-70-8
Valve Seat Tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-70-9

70-01 MT85 Service Manual

CYLINDER HEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-1
Glow Plugs - Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-1
Glow Plugs Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-1
Valve Clearance Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-2
Valve Timing - Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-3
Cylinder Head Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-4
Cylinder Head Disassembly And Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-6
Cylinder Head - Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-6
Cylinder Head Top Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-7
Valve Guide - Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-7
Reconditioning The Valve And Valve Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-9
Valve Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-10
Valve Tappets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-11
Rocker Arm And Shaft - Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-11

CRANKSHAFT AND PISTONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-90-1

Piston And Connecting Rod Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-90-1
Piston And Connecting Rod - Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-90-4
Cylinder Bore - Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-90-6
Connecting Rod Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-90-7
Crankshaft Gear Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-90-7
Crankshaft And Bearings Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-90-8
Crankshaft And Bearings - Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-90-11

CAMSHAFT AND TIMING GEARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-100-1

Timing Gearcase Cover Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-100-1
Timing Gears Backlash - Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-100-3
Idler Gear And Shaft Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-100-3
Camshaft - Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-100-4
Idler Gear And Shaft Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-100-6

HYDRAULIC GEAR PUMP MOUNTING BRACKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-110-1

Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-110-1
Hydraulic Gear Pump Coupler Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-110-2

FLYWHEEL AND ENGINE MOUNTING BRACKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-120-1

Flywheel Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-120-1
Ring Gear Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-120-1
Engine Mounting Bracket Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-120-2

70-02 MT85 Service Manual

ENGINE INFORMATION

Description

The MT 85 has an indirect injected Kubota D902 diesel

engine with a displacement of 0,898 L (54.8 in³). The
engine is rated at 17,5 kW (23.5 hp) and has a closed
crankcase ventilation system.

The engine has three cylinders and the rotation is

counter-clockwise (viewed from the flywheel side).
Engine block heaters are also available from Bobcat
parts.

The engine serial number is stamped on the engine and

is located below the exhaust manifold. The model
number is located on the valve cover. Use these numbers
to obtain the correct service parts.

The engine is liquid cooled with a propylene glycol / water

mixture. The cooling fan is electrically driven. The speed
of the fan is determined by the engine coolant
temperature sensor.

70-10-1 MT85 Service Manual

ENGINE INFORMATION (CONT’D)

Specifications (Kubota D902-EB)

All dimensions are given in millimeters. Respective imperial dimensions are given in inches enclosed by
parentheses.

Fuel Injector Nozzles

Opening Pressure 13,7 - 14,7 MPa (137 - 147 bar) (1992 - 2133 psi)
Fuel Tightness Nozzle Seat 12,7 MPa (127 bar) (1849 psi)

Fuel Injection Pump

Fuel Tightness of Pump Element 13,7 MPa 137 bar (1991 psi)
Fuel Tightness of Delivery Valve (factory spec) 10 Second Initial Pressure Drop From 13,7 - 12,7 MPa (137 - 127 bar)
(1991 - 1849 psi)
Fuel Tightness of Delivery Valve (limit permitted) 5 Second Initial Pressure Drop From 13,7 - 12,7 MPa (137 - 127 bar)
(1991 - 1849 psi)
Injection Timing @ 3600 rpm 19 - 21 degrees B.T.D.C.

Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Distortion Limit 0,05 (0.002)
Thickness of Gasket Free 1,13 - 1,32 (0.0445 - 0.0520)
Thickness of Gasket Tightened 1,05 - 1,15 (0.0413 - 0.0453)
Top Clearance (Piston To Head) 0,50 - 0,70 (0.020 - 0.0277)
Compression (At Operating Temperature) 3,5 - 4,0 MPa (35 - 40 bar) (512 - 583 psi)
Limit Permitted 2,6 MPa (25 bar) (370 psi)

Valves
Valve Seat Angle 45 degrees
Valve Seat Width 2,1 (0.08)
O.D. of Valve Stem 5,968 - 5,980 (0.2350 - 0.2354)
I.D. of Valve Guide 6,01 - 6,025 (0.2366 - 0.2372)
Clearance between Valve Stem And Guide 0,03 - 0,057 (0.0012 - 0.0022)
Limit Permitted 0,1 (0.0039)
Depth of Valve -0,10 - 0,10 (-0.0039 - 0.0039)
Limit Permitted 0,30 (0.012)
Valve Clearance (Cold) (Intake And Exhaust) 0,145 - 0,185 (0.0057 - 0.0073)

Valve Springs
Free Length 31,3 - 31,8 (1.24 - 1.25)
Limit Permitted 28,4 (1.12)
Fitted Length 27 (1.063)
Load to Compress to Fitted Length 65 N (15 lb)
Limited Permitted 55 N (12 lb)
Limited Permitted for Spring Tilt 1,2 (0.047)

70-10-2 MT85 Service Manual

ENGINE INFORMATION (CONT’D)

Specifications (Kubota D902-EB) (Cont’d)

All dimensions are given in millimeters. Respective imperial dimensions are given in inches enclosed by
parentheses.

Rocker Arms
O.D. of Rocker Arm Shaft 10,47 - 10,48 (0.4123 - 0.4128)
I.D. of Rocker Arm Bushing 10,5 - 10,52 (0.4134 - 0.4141)
Clearance between Rocker Arm Shaft And Bushing 0,016 - 0,045 (0.0006 - 0.0018)
Limit Permitted 0,15 (0.006)

Camshaft
O.D. of Camshaft Bearing Journal 32,93 - 32,95 (1.2966 - 1.2972)
I.D. of Camshaft Bearing 33,00 - 33,025 (1.2992 - 1.3002)
Clearance between Camshaft Bearing And Journal 0,05 - 0,91 (0.002 - 0.004)
Limit Permitted 0,15 (0.006)
Alignment of the Camshaft Limit Permitted 0,01 (0.0004)
Cam Lobe Height 26,88 (1.0583)
Limit Permitted 26,83 (1.0563)
Idle Gear to Cam Gear Backlash 0,047 - 0,123 (0.002 - 0.005)
Limit Permitted 0,15 (0.006)

Cylinders
I.D. of Cylinder Liner 72,000 - 72,019 (2.8347 - 2.8353)
Limit Permitted 72,159 (2.8406)
Rebore Size for Oversize Piston 72,250 - 72,269 (2.8445 - 2.8452)

Piston Rings
Ring Gap, Top And Oil 0,20 - 0,35 (0.0079 - 0.0138)
Ring Gap, 2nd 0,35 - 0,50 (0.0138 - 0.0197)
Limit Permitted 1,25 (0.0492)
Side Clearance of Ring in Groove;
Top Ring Because of top ring design, measurement does not apply
2nd Ring 0,09 - 0,12 (0.0035 - 0.0047)
Oil Ring 0,04 - 0,08 (0.0016 - 0.0031)
Limit Permitted 0,15 (0.006)

70-10-3 MT85 Service Manual

ENGINE INFORMATION (CONT’D)

Specifications (Kubota D902-EB) (Cont’d)

All dimensions are given in millimeters. Respective imperial dimensions are given in inches enclosed by
parentheses.

Pistons
I.D. of Piston Pin Bore 20,00 - 20,013 (0.7874 - 0.7879)
Limit Permitted 20,05 (0.7894)
O.D. of Piston Pin 20,002 - 20,011 (0.7875 - 0.7878)

Connecting Rods
I.D. of Connecting Rod Bushing (Small End, Fitted) 20,02 - 20,04 (0.7884 - 0.7890)
Clearance between Piston Pin And Bushing 0,014 - 0,038 (0.0006 - 0.0014)
Clearance Between Piston Pin And Bushing Limit Permitted 0,10 (0.004)
Connecting Rod Alignment Limit Permitted 0,05 (0.002)

Crankshaft
Crankshaft Alignment Limit Permitted 0,02 (0.0008)
O.D. of Crankshaft Journal No. 1 (Water Pump Side) 43,93 - 43,95 (1.7297 - 1.7303)
I.D. of Crankshaft Bearing No. 1 43,98 - 44,04 (1.7317 - 1.7338)
Clearance between No. 1 Crankshaft Journal and Bearing 0,03 - 0,11 (0.0013 - 0.0042)
Limit Permitted 0,20 (0.008)
O.D. of Crankshaft Journal No. 2 (Flywheel Side) 43,93 - 43,95 (1.7297 - 1.7303)
I.D. of Crankshaft Bearing No. 2 43,98 - 43,99 (1.7315 - 1.7320)
Clearance between No. 2 Crankshaft Journal Bearing 0,28 - 0,059 (0.0011 - 0.0023)
Limit Permitted 0,20 (0.008)
O.D. of Crankshaft Journal No. 3 (Intermediate) 43,93 - 43,95 (1.7297 - 1.7303)
I.D. of Crankshaft Bearing No. 3 43,98 - 43,99 (1.7315 - 1.7320)
Clearance between No. 3 Crankshaft Journal and Bearing 0,28 - 0,059 (0.0011 - 0.0023)
Limit Permitted 0,20 (0.008)
O.D. of Connecting Rod Journals 33,96 - 33,98 (1.3370 - 1.3375)
I.D. of Connecting Rod Bearings 33,99 - 34,01 (1.3384 - 1.3389)
Clearance between Connecting Rod Journal and Bearing 0,02 - 0,051 (0.0008 - 0.0020)
Limit Permitted 0,15 (0.0059)
Crankshaft End Play 0,15 - 0,31 (0.006 - 0.012)
Limit Permitted 0,50 (0.020)

Oil Pump
Oil Pressure @ Rated RPM 0,2 - 0,4 MPa (2 - 6 bar) (28 - 64 psi)
Limit Permitted 0,1 MPa (2 bar) (21 psi)
Oil Pressure @ Idle Speed 0,05 MPa (1 bar) (7 psi)
Clearance between Outer Rotor And Pump Body 0,07 - 0,15 (0.003 - 0.006)
End Clearance between Inner Rotor And Cover 0,08 - 0,14 (0.003 - 0.005)
Clearance between Inner Rotor and Outer Rotor 0,03 - 0,14 (0.0012 - 0.0055)

70-10-4 MT85 Service Manual

ENGINE INFORMATION (CONT’D)

Specifications (Kubota D902-EB) (Cont’d)

All dimensions are given in millimeters. Respective imperial dimensions are given in inches enclosed by
parentheses.

Timing Gear

Timing Gear Backlash:

Crank Gear-Idle Gear 0,043 - 0,124 (0.0017 - 0.0049)
Allowable Limit 0,15 (0.0059)
Idle Gear-Cam Gear 0,047 - 0,123 (0.0018 - 0.0048 )
Allowable Limit 0,15 (0.0059)
Idle Gear-Injection Pump Gear 0,046 - 0,124 (0.0018 - 0.0049)
Allowable Limit 0,15 (0.0059)
Crank Gear-Oil Pump Gear 0,041 - 0,123 (0.0016 - 0.0048 )
Allowable Limit 0,15 (0.0059)
Clearance Between Idle Gear Shaft And Idle Gear Bushing: 0,020 - 0,084 (0.0008 - 0.0033)
Allowable Limit 0,10 (0.0039)
Idle Gear Bushing I.D. 20,000 - 20,051 (0.7874 - 0.7894 )
Idle Gear Shaft O.D. 19,967 - 19,980 (0.7861 - 0.7866)
Idle Gear Side Clearance 0,20 - 0,51 (0.0079 - 0.0201)
Allowable Limit 0,80 (0.031)

Thermostat
Opening Temperature
Starting 70 - 73°C (157 - 163°F)
Full Open 85°C (185°F)

70-10-5 MT85 Service Manual

ENGINE INFORMATION (CONT’D)

Torque Values

Kubota Metric Engine Bolts

Thread Size Material

(Dia. x Pitch) Head Mark 4 Head Mark 7 Head Mark 10
M5 x 0.8 4 - 5 N•m
(3 - 4 ft-lb)
M6 x 1.0 8 - 9 N•m 8 - 12 N•m
(6 - 7 ft-lb) (6 - 9 ft-lb)
M8 x 1.25 8 - 12 N•m 15 - 22 N•m 24 - 34 N•m
(6 - 9 ft-lb) (11 - 16 ft-lb) (18 - 25 ft-lb)
M10 x 1.25 18 - 24 N•m 30 - 41 N•m 49 - 68 N•m
(13 - 18 ft-lb) (22 - 30 ft-lb) (36 - 50 ft-lb)
M12 x 1.25 30 - 41 N•m 54 - 73 N•m 94 - 118 N•m
(22 - 30 ft-lb) (40 - 54 ft-lb) (69 - 87 ft-lb)
M14 x 1.5 49 - 68 N•m 79 - 108 N•m 157 - 186 N•m
(36 - 50 ft-lb) (58 - 80 ft-lb) (116 - 137 ft-lb)

Tightening Torques For General Use Screws, Bolts And Nuts

Grade Standard Screw and Bolt Special Screw and Bolt (7)


Nominal Unit (4)
Diameter N·m kgf·m ft-lb N·m kgf·m ft-lb
M6 7,9 - 9,3 0.80 - 0.95 5.8 - 6.9 9,8 - 11,3 1.00 - 1.15 7.23 - 8.32
M8 17,7 - 20,6 1.8 - 2.1 13.0 - 15.2 23,5 - 27,5 2.4 - 2.8 17.4 - 20.3
M10 39,2 - 45,1 4.0 - 4.6 28.9 - 33.3 49,0 - 55,9 5.0 - 5.7 36.2 - 41.2
M12 62,8 - 72,6 6.4 - 7.4 46.3 - 53.5 77,5 - 90,2 7.9 - 9.2 57.1 - 66.5

Screw and bolt material grades are shown by numbers punched on the screw and bolt heads. Prior to tightening,
be sure to check out the numbers as shown below.

Punched number Screw and bolt material grade

None or 4 Standard screw and bolt SS400, S20C
7 Special screw and bolt S43C, S48C (Refined)

70-10-6 MT85 Service Manual

ENGINE INFORMATION (CONT’D)

Troubleshooting WARNING
The following troubleshooting chart is provided for
assistance in locating and correcting problems which are Check for correct function after adjustments, repairs
most common. Many of the recommended procedures or service. Failure to make correct repairs or
must be done by authorized Bobcat Service Personnel adjustments can cause injury or death.
only. W-2004-1285

PROBLEM CAUSE

Slow cranking speed. 1, 2, 3, 4

Engine will not start. ALSO (See 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 22, 30, 31, 32, 58
Troubleshooting on Page 60-10-5.)
Difficult to start. 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 28, 30, 31, 32, 58
No power from the engine. 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 30, 31, 32, 58
Engine is mis-firing. 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16, 18, 19, 20, 24, 25, 27, 28, 30, 31, 32
Too much fuel consumption. 11, 13, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 23, 24, 26, 27, 28, 30, 31, 32
Black exhaust. 11, 13, 14, 16, 18, 19, 20, 22, 23, 24, 26, 27, 28, 30, 31, 32
Blue / White exhaust. 4, 16, 18, 19, 20, 24, 26, 30, 32, 33, 34, 44, 54
Low oil pressure. 4, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 41, 42, 32, 56
Engine knocking. 9, 14, 16, 18, 19, 22, 25, 27, 28, 30, 32, 34, 35, 44, 45, 57
Engine running rough. 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16, 20, 21, 25, 27, 28, 29, 32, 34, 44, 57
Vibration. 13, 14, 20, 24, 25, 28, 29, 32, 44, 47
High oil pressure. 4, 37, 40
Engine Overheating. 11, 13, 14, 16, 18, 19, 23, 24, 44, 46, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 55
Too much crankcase pressure. 24, 30, 32, 33, 44, 53
Poor compression. 11, 19, 24, 27, 28, 30, 31, 32, 33, 45, 57
Engine starts but does not stay 10, 11, 12
running.
Engine does not shut off. 59

70-10-7 MT85 Service Manual

ENGINE INFORMATION (CONT’D)

Troubleshooting (Cont’d)

KEY TO CORRECT THE CAUSE

1. Battery capacity low. 31. Worn valves and seats.

2. Bad electrical connection. 32. Broken, worn or sticking piston rings.
3. Faulty starter motor. 33. Worn valve stems and guides.
4. Incorrect grade of oil. 34. Overly full air cleaner.
5. Low cranking speed. 35. Worn or damaged bearings.
6. Fuel tank empty. 36. Not enough oil in the oil pan.
7. Faulty stop control operation. 37. Gauge is not correct.
8. Plugged fuel line. 38. Oil pump worn.
9. Faulty fuel lift pump. 39. Pressure relief valve is open.
10. Plugged fuel filter. 40. Pressure relief valve is sticking closed.
11. Restriction in the air cleaner. 41. Broken relief valve spring.
12. Air in the fuel system. 42. Faulty suction pipe.
13. Faulty fuel injection pump. 43. Plugged oil filter.
14. Faulty fuel injectors. 44. Piston seizure.
15. Incorrect use of the glow plugs 45. Incorrect piston height.
16. Glow plugs not working. 46. Damaged fan.
17. Broken fuel injection pump drive. 47. Faulty engine mounting or loose mounting.
18. Incorrect fuel pump timing. 48. Faulty thermostat.
19. Incorrect valve timing. 49. Restriction in the water jacket.
20. Poor compression. 50. Loose fan belt.
21. Plugged fuel tank vent. 51. Plugged radiator.
22. Incorrect type or grade of fuel. 52. Faulty water pump.
23. Exhaust pipe restriction. 53. Plugged breather pipe.
24. Cylinder head gasket leaking. 54. Valve stem seals damaged.
25. Overheating. 55. Coolant level low.
26. Cold running. 56. Plugged oil pump pipe strainer.
27. Incorrect valve tappet adjustment. 57. Broken valve spring.
28. Sticking valves. 58. Hydraulics in Detent position or drive engaged.
29. Incorrect high pressure tubelines. 59. Faulty shut-down circuit. (See Troubleshooting on Page
60-10-5.)
30. Worn engine cylinder bores.

70-10-8 MT85 Service Manual

ENGINE INFORMATION (CONT’D) Figure 70-10-1

Engine Removal And Installation

Put the loader on Jackstands. (See Procedure on Page

10-10-1.) 1
Remove the Battery. (See Removal And Installation on
Page 60-20-1.)

Raise the Hood.

Remove the air cleaner and mounting bracket. (See

Housing Removal And Installation on Page 70-40-1.) and
(See Engine Mounting Bracket Removal And Installation
on Page 70-120-2.) P-62034

Remove the muffler. (See Removal And Installation on

Page 70-30-1.) Remove the throttle cable nut (Item 1) [Figure 70-10-1]
from the linkage arm.
Remove the hydraulic tank. (See Removal And
Installation on Page 20-90-1.) Figure 70-10-2

Remove the radiator. (See Radiator Removal And

Installation on Page 70-50-1.)

Remove the bottom access panel underneath the loader.

(See Removal And Installation on Page 50-80-1.)
2

WARNING 1

AVOID BURNS
Do not remove radiator cap when the engine is hot.
You can be seriously burned.
P-62167
W-2070-1203

Remove the throttle cable (Item 1) from the bracket

(Item 2) [Figure 70-10-2].

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Always clean up spilled fuel or oil. Keep heat, flames,
sparks or lighted tobacco away from fuel and oil.
Failure to use care around combustibles can cause
explosion or fire.
W-2103-0508

70-10-9 MT85 Service Manual

ENGINE INFORMATION (CONT’D) Figure 70-10-5

Engine Removal And Installation (Cont’d)

Figure 70-10-3 2

4 3

1 P-62169

Remove the fuel bypass line (Item 1) [Figure 70-10-5]

P-59623 from the Injector.

Disconnect the fuel shut off solenoid connector (Item 2)

Remove the gear pump mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure and power lead (Item 3) for the glow plugs. [Figure 70-
70-10-3] from the hydraulic gear pump. 10-5].

Slide the gear pump away from the engine assembly. The Remove the power connector strip (Item 4) [Figure 70-
hydraulic hoses do not need to be removed. 10-5] from the glow plugs.

Figure 70-10-4 Figure 70-10-6

3
1

1
1
P-62173 P-51070

Remove the fuel lines: Remove the bolts (Item 1) fastening the wiring harness
and fuel timer (Item 2) [Figure 70-10-6] to the
(Item 1) [Figure 70-10-4] supply from the fuel tank. mainframe.

(Item 2) [Figure 70-10-4] to the fuel filter.

(Item 3) [Figure 70-10-4] from the fuel filter.

70-10-10 MT85 Service Manual

ENGINE INFORMATION (CONT’D) Figure 70-10-9

Engine Removal And Installation (Cont’d)

Figure 70-10-7

2 1
1

P-51122A

Remove the ground cable (Item 1) [Figure 70-10-9] from

P-51068 the starter housing.

Figure 70-10-10
Disconnect the coolant temperature sender (Item 1) and
alternator connections (Item 2) [Figure 70-10-7].

Figure 70-10-8

1
1
1

P-51126A

Install a chain hoist to the engine lifting eyes (Item 1)

P-51121A [Figure 70-10-10].

Disconnect the positive battery cable (Item 1) [Figure 70-

10-8] from the starter.

Disconnect the wire (Item 2) [Figure 70-10-8] from the

(S) terminal on the starter.

70-10-11 MT85 Service Manual

ENGINE INFORMATION (CONT’D)

Removal And Installation (Cont’d)

Figure 70-10-11

P-74273

Remove the two side mounting bolts and nuts (Item 1)

[Figure 70-10-11] from each side of the loader.

Figure 70-10-12

P-74567

Remove the rear mounting bolt (Item 1) [Figure 70-10-

12] from the loader.

Lift the engine out of the loader.

Reverse the removal procedure to install the engine.

Once the engine is placed back in the loader, check the

drive belt alignment of the flywheel pulley, belt tensioner
and the hydrostatic pump pulleys. Adjustments can be
made to align the drive belt properly. For more
information on drive belt alignment: (See Alignment on
Page 30-50-2.)

70-10-12 MT85 Service Manual

ENGINE INFORMATION (CONT’D) Figure 70-10-14

Engine Mount Replacement 5

4
Use the following procedure to install new engine
mounts:

Remove the existing mount from the engine. Refer to

engine removal and installation for engine mount
locations.

Replace all three engine mounts one rear and one on 3

each side.
2
Figure 70-10-13 1
P-74271
1

Use the parts shown to install the new rear engine

mounts [Figure 70-10-14]:

2 Mounting Bolt - (Item 1)

3 Washer - (Item 2)
4
Engine Mount (Bottom) - (Item 3)

Engine Mount (Top) - (Item 4)

Hex Nut - (Item 5)

3

2 Tighten the mounting bolt (Item 1) [Figure 70-10-14] to

105 - 115 N•m (78 - 85 ft-lb) torque.
5 P-74270
Figure 70-10-15

Use the parts shown to install the new side engine

mounts [Figure 70-10-13]:

Mounting Bolt - (Item 1)

Snubber Cup - (Item 2)

Engine Mount - (Item 3)

Spacer - (Item 4)
1
Hex Nut - (Item 5)

Tighten the mounting bolt (Item 1) [Figure 70-10-13] to P-74272

57 - 63 N•m (42 - 46 ft-lb) torque.

Installation: The top engine mount must be installed

with the male end (Item 1) [Figure 70-10-15] facing
down.

70-10-13 MT85 Service Manual

ENGINE INFORMATION (CONT’D) Kubota D902-EB

Compression - Checking Compression Pressure 3,5 - 4,0 MPa

(35 - 40 bar)
Figure 70-10-16 (512 - 583 psi)
Allowable limit 2,5 MPa
(25 bar)
(370 psi)

If the pressures are not within 10% of each other, apply a

small amount of oil in the cylinders and retest.

If the pressures increase after applying oil, check cylinder

walls and piston rings.

If the pressures do not increase after applying oil, check

top clearance, valve clearance and cylinder head.

P-62149

The tool listed will be needed to do the following

procedure:

MEL10630 - Engine Compression Test Kit

Warm the engine.

Remove the glow plugs, muffler and air cleaner from the
engine. (If testing through glow plug hole.)

Remove the air cleaner, muffler and all injector nozzles.

(If testing through injector nozzle hole.)

Install a compression adapter from the kit (that closely

resembles either the glow plug or injector, depending on
where you are taking the test reading) in the cylinder
head.

Connect the compression gauge to the adapter [Figure

70-10-16].

Ensure the speed control lever is set at the low idle

setting.

Hold fuel shut off lever to no fuel. (shut-off) See arrow,

[Figure 70-10-16]. Shut off solenoid does not need to be
removed.

Turn the engine with the starter at 200 - 300 rpm. Run the
test for each cylinder more than twice for 5 - 10 seconds
each time and take the average reading. Make sure you
are using a fully charged battery for each and every run.

The correct compression for the engine is:

70-10-14 MT85 Service Manual

ENGINE SPEED CONTROL Figure 70-20-2

Removal And Installation

Raise the hood.

Figure 70-20-1

2 P-51101

Figure 70-20-3

P-51099

Remove the speed control cable nut (Item 1) [Figure 70-

20-1] from the speed control lever.

Remove the two bolts, nuts and spacer (Item 2) [Figure

70-20-1] from the speed control bracket. 1

P-51100

Remove the two nuts (Item 1) [Figure 70-20-2] and

[Figure 70-20-3] from the throttle bracket.

Remove the throttle bracket assembly.

Reverse the removal procedure to install the engine

speed control.

70-20-1 MT85 Service Manual

ENGINE SPEED CONTROL (CONT’D) Cable Removal And Installation

Disassembly And Assembly Raise the hood.

Figure 70-20-4 Figure 70-20-6

1 1

P-51108 P-51107

Figure 70-20-5 Remove the nut (Item 1) [Figure 70-20-6] from the
throttle cable and throttle bracket.

Figure 70-20-7

2
2

1
P-51109

Loosen the two control lever mounting bolts (Item 1)

P-51106
[Figure 70-20-4] and remove the mounting nuts (Item 2)
[Figure 70-20-5].
Remove the two nuts from the u-bolt (Item 1) [Figure 70-
Assembly: Do not lubricate the engine speed control. 20-7] on the throttle cable and throttle bracket.
Tighten bolts (Item 1) [Figure 70-20-4] evenly until a
comfortable tension is obtained while moving the lever NOTE: The spacer (Item 2) [Figure 70-20-7] is needed
back and forth. to align the cable when the u-bolt is tightened.

Replace any worn or damaged parts if necessary.

70-20-2 MT85 Service Manual

ENGINE SPEED CONTROL (CONT’D) Figure 70-20-10

Cable Removal And Installation (Cont’d)

Figure 70-20-8

OUTSIDE INSIDE
1 1

1
P-51104

P-51105

Remove the speed control cable nut (Item 1) [Figure 70-

P-51103 20-10] from the speed control lever.

Remove the throttle cable from the loader.

Remove the bolt and nut (Item 1) [Figure 70-20-8] from
the throttle cable mounted to the mainframe. Reverse the removal procedure to install the throttle
cable.
Figure 70-20-9

P-62167

Remove the two nuts (Item 1) [Figure 70-20-9] from the

u-bolt on the throttle cable.

70-20-3 MT85 Service Manual

70-20-4 MT85 Service Manual
MUFFLER Figure 70-30-2

Removal And Installation

Raise the hood.

WARNING 1
Stop engine and allow the muffler to cool before 1
cleaning the spark chamber. Wear safety goggles.
Failure to obey can cause serious injury.
W-2011-1285

P-62032
Figure 70-30-1

Remove the four muffler mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure

2 70-30-2] from the muffler flange and exhaust manifold.
1 1
Installation: Tighten bolts to 24 - 26 N•m (18 - 19 ft-lb)
torque.

Figure 70-30-3

2
1
P-59653 P-62033

Loosen the muffler shield mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure

70-30-1].

Remove the muffler shield (Item 2) [Figure 70-30-1] from

the loader.
P-51046

Remove the two muffler mounting bolts (Item 1) from the

muffler mount. The bolts can be accessed through the
side access hole (Item 2) [Figure 70-30-3] on the loader.

70-30-1 MT85 Service Manual

MUFFLER (CONT’D)

Removal And Installation (Cont’d)

Figure 70-30-4

P-51051

The muffler mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure 70-30-3]

fasten the muffler to the engine by using self retaining
nuts (Item 1) [Figure 70-30-4].

The self retaining nuts do not need to be changed unless

they have thread damage. Squeeze the tabs together to
insert them into the square holes in the muffler if
installing.

Figure 70-30-5

P-51050

Check the muffler gasket (Item 1) [Figure 70-30-5] for

damage and replace if needed.

Remove muffler from the loader.

Reverse the removal procedure to install the muffler.

70-30-2 MT85 Service Manual

AIR CLEANER Figure 70-40-3

Housing Removal And Installation

Open the hood.

Figure 70-40-1

P-62030

Remove the two bolts (Item 1) [Figure 70-40-3] that

mount the air cleaner housing to the mounting bracket.

P-62029 Remove the air cleaner housing from the loader.

Reverse the removal procedure to install the air cleaner

Loosen the outlet hose clamp (Item 1) [Figure 70-40-1]. housing.

Figure 70-40-2

P-62028

Loosen the inlet hose clamp (Item 1) [Figure 70-40-2].

70-40-1 MT85 Service Manual

70-40-2 MT85 Service Manual
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM Remove the coolant recovery tank from the loader.

Radiator Removal And Installation Figure 70-50-2

Disconnect the battery. (See Removal And Installation on

Page 60-20-1.)

Drain the coolant from the radiator. (See Removing And

Replacing Coolant on Page 10-70-2.)

NOTE: Make sure the radiator is cool.

WARNING
AVOID BURNS
P-62036
Do not remove radiator cap when the engine is hot.
You can be seriously burned.
W-2070-1203
Disconnect the upper radiator hose (Item 1) [Figure 70-
50-2] from the thermostat housing on the engine.

Figure 70-50-3
WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Wear safety glasses to prevent eye injury when any
of the following conditions exist:
• When fluids are under pressure.
• Flying debris or loose material is present.
• Engine is running.
• Tools are being used.
W-2019-0907 1

Figure 70-50-1

P-62034

Disconnect the lower radiator hose (Item 1) [Figure 70-

50-3] from the bottom of the radiator through the access
hole on the side of the machine.
2

P-62031

Remove the coolant recovery tank mounting screws

(Item 1) [Figure 70-50-1].

Disconnect the overflow hose (Item 2) [Figure 70-50-2]

from the coolant recovery tank.

70-50-1 MT85 Service Manual

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM (CONT’D) Figure 70-50-6

Radiator Removal And Installation (Cont’d) RIGHT SIDE

Figure 70-50-4

1
3
3
2

4
P-51116

Figure 70-50-7
P-62035
LEFT SIDE
Remove the fuel cap (Item 1), radiator cap (Item 2) and
the four mounting screws (Item 3) for the upper cooler
shield (Item 4) [Figure 70-50-4].

Figure 70-50-5
1

P-51117

1 Remove the six side shroud mounting bolts (Item 1)

2 [Figure 70-50-6] and [Figure 70-50-7].

P-62087

Remove the four top and four bottom shroud mounting

bolts (Item 1) [Figure 70-50-5].

Remove the upper cooler shield (Item 2) [Figure 70-50-

5].

70-50-2 MT85 Service Manual

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM (CONT’D) Figure 70-50-10

Radiator Removal And Installation (Cont’d)

Figure 70-50-8 1

1
1

P-51127

Loosen the alternator mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure 70-

P-51120 50-10] to remove tension from the alternator belt.

Figure 70-50-11
Figure 70-50-9

P-62087
P-51119

Remove the cooling fan blade (Item 1) [Figure 70-50-11]

Remove the three side mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure from the water pump.
70-50-8] and [Figure 70-50-9] for the cooler mount.
(Both Sides) Lift the radiator from the loader together with the cooler
mount straight up and out of the loader.

70-50-3 MT85 Service Manual

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM (CONT’D) Water Pump Removal And Installation

Fan Blade Removal And Installation Figure 70-50-14

Disconnect the Battery. (See Removal And Installation on

Page 60-20-1.) 1

Figure 70-50-12 4
2
6
3 5

P-62184

Drain the cooling system.

P-74882 Remove the radiator. (See Radiator Removal And

Installation on Page 70-50-1.)

Remove the four bolts (Item 1) [Figure 70-50-12] Remove the alternator belt.
securing the cooling fan blade to the water pump.
Remove the fan.
Figure 70-50-13
Remove the water pump bolts.

Remove the water pump.

Installation: Always use a new gasket (Item 1) [Figure

70-50-14] when installing the water pump. Apply liquid
gasket to both sides of gasket.

Water Pump Disassembly And Assembly

1
Put the water pump in a vise.

Remove the pulley.

2
P-62087 Press the shaft (Item 2) and hub (Item 3) out of the pulley
side of the water pump (Item 4) [Figure 70-50-14].
Remove the cooling fan blade (Item 1) and spacer block Remove the seal (Item 5) and impeller (Item 6) [Figure
(Item 2) [Figure 70-50-13] from the water pump. 70-50-14].
Reverse the removal procedure to install the cooling fan Install a new seal when assembling the water pump.
blade.

70-50-4 MT85 Service Manual

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM (CONT’D) Figure 70-50-16

Thermostat Housing Removal And Installation

1
Figure 70-50-15

1 2

B-3643

Remove the housing and thermostat (Item 1) [Figure 70-

P-34729 50-16].

Remove the four mounting bolts at the coolant housing

Drain the engine coolant until it is below the thermostat (Item 2) [Figure 70-50-16].
level.
Remove coolant housing from the engine block.
Remove the hose (Item 1) [Figure 70-50-15].

Remove the bolts (Item 2) [Figure 70-50-15] and

thermostat housing.

Installation: Make sure all gasket surfaces are clean.

Replace the gasket before installing the thermostat
housing. Install liquid gasket to thermostat housing.

70-50-5 MT85 Service Manual

70-50-6 MT85 Service Manual
LUBRICATION SYSTEM Figure 70-60-3

Oil Pan Removal And Installation 2

1
Remove the engine and hydrostatic pump assembly from
the loader. (See Engine Removal And Installation on
Page 70-10-9.)

The engine will have to be on an engine stand or

suspended in the air safely to remove the oil pan.

Figure 70-60-1

P-62187

Installation: Check O-ring (Item 1) on strainer and use

hole 3 (Item 2) [Figure 70-60-3] when installing strainer.

1 1 1 Clean the oil pickup tube screen.

1
Clean the oil pickup tube screen and check the O-ring
(Item 1) [Figure 70-60-3] and replace if worn.

P13309 Use care not to damage O-ring when installing the oil
pickup tube.

Remove the oil pan mounting bolts (Item 1) [Figure 70- NOTE: Clean the surface of the oil pan and the block
60-1] and remove the oil pan. thoroughly. And apply a new liquid gasket to
the oil pan before installing.
Installation: Tighten pan mounting bolts to 9,8 - 11,3
N•m (87 - 100 in-lb) torque, in a diagonal order from the
center.

Figure 70-60-2

P-62179

Remove the mounting bolt (Item 1) and remove the oil

pickup tube (Item 2) [Figure 70-60-2].

Installation: Tighten the oil pickup tube mount bolt to

23,1 - 27,1 N•m (17 - 20 ft-lb) torque.

70-60-1 MT85 Service Manual

LUBRICATION SYSTEM (CONT’D) Oil Pump Inspection

Oil Pump Removal And Installation Figure 70-60-5

Remove the timing gearcase cover. (See Timing

Gearcase Cover Removal And Installation on Page 70-
100-1.)

Remove the crankshaft gear. (See Crankshaft Gear

Removal And Installation on Page 70-90-7.)

Figure 70-60-4

B-3616

Measure the clearance between the lobes of the inner

rotor and outer rotor [Figure 70-60-5].
2
Figure 70-60-6

B-3658

Remove the nut from the oil pump shaft. Use a puller to
remove the oil pump gear (Item 1) [Figure 70-60-4].

Remove the oil pump mounting bolts. Remove the oil

pump (Item 2) [Figure 70-60-4].

Installation: Tighten the oil pump mounting bolts to 18 -

21 N•m (13 - 15 ft-lb) torque.

A-2732

Measure the clearance between the outer rotor and

pump body [Figure 70-60-6].

If the clearance exceeds the factory limit, replace the oil

pump.

Clearance Between 0,03 - 0,14 mm

Inner & Outer Rotor (0.001 - 0.006 in)
Clearance Between 0,07 - 0,15 mm
Outer rotor & Body (0.003 - 0.006 in)

70-60-2 MT85 Service Manual

RECONDITIONING THE ENGINE (CONT’D) Engine Oil Pressure - Testing

Oil Pump Inspection (Cont'd) Figure 70-60-8

Figure 70-60-7

B-14876

PI-10009
Remove the oil pressure sensor.

Put a piece of press gauge on the rotor face [Figure 70- Install a pressure gauge [Figure 70-60-8].
60-7].
Start the engine and run until it is at operating
Install the cover and tighten the bolts. temperature.

Remove the cover carefully. Measure the width of the If the oil pressure is less than the allowable limit, check
press gauge [Figure 70-60-7]. the following item:

If the clearance exceeds the factory limit replace the oil • Engine Oil Level Low
pump. • Oil Pump Defective
• Oil Galley Plugged
End Clearance 0,075 - 0,135 mm (0.003 - 0.005 in) • Oil Strainer Plugged
• Excessive Clearance at the Rod & Main Bearings
• Relief Valve Stuck

At Idle Speed Allowable Limit 0,05 MPa

(0,5 bar) (7 psi)
At Rated Speed 0,2 - 0,4 MPa
(2 - 4 bar) (28 - 64 psi)
Rated Speed Allowable Limit 0,1 MPa (1 bar) (21 psi)

Remove coolant housing from the engine block.

70-60-3 MT85 Service Manual

70-60-4 MT85 Service Manual
FUEL SYSTEM Fuel Camshaft Governor Disassembly And Assembly

Fuel Camshaft Removal And Installation Figure 70-70-2

Remove the timing gearcase cover. (See Timing

2
Gearcase Cover Removal And Installation on Page 70-
100-1.) 4
1
Remove the idler gear. (See Idler Gear And Shaft
Removal And Installation on Page 70-100-3.) 5

Figure 70-70-1

2 3
1 11
10
6
9
8
1. Start Spring 7
2. Governor Spring
3. Fork Lever 1
4. Fork Lever 2
5. Fork Lever Shaft
6. Governor Sleeve
7. Retainer Plate
B-14342
8. Bearing
9. Fuel Camshaft
10. Bearing
Remove the bolts (Item 1) from the retainer plate (Item 2) 11. Snap Ring B-14875

[Figure 70-70-1].
The governor serves to keep the engine speed constant
Installation: Tighten the bolts to 9,8 - 11,3 N•m (7.2 - 8.3 by automatically adjusting the amount of fuel supplied to
ft-lb) torque. the engine according to changes in the load.

Remove the fuel camshaft retainer plate (Item 2) [Figure Disassemble and assemble the governor and fuel
70-70-1]. camshaft as shown in figure [Figure 70-70-2].

Remove the fuel camshaft and governor fork lever Check all the parts for wear or damage and replace as
assembly at the same time. needed.

Ensure governor spring is attached to fork lever 2 before

installing fork lever 2 into crankcase.

70-70-1 MT85 Service Manual

FUEL SYSTEM (CONT’D) Fuel Injection Pump Removal And Installation

Fuel Shutoff Solenoid - Checking Remove the air cleaner housing. (See Housing Removal
And Installation on Page 70-40-1.)
Figure 70-70-3

IMPORTANT
Do not attempt to maintain or adjust unless you are
trained and have the correct equipment.
I-2028-0289

Clean the injection pump and area around it with a

cleaning solvent or steam cleaning.

+12 Volts
P-62154
IMPORTANT
The energize to stop solenoid does not have 12 volts Never steam clean or put cold water on an injection
applied to it while the engine is running. pump while the engine is running or while it is hot. If
you do it will cause serious damage to the injection
The solenoid is energized for a brief period with 12 volts pump.
when the ignition key is turned off. I-2135-0997

The length of time 12 volts is applied is controlled by a

timer in the electrical harness.

To test the solenoid, directly apply 12 volts to the

electrical lead of the solenoid. The solenoid arm should IMPORTANT
pull back into the solenoid housing until the 12 volt power
supply is removed. Do not bend the high pressure fuel injection tubes
when removing or installing them.
I-2029-0289

70-70-2 MT85 Service Manual

FUEL SYSTEM (CONT’D) Figure 70-70-6

Fuel Injection Pump Removal And Installation

(Cont’d)

Figure 70-70-4

2
3
3

2
1
1
P-62135

Disconnect the fuel inlet hose (Item 1) and the fuel return
hoses (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-6].
P-62133
Remove the four bolts (Item 3) [Figure 70-70-6] from the
injection pump.
Figure 70-70-5
Installation: Tighten the four bolts to 23 - 27 N•m (17 -
20 ft-lb) torque.

1
P-62134

Use these tools for the following procedure:

MEL1270 - Fuel Line Removal Tool

MEL1271 - Delivery Valve Removal Tool

Remove the injector nozzle tubelines (Item 1) [Figure 70-

70-4] and [Figure 70-70-5] from the injection pump and
the injectors.

Installation: Tighten the tubelines to 15 - 26 N•m (11 -

19 ft-lb) torque.

70-70-3 MT85 Service Manual

FUEL SYSTEM (CONT’D) Fuel Injection Pump - Timing

Fuel Injection Pump Removal And Installation Remove the air cleaner housing. (See Housing Removal
(Cont’d) And Installation on Page 70-40-1.)

Figure 70-70-7 Remove the hydraulic reservoir. (See Removal And

Installation on Page 20-80-1.)

Figure 70-70-8

B-14423

Lift the injection pump while moving it to align the pin

P-62133
(Item 1) [Figure 70-70-7] in the control rack with the slot
in the engine block to remove the pump.
Remove the high pressure tubelines (Item 1) [Figure 70-
Installation: When the injection pump is installed, make 70-8] from the injection pump and the injectors.
sure the pin (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-7] on the control rack
is correctly installed in the fork lever. If the slot is not Figure 70-70-9
installed correctly, the engine will run over maximum
speed and serious damage can result.

NOTE: Make sure the same number shims are 1

installed under the injection pump. The shims
are used for engine timing.

P13132

Install a short plastic tube (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-9] in

the fitting of the number 1 cylinder port. Point the tube up.

70-70-4 MT85 Service Manual

FUEL SYSTEM (CONT’D) NOTE: Fuel must be visible in the tube (Item 1)
[Figure 70-70-9] before attempting timing.
Fuel Injection Pump - Timing (Cont’d)
Move the fuel lever on the injection pump to full fuel
Figure 70-70-10 position (or full throttle).

Turn the flywheel counter-clockwise slowly until the fuel

starts to rise in the plastic tube (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-9].

Figure 70-70-12

B-10007 2
1
Timing the fuel injection pump is done by changing the
number of shims between the injection pump and the
injection pump mounting surface (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-
P-51279
10].

Figure 70-70-11 At this point look at the timing mark.

The Kubota D902 engine have a single timing mark (Item

1) [Figure 70-70-12] located on the flywheel.

When the timing mark is aligned with the bottom edge of

the timing pointer (Item 3) [Figure 70-70-12], the
injection pump timing is correct.
1
The correct engine timing for the Kubota D902 engine is
19 - 21° B.T.D.C.
4
Add or subtract shims (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-10] or
[Figure 70-70-11] to achieve the correct timing.
2
3 P-51280 NOTE: Adding or reducing the shim thickness by
0,05 mm (0.002 in) retards or advances the
injection timing by approximately 0.5°.
Shims (Item 1) are available in thickness of 0,20 mm
(0.008 in) (2 holes) (Item 2), 0,25 mm (0.010 in) (1 hole)
(Item 3) and 0,30 mm (0.011 in) (without hole) (Item 4)
[Figure 70-70-11]. Combine these shims for adjustment.

The sealant is applied to both sides of the soft metal

gasket shim. Liquid sealant is not required for assembly.

Addition or reduction of a shim of 0,20 mm (0.008 in) will

delay or advance the injection timing by approximately
2.0°. The timing of the pump will be later when a shim is
added, and earlier when a shim is removed.

70-70-5 MT85 Service Manual

FUEL SYSTEM (CONT’D) Remove the banjo fittings (Item 3) [Figure 70-70-14]
from the fuel injector nozzles.
Fuel Injector Removal And Installation
Figure 70-70-15
The tool listed will be needed to do the following
procedure:

MEL1485 - Socket

To remove the injector nozzles, use the following

procedure:

Remove the air cleaner housing. (See Housing Removal

And Installation on Page 70-40-1.)

Figure 70-70-13

B-5970

Loosen the fuel injector with a special socket [Figure 70-

70-15].
1 Install the injector nozzle in the cylinder head and tighten
to 49 - 68 N•m (37 - 50 ft-lb) torque.

P-62133

Remove the injector tubelines (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-13]

from the injector pump.

Figure 70-70-14

1
1

2 3
P-62134

Remove the injector tubelines (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-14]

from the injectors.

Remove the fuel return hoses (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-14]

from the banjo fittings.

70-70-6 MT85 Service Manual

FUEL SYSTEM (CONT’D) The tools listed will be needed to do the following
procedure:
Fuel Injector Removal And Installation (Cont’d)
4200 - Injector Nozzle Tester
Figure 70-70-16 4201 - Accessory Set

NOTE: You can adjust the release pressure of the

injector nozzle by adding or removing
spacers (Item 1) [Figure 70-70-17] from the top
of the nozzle spring (Item 2) [Figure 70-70-17].
Spacers are available in different thicknesses.
A change in thickness of 0,01 mm (0.0004 in)
will change the release pressure about 0,23
MPa (2,3 bar) (34 psi). The release pressure
must be 13,7 - 14,7 MPa (137 - 147 bar) (1991 -
2134 psi).

B-5971

Remove the fuel injector nozzle from the engine [Figure

70-70-16].

Remove the air from the fuel system after installing the
fuel injectors. (See Removing Air From The Fuel System
on Page 10-80-3.)

IMPORTANT
Do not disassemble or test the fuel injector nozzles
unless you have the correct service and testing
tools.
I-2027-0284

Fuel Injector Nozzle Pressure - Checking

Figure 70-70-17

P-62152

70-70-7 MT85 Service Manual

FUEL SYSTEM (CONT’D) Nozzle Spray Condition

Fuel Injector Nozzle Pressure - Checking (Cont’d) Figure 70-70-19

Figure 70-70-18 CORRECT WRONG

P-62151

A-2513
Check the spray pattern of the nozzle for the following
conditions [Figure 70-70-19]:
Connect the injector nozzle to the tester with the nozzle
in the down position [Figure 70-70-18]. Does not come out the side of the nozzle.

Slowly operate the hand lever of the test pump until the Does not have drops coming from the nozzle.
injector nozzle valve opens. The pressure must be 13,7 -
14,7 MPa (137 - 147 bar) (1991 - 2134 psi). Does not have a flow (solid stream) coming from the
nozzle.
If the pressure is not correct, disassemble the injector
nozzle and add or remove spacers (Item 1) [Figure 70- Any of the above conditions show a defect or a dirty
70-17]. injector nozzle. Clean the nozzle that does not operate
correctly and check again.
NOTE: When assembling the injector nozzle, tighten
the retainer nut (Item 3) [Figure 70-70-17] to
25,3 - 28,9 N•m (23.5 - 28.9 ft-lb) torque. Any
higher torque will cause slow action of the
valve.

Check for inside leakage. Operate the hand lever until the
pressure reaches 12,7 MPa (127 bar) (1849 psi). Make a
record of the pressure. Release the hand lever. Check
the pressure decrease to 10 seconds. If any leak is
found, replace the nozzle.

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Diesel fuel or hydraulic fluid under pressure can
penetrate skin or eyes, causing serious injury or
death. Fluid leaks under pressure may not be visible.
Use a piece of cardboard or wood to find leaks. Do
not use your bare hand. Wear safety goggles. If fluid
enters skin or eyes, get immediate medical attention
from a physician familiar with this injury.
W-2072-0807

70-70-8 MT85 Service Manual

FUEL SYSTEM (CONT’D) Figure 70-70-20

Valve Seat Tightness

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Diesel fuel or hydraulic fluid under pressure can
penetrate skin or eyes, causing serious injury or
death. Fluid leaks under pressure may not be visible.
Use a piece of cardboard or wood to find leaks. Do
not use your bare hand. Wear safety goggles. If fluid
enters skin or eyes, get immediate medical attention
A-2513
from a physician familiar with this injury.
W-2072-0807

Connect the injector nozzle to the tester with the nozzle

in the down position [Figure 70-70-20].

Check for inside leakage. Operate the hand lever until the
pressure reaches 12,7 MPa (127 bar) (1849 psi). Make a
record of the pressure. Release the hand lever. Check
the pressure decrease in 10 seconds. If any leak is
found, replace the nozzle.

70-70-9 MT85 Service Manual

70-70-10 MT85 Service Manual
CYLINDER HEAD Glow Plugs Removal And Installation

Glow Plugs - Testing Figure 70-80-3

Figure 70-80-1
3
2
3
2

P-62161

P-62161
Remove the three nuts (Item 1) [Figure 70-80-3]
securing the glow plug electrical bar to the glow plugs.
Remove the three nuts (Item 1) [Figure 70-80-1]
securing the glow plug electrical bar to the glow plugs. Disconnect the engine harness wire (Item 2) [Figure 70-
80-3] from the glow plug.
Disconnect the engine harness wire (Item 2) [Figure 70-
80-1] from the glow plug. Remove the electrical bar (Item 3) [Figure 70-80-3] from
the glow plugs.
Remove the electrical bar (Item 3) [Figure 70-80-1] from
the glow plugs. Figure 70-80-4

Figure 70-80-2

P3420

S6013
Remove the glow plug [Figure 70-80-4].

Test the glow plugs by touching one probe to the end of Installation: Tighten the glow plug to 7,9 - 14 N•m (5.8 -
the glow plug and the other probe to the body of the glow 10 ft-lb) torque.
plug [Figure 70-80-2].

Glow plug resistance must be approximately 0.9 ohm. If

the resistance is 0 ohm the glow plug has a short circuit.

If the resistance is infinite the coil of the glow plug is

broken.

70-80-1 MT85 Service Manual

CYLINDER HEAD (CONT’D) Figure 70-80-6

Valve Clearance Adjustment

NOTE: The valve clearance must be checked and

adjusted when the engine is cold.

Figure 70-80-5

2
1 P-62023
3

With No. 1 piston at TDC (compression) both the intake

and exhaust valves are up. Set both No. 1 valves, No. 2
exhaust valve and No. 3 intake valve. [Figure 70-80-6].

P-62022 Rotate the flywheel 360°, No. 1 (overlap position). Set

No. 2 intake valve and No. 3 exhaust valve. [Figure 70-
80-6].
Remove the cylinder head cover and the glow plugs.
Figure 70-80-7
Adjust the valve clearance as follows:

Loosen the lock nut (Item 1) [Figure 70-80-5]. 0,145 - 0,185 mm

(0.0057 - 0.0073 in)
Turn the adjustment screw (Item 2) [Figure 70-80-5] until
the correct clearance is obtained.

NOTE: The clearance is measured between the

rocker arm and valve stem tip (Item 3) [Figure
70-80-5].

If adjustments are necessary, tighten lock nut before

moving on to the next rocker arm.

A-2730

Make sure the piston is at TDC when adjusting the

clearance at the valves. The correct clearance is 0,145 -
0,185 mm (0.0057 - 0.0073 in) cold clearance [Figure
70-80-7].

70-80-2 MT85 Service Manual

CYLINDER HEAD (CONT’D)

Valve Timing - Checking

Remove the engine. (See Engine Removal And

Installation on Page 70-10-9.)

Remove the timing gearcase cover. (See Timing

Gearcase Cover Removal And Installation on Page 70-
100-1.)

Figure 70-80-8

B-14874

Make sure the timing marks [Figure 70-80-8] are in

correct alignment.

70-80-3 MT85 Service Manual

CYLINDER HEAD (CONT’D) Figure 70-80-10

Cylinder Head Removal And Installation 2

1
Remove the fuel injector nozzles. (See Fuel Injector
Removal And Installation on Page 70-70-6.)

Remove the glow plugs. (See Glow Plugs Removal And

Installation on Page 70-80-1.)

Remove the alternator. (See Removal And Installation on

Page 60-30-5.)

Figure 70-80-9

2 3 3 P-62176

Remove the rocker arm bracket screws (Item 1) and shaft

assembly (Item 2) [Figure 70-80-10].

Installation: Tighten the screws to 9,8 - 11,3 N•m (7 - 8

ft-lb) torque.
1
Remove the pushrods (Item 3) [Figure 70-80-10].

Remove the intake and exhaust manifolds.

P-62177 Figure 70-80-11

Remove the breather hose (Item 1) [Figure 70-80-9].

Remove the bolts (Item 2) from the valve cover (Item 3) 1

[Figure 70-80-9] and remove the valve cover and gasket. 2

Installation: Tighten bolts to 6,8 - 11,3 N•m (5.1 - 8.3 ft-

lb) torque. Gradually tighten center bolts before the end
bolts to avoid cracking valve cover.

P-62174

Remove the water return hose clamps (Item 1) and water

return hose (Item 2) [Figure 70-80-11].

70-80-4 MT85 Service Manual

CYLINDER HEAD (CONT’D) Figure 70-80-14

Cylinder Head Removal And Installation (Cont'd)

Figure 70-80-12

1
B-3643B

Remove the four mounting bolts at the coolant housing

B-14490 (Item 1) [Figure 70-80-14].

Remove the coolant housing from the head.

Remove the cylinder head bolts in order of #14 to #1
[Figure 70-80-12].

Installation: Put oil on the bolt threads. Tighten the bolts

in the sequence of #1 to #14 to 37,3 - 42,2 N•m (27.5 -
31.1 ft-lb) torque.

NOTE: Re-tighten the cylinder head bolts in the

correct sequence after the engine has been
run for 30 minutes.

Figure 70-80-13

1
P-62175

Remove the cylinder head from the engine block.

Installation: Always use a new head gasket and new O-

ring. Make sure the O-ring (Item 1) [Figure 70-80-13] is
seated over the dowel.

70-80-5 MT85 Service Manual

CYLINDER HEAD (CONT’D) Cylinder Head - Servicing

Cylinder Head Disassembly And Assembly Figure 70-80-17

Figure 70-80-15

2
1

3 2

5
A-2735

4 B-14418
Clean the surface of the cylinder head.

Use a valve spring compressor to compress the valve Put a straight edge (Item 1) [Figure 70-80-17] on the
spring (Item 1) [Figure 70-80-15]. cylinder head.

Figure 70-80-16 NOTE: Do not put the straight edge across

combustion chambers.

Put a feeler gauge (Item 2) [Figure 70-80-17] between

the straight edge and the surface of the cylinder head.
2
Figure 70-80-18

A F
1 2 E
3 4 6
5
C
B-4122 D

Remove the valve cap (Item 1) [Figure 70-80-16] and B

valve spring collet (Item 2) [Figure 70-80-15] and
[Figure 70-80-16].
PI-9988
Remove the valve spring retainer (Item 3) and the spring
(Item 4) [Figure 70-80-15] and [Figure 70-80-16].
Put the straight edge on the cylinder head's four sides
Remove the valve (Item 5) [Figure 70-80-15] and and two diagonal as shown in figure [Figure 70-80-18].
[Figure 70-80-16].
The maximum distortion of the head surface ± 0,05 mm
Remove the seal (Item 6) [Figure 70-80-16]. (± 0.002 in). If the measurement exceeds the
specification, replace the cylinder head.

70-80-6 MT85 Service Manual

CYLINDER HEAD (CONT’D) Valve Guide - Checking

Cylinder Head Top Clearance Figure 70-80-20

Figure 70-80-19

1
3
B-3634

PI-9989
Remove the valve and spring from the cylinder head.(See
Cylinder Head Disassembly And Assembly on Page 70-
Install the cylinder head gasket. Put the piston (Item 1) 80-6.)
[Figure 70-80-19] being checked at T.D.C.
Clean the valve seat and combustion chamber.
Put 3 pieces of 1,5 mm (0.06 in) diameter solder (Item 2)
[Figure 70-80-19] on the top piston. Use grease to hold Install the valve into the guide. Measure the valve
them in position. recessing with a depth gauge [Figure 70-80-20].

NOTE: Put the solder in position so they do not touch Figure 70-80-21
the valves.

Turn the piston to bottom dead center. 2

Install the cylinder head and tighten to the correct torque

in the correct sequence. (See Cylinder Head Removal
And Installation on Page 70-80-4.) 1

Turn the crankshaft until the piston exceeds T.D.C.

Remove the cylinder head.

Remove the solder wire (Item 3) [Figure 70-80-19] and

measure it. 1. Cylinder Head
Surface
If the measurement exceeds the specifications, check the 2. Recessing PI-9990
oil clearance of the crank pin journal or the piston pin.

Top Clearance 0,50 - 0,70 mm (0.020 - 0.027 in) If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace
the valve or cylinder head [Figure 70-80-21].

Recessing 0,10 mm (0.004 in)

Allowable Limit (Recessing) 0,3 mm (0.012 in)

70-80-7 MT85 Service Manual

CYLINDER HEAD (CONT’D) Figure 70-80-23
200 mm (7.87 in)
Valve Guide - Checking (Cont'd)
40 mm
20 mm 80 mm (3.15 in) (1.57 in)
Figure 70-80-22 (0.79 in) 9,96-9,98 mm
(0.3921-0.3929 in)

5,5-5,7 mm
(0.2165-0.2244 in)

7 mm 18,0 mm
5,0 mm (1.276 in) (1.71 in)
(0.2 in)

6,0-6,1 mm 15,0 mm 10,6-10,7 mm

(0.236-0.240 in) (0.59 in) (0.417-0.421 in) MC-1364

To remove and replace the valve guide, make the driver

B-14335 tools as shown in figure [Figure 70-80-23].

Figure 70-80-24
Remove the carbon from the valve guide.

Measure the valve stem O.D. [Figure 70-80-22].

Measure the valve guide I.D. [Figure 70-80-22].

Calculate the clearance. If the clearance exceeds the

allowable limit, replace the valve and / or valve guide. 1

Valve Guide I.D 6,01 - 6,025 mm

(0.2367 - 0.2372 in)
2
Valve Stem O.D 5,968 - 5,980 mm
(0.2350 - 0.2354 in)
Clearance Between 0,03 - 0,057 mm
PI-9992
Valve Stem and Guide (0.0012 - 0.0022 in)
Allowable Limit 0,1 mm (0.0039 in)
Press the used valve guide out of the cylinder head using
the special driver tool [Figure 70-80-24]. (See previous
page for tool dimensions.)

Put oil on the outside diameter of the new valve guide.

Press the new valve guide into the cylinder head from the
top side. Use the special driver tools (Items 1 and 2)
[Figure 70-80-24], press the new guide until the tools
contact the cylinder head.

Ream the valve guide to the correct specifications.

70-80-8 MT85 Service Manual

CYLINDER HEAD (CONT’D) Figure 70-80-27
1 2
Reconditioning The Valve And Valve Seat
15°
Figure 70-80-25

2,12 MM (0.0835 IN) PI-9995

Check the seat surface and valve face (Item 1) [Figure

PI-9993 70-80-27].

If the seat surface is too wide, use a 15° cutter (Item 2) to

Grind the valve face to the correct angle using a valve get the correct width (Item 3) [Figure 70-80-27].
refacer [Figure 70-80-25].
Valve Seat Width 2,12 mm (0.0835 in)
Figure 70-80-26 Intake
Exhaust 2,12 mm (0.0835 in)
Valve Seat & Face Angle
Intake 45°
Exhaust 45°

15° 30° (45°)

PI-9994

Grind the valve surface in the cylinder head to the correct

angle [Figure 70-80-26].

70-80-9 MT85 Service Manual

CYLINDER HEAD (CONT’D) Figure 70-80-29

Valve Spring

Figure 70-80-28

A-2759

Put the spring on a tester and compress to specified

B-3680 length [Figure 70-80-29].

Read the compressed load on the gauge. If the

Measure the length of the valve spring. If the measurement exceeds allowable limit, replace the spring.
measurement is less than the allowable limit, replace the
spring [Figure 70-80-28]. Setting Length 27 mm (1.06 in)
Setting Load 65 N (15 lb)
Free Length 31,3 - 31,8 mm (1.24 - 1.25 in)
Allowable Limit (setting load) 55 N (12 lb)
Allowable Limit 28,4 mm (1.12 in)
Allowable Limit (setting length) 27 mm (1.06 in)
Put the spring on a flat surface, place a square on the
side of the spring [Figure 70-80-28].

Rotate the spring and measure the maximum tilt. If the

measurement is in excess of the allowable limit, replace
the spring.

Tilt 1,2 mm (0.047 in)

70-80-10 MT85 Service Manual

CYLINDER HEAD (CONT’D) Rocker Arm And Shaft - Checking

Valve Tappets Figure 70-80-32

Figure 70-80-30

1
2

B-3697

P-47267
Measure the rocker arm I.D. (Item 1) [Figure 70-80-32]
with an inside micrometer.
Remove the valve tappets (Item 1) [Figure 70-80-30].
Measure the rocker shaft O.D. (Item 2) [Figure 70-80-32]
Figure 70-80-31 with an outside micrometer.

If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the

bushing.

If the clearance still exceeds the allowable limit after the

bushing is replaced, replace the rocker arm shaft.

Oil Clearance Between 0,016 - 0,045 mm

Rocker Arm & Shaft (0.00063 - 0.0017 in)
Allowable Limit 0,15 mm (0.0059 in)
Rocker Arm 10,47 - 10,48 mm
Shaft O.D. (0.4123 - 0.4128 in)
Rocker Arm I.D. 10,5 - 10,52 mm
P-47268 (0.4134 - 0.4141 in)

Measure the O.D. of the tappet [Figure 70-80-31].

Measure the ID of the tappet bore [Figure 70-80-31].

If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the

tappets.

Tappet OD 17,966 - 17,984 mm

(0.70733 - 0.70803 in)
Tappet Bore ID 18 - 18,018 mm
(0.70867 - 0.70937 in)
Clearance Between Tappet
and Tappet 0,016 - 0,052 mm
Bore (0.00063 - 0.0020 in)
Allowable limit 0,07 mm (0.0039 in)

70-80-11 MT85 Service Manual

70-80-12 MT85 Service Manual
CRANKSHAFT AND PISTONS Figure 70-90-2

Piston And Connecting Rod Removal And 2

Installation 1

Remove the cylinder head. (See Cylinder Head Removal

And Installation on Page 70-80-4.)

Figure 70-90-1

P-62187

Installation: Check O-ring (Item 1) on strainer and use

hole 3 (Item 2) [Figure 70-90-2] when installing strainer.

Turn the flywheel and put a pair of connecting rods at

bottom dead center.
P-62179
Remove the connecting rod bolts.

Remove the top edge from the cylinder bore with a ridge Installation: Tighten the connecting rod bolts to 27 - 30
reamer. N•m (20 - 23 ft-lb) torque.

Remove the oil pan. Figure 70-90-3

Remove the oil pump strainer (Item 1) [Figure 70-90-1].

PI-10013

Remove the rod cap and bearing [Figure 70-90-3].

Use a hammer handle to push the piston connecting rod

assembly out of the cylinder bore [Figure 70-90-3].

NOTE: Make sure the pistons are marked so they will

be returned to the same cylinder bore.

70-90-1 MT85 Service Manual

CRANKSHAFT AND PISTONS (CONT’D) Figure 70-90-5

Piston And Connecting Rod Removal And 7

Installation (Cont’d)
6
Figure 70-90-4 4
3
2
1 5
828

4
1 P-62186
828

Remove the first compression ring (Item 1) [Figure 70-

90-5].
A-2903
Remove the second compression ring (Item 2) [Figure
70-90-5].
Installation: Make sure the marks (Item 1) on the
connecting rod and bearing are aligned when installing Remove the oil ring (Item 3) [Figure 70-90-5].
the bearing cap [Figure 70-90-4].
Remove the snap ring (Item 4) and piston pin (Item 5)
Repeat the procedure to remove the other piston / [Figure 70-90-5].
connecting rod assemblies from the engine block.
Separate the piston (Item 6) from the connecting rod
(Item 7) [Figure 70-90-5].

NOTE: Make sure the piston and rod assembly is

marked so as not to change the piston rod
assembly with another piston or connecting
rod.

70-90-2 MT85 Service Manual

CRANKSHAFT AND PISTONS (CONT’D) Figure 70-90-8

Piston And Connecting Rod Removal And 4

3
Installation (Cont’d)

Figure 70-90-6

1
2

1
5
2
PI-10014

Installation: When reassembling, align the marks (Item

1) on the connecting rod and piston (Item 2). Heat the
P-62183 piston in oil to 80°C (176°F) for 10 - 15 minutes and tap
the piston pin into position. Place the piston ring gaps
every 120° (Items 3, 4 and 5) [Figure 70-90-8] with no
Installation: When installing the oil ring, place the gap facing the piston pin in the cylinder.
expander joint gap (Item 1) 180° from the oil ring gap
(Item 2) [Figure 70-90-6].

Figure 70-90-7

3
PI-10015

Installation: When installing new rings, assemble the

ring so the mark (Item 1) near the gap faces the top of the
piston. When installing the oil ring, place the expander
joint gap (Item 2) 180° from the oil ring gap (Item 3)
[Figure 70-90-7].

70-90-3 MT85 Service Manual

CRANKSHAFT AND PISTONS (CONT’D) Calculate the oil clearance. If the clearance exceeds the
allowable limit, replace the bushing. If it still exceeds the
Piston And Connecting Rod - Servicing specifications, replace the piston pin.

Figure 70-90-9 Piston Pin O.D. 20,002 - 20,011 mm

(0.7875 - 0.7878 in)
Bushing I.D. 20,025 - 20,040 mm
(0.7884 - 0.7890 in )
Oil Clearance between Piston 0,014 - 0,038 mm
Pin & Bushing (0.0006 - 0.0015 in)
Allowable Limit 0,10 mm (0.004 in)

Figure 70-90-11
20 mm (0.79 in)

145 mm (5.7 in)

25 mm
A-2733
(0.98 in) 25 mm
(0.98 in)
Measure the I.D. of the piston pin bore in both horizontal
and vertical direction [Figure 70-90-9].

If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace 21,9-21,96 mm

the piston. (0.8622-0.8642 in) 19,9-19,95 mm
(0.7835-0.7854 in)
Piston Pin Bore I.D. 20,000 - 20,013 mm
MC-1366
(0.7874 - 0.7879 in )
Allowable Limit 20,05 mm (0.789 in)
To replace the connecting rod small end bushing, make a
Figure 70-90-10 driver tool as shown in figure [Figure 70-90-11].

Figure 70-90-12

B-3633
Removal Installation
PI-10016
Measure the O.D. of the piston pin (Item 1) [Figure 70-
90-10].
Use a press and special driver tool to remove the small
Measure the I.D. of the connecting rod small end (Item 2) end bushing [Figure 70-90-12].
[Figure 70-90-10].
Installation: Clean the small end bushing and bore. Put
oil on the bushing and press into the connecting rod until
it is flush [Figure 70-90-12].

70-90-4 MT85 Service Manual

CRANKSHAFT AND PISTONS (CONT’D) Figure 70-90-14

Piston And Connecting Rod - Servicing (Cont’d)

Figure 70-90-13

B-14475

Remove the carbon from the ring grooves. Measure the

B-3622 clearance between the ring and groove with a feeler
gauge [Figure 70-90-14].

Install a new piston ring into the lower part of the cylinder If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the
bore. Measure the ring gap with a feeler gauge [Figure piston.
70-90-13].
Kubota D902-E2B
If the gap exceeds the allowable limit, replace the ring.
Second ring 0,09 - 0,12 mm
Kubota D902-E2B (0.0035 - 0.0047 in)
Oil ring 0,04 - 0,08 mm
Top Compression Ring & Oil 0,20 - 0,35 mm
(0.0016 - 0.0031 in)
Ring (0.0079 - 0.013 in)
Allowable limit second ring 0,15 mm (0.0059 in)
Second Compression Ring 0,35 - 0,50 mm
(0.014 - 0.019 in) Allowable limit oil ring 0,15 mm (0.0059 in)
Allowable Limit 1,25 mm (0.0492 in)

70-90-5 MT85 Service Manual

CRANKSHAFT AND PISTONS (CONT’D) Figure 70-90-16

Cylinder Bore - Checking

Figure 70-90-15

A-2717

To find the maximum wear check the inside diameter in

B-10073 six different locations [Figure 70-90-16].

When the cylinder bore is not within specifications, bore

Check the inside diameter of the cylinder bore [Figure the cylinder for an oversize piston.
70-90-15].
Kubota D902-E2B

Cylinder Bore I.D 72,0 - 72,02 mm (2.8347 - 2.8353 in)

Allowable Limit 72,169 mm (2.8406 in)

NOTE: Make sure you use the correct size pistons

and rings.

70-90-6 MT85 Service Manual

CRANKSHAFT AND PISTONS (CONT’D) Crankshaft Gear Removal And Installation

Connecting Rod Alignment Figure 70-90-18

Figure 70-90-17

B-3686

B-4067
Remove the timing gearcase cover. (See Timing
Gearcase Cover Removal And Installation on Page 70-
NOTE: The small end bushing is the basis of this 100-1.)
check, check the bushing for wear before
doing this check. Remove the idler gear. (See Idler Gear And Shaft
Removal And Installation on Page 70-100-3.)
Install the piston pin into the connecting rod.
Remove the crankshaft gear with a puller [Figure 70-90-
Install the connecting rod on an alignment tool. 18].

Put the gauge over the piston pin and move it against the Remove the crankshaft key.
face plate.

If the gauge does not fit squarely against the face place,
measure the space between the gauge and face plate
[Figure 70-90-17].

If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace

the connecting rod.

Rod Alignment Allowable Limit 0,05 mm (0.002 in)

70-90-7 MT85 Service Manual

CRANKSHAFT AND PISTONS (CONT’D) Figure 70-90-20

Crankshaft And Bearings Removal And Installation

Figure 70-90-19 3
2
3
1

4
2
P-62185

Installation: When installing the cover (Item 4) [Figure

P-62178 70-90-20], make sure the casting mark (Item 3) [Figure
70-90-19] is in the up position. Lightly oil inside lip of oil
seal (Item 3) [Figure 70-90-20].
Remove the piston and connecting rod assemblies. (See
Piston And Connecting Rod Removal And Installation on Figure 70-90-21
Page 70-90-1.)
3
Remove the engine flywheel. (See Flywheel Removal
And Installation on Page 70-120-1.)

Remove the inside bolts (Item 1) which fasten the bearing

case cover to the block first. Then remove the outer bolts
(Item 2) [Figure 70-90-19] last.

Installation: Tighten the bearing case cover bolts to 10 -

11 N•m (7 - 8 ft-lb) torque.

Install two bolts into the bearing case cover and pull the
cover out [Figure 70-90-19]. 2 1
P-62181

Installation: When installing the bearing case gasket

(Item 1) [Figure 70-90-20] and [Figure 70-90-21], and
the bearing case cover gasket (Item 2) [Figure 70-90-20]
and [Figure 70-90-21] make sure the mark (Item 3)
[Figure 70-90-21] is in the up position.

70-90-8 MT85 Service Manual

CRANKSHAFT AND PISTONS (CONT’D) Figure 70-90-24

Crankshaft And Bearings Removal And Installation

(Cont'd)

Figure 70-90-22

B-14878

Remove the crankshaft / main bearing assembly from the

engine block [Figure 70-90-24].
B-9565
NOTE: The crankshaft may have to be rotated a
couple of different times for the crankshaft
Before removing the crankshaft / main bearings, check assembly to clear the holes in the engine
the end play. Install a dial indicator. Measure the end play crankcase.
by moving the crankshaft back and forth [Figure 70-90-
22]. Mark the bearing case halves for correct installation.

If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace

the thrust bearings.

End Play 0,15 - 0,31 mm (0.006 - 0.012 in)

Allowable Limit 0,5 mm (0.020 in)

Figure 70-90-23

P-62180

Remove the main bearing case bolts (Item 1) [Figure 70-

90-23].

Installation: Align the bearing case hole with the hole in

the block. Put oil on the bolt threads and tighten to 27 -
30 N•m (20 - 22 ft-lb) torque.

70-90-9 MT85 Service Manual

CRANKSHAFT AND PISTONS (CONT’D) Figure 70-90-26

Crankshaft And Bearings Removal And Installation

1
(Cont'd)

Figure 70-90-25

3
P-62182

Installation: Tighten the bearing case bolts (Item 1)

[Figure 70-90-26] to 13 - 16 N•m (9 - 12 ft-lb) torque.
B-4092
Installation: When installing the main bearing case
assemblies, face the mark FLYWHEEL to the flywheel
Remove the two bearing case bolts [Figure 70-90-25]. side of the engine block [Figure 70-90-26]. Be sure the
thrust washer with its oil grooves face outward.
Remove the bearing case and bearing.
Identification marks on the main bearing case
assemblies are the alignment number (Item 2) and the
marking “1” or “2” (Item 3) [Figure 70-90-26] can be
found on the main bearing case assemblies to ensure
proper assembly.

70-90-10 MT85 Service Manual

CRANKSHAFT AND PISTONS (CONT’D) Figure 70-90-29

Crankshaft And Bearings - Servicing

Figure 70-90-27

A-2716

Measure the crankpin O.D. [Figure 70-90-29].

A-2763
Calculate the oil clearance.

Put the crankshaft on V-blocks. Install a dial indicator on Crankpin 33,99 - 34,01 mm (1.3384 - 1.3389 in )
the center journal [Figure 70-90-27]. Bearing I.D.

Turn the crankshaft at a slow rate. Crankpin O.D. 33,96 - 33,98 mm (1.3370 - 1.3375 in )
Oil Clearance 0,020 - 0,051 mm (0.0008 - 0.0020 in )
If the misalignment exceeds the allowable limit, replace Allowable limit 0,15 mm (0.0059 in)
the crankshaft.
Figure 70-90-30
Alignment 0,02 mm (0.0008 in)

Figure 70-90-28

120°
1

PI-10024

A-2727

Tighten the connecting rod cap bolts 27 - 30 N•m (20 - 22

ft-lb) torque.

Measure the crankpin bearing I.D. [Figure 70-90-28].

70-90-11 MT85 Service Manual

CRANKSHAFT AND PISTONS (CONT’D) Kubota D902-E2B

Crankshaft And Bearings - Servicing (Cont'd) Crankshaft Journal #1 O.D. 43,93 - 43,95 mm
(Water Pump side) (1.7297 - 1.7303 in)
Figure 70-90-31
Bearing I.D. 43,98 - 44,04 mm
130 mm (1.7317 - 1.7338 in)
(5.12 in) Oil Clearance 0,03 - 0,11 mm
(0.0013 - 0.0042 in)
Allowable Limit 0,20 mm (0.008 in)
20 mm 43,90-43,95 mm Crankshaft Journal #2 O.D. 43,93 - 43,95 mm
(79 in) (1.7283-1.7303 in) (Flywheel Side) (1.7297 - 1.7303 in)
Bearing I.D. 43,98 - 43,99 mm
(1.7315 - 1.7320 in)

68 mm Oil Clearance 0,028 - 0,059 mm

24 mm
(2.68 in) (0.0011 - 0.0023 in)
(0.95 in)
9 mm Allowable Limit 0,2 mm (0.008 in)
(0.35 in) B-14879 Crankshaft Journal #3 O.D. 43,93 - 43,95 mm
(Intermediate) (1.7297 - 1.7303 in)
Remove the bearing (Item 1) [Figure 70-90-30] from the
Bearing I.D. 43,98 - 43,99 mm
front of the engine block (water pump side) with the
(1.7315 - 1.7320 in)
removal tool shown in [Figure 70-90-31].
Oil Clearance 0,028 - 0,059 mm
Installation: Clean the new bearing and bore and apply (0.0011 - 0.0023 in)
oil to them. Install the new bearing with the installation Allowable Limit 0,2 mm (0.008 in)
driver tool [Figure 70-90-30].

Figure 70-90-32

PI-10025

Clean the crankshaft journal and bearing. Put a strip of

press gauge on the center journal.

Install the main bearing case halves and tighten the bolts.
Remove the bearing case halves.

Measure the flattened press gauge [Figure 70-90-32].

If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the

crankshaft bearing.

NOTE: Make sure you use the correct size bearing

when installing. Oversize bearings are
generally marked.

70-90-12 MT85 Service Manual

CAMSHAFT AND TIMING GEARS Figure 70-100-3

Timing Gearcase Cover Removal And Installation

Figure 70-100-1
1
1

B-14870
1

Remove the bolt (Item 1) and disconnect the shaft spring

B-14868 (Item 2) [Figure 70-100-3].

Figure 70-100-4
Remove the fuel injection pump. (See Fuel Injection
Pump Removal And Installation on Page 70-70-2.)

Remove the screws (Item 1) from the speed control plate

(Item 2) [Figure 70-100-1].

Figure 70-100-2

1
B-14871

Remove the crankshaft pulley bolt.

Installation: Tighten the bolt 98 - 108 N•m (72 - 80 ft-lb)

torque.
B-14869
Use a puller and remove the crankshaft pulley [Figure
70-100-4].
Separate the speed control plate from the engine and
remove the spring (Item 1) [Figure 70-100-2].

Remove the speed control plate.

70-100-1 MT85 Service Manual

CAMSHAFT AND TIMING GEARS (CONT’D) Figure 70-100-7

Timing Gearcase Cover Removal And Installation

(Cont'd)

Figure 70-100-5

Oil Seal O-rings

B-3617

Installation: Install three new O-rings and the oil seal

into the timing gear case cover [Figure 70-100-7].
B-14872

When installing the crank shaft pulley, make sure to align

the marks [Figure 70-100-5].

Figure 70-100-6

B-14873

Remove the timing gear case cover bolts.

Installation: Tighten the bolts to 10 - 11 N•m (7 - 8 ft-lb)

torque.

Remove the timing gear case [Figure 70-100-6].

70-100-2 MT85 Service Manual

CAMSHAFT AND TIMING GEARS (CONT’D) Idler Gear And Shaft Removal And Installation

Timing Gears Backlash - Checking Figure 70-100-9

Figure 70-100-8

1
3
2

B-14341

PI-10005
Remove the snap ring (Item 1) and collar (Item 2) from
the idler gear shaft (Item 3) [Figure 70-100-9].
When the gears are installed, check the backlash as
follows: Figure 70-100-10

Install a dial indicator [Figure 70-100-8].

Hold one gear while turning the other gear [Figure 70-
100-8].
1
If the backlash exceeds the allowable limit, check the oil
clearance of the shaft and gear. If the oil clearance is
correct, replace the gear.

Crank Gear & Idler 0,043 - 0,124 mm

Gear (0.0017 - 0.0049 in) 2
Allowable Limit 0,15 mm (0.006 in)
Cam Gear & Idler (0,047 - 0,123 mm
B-3699
Gear (0.0018 - 0.0048 in)
Allowable Limit 0,15 mm (0.006 in)
Remove the idler gear (Item 1) [Figure 70-100-10].
Injection Pump Gear 0,046 - 0,124 mm
& Idler Gear (0.0018 - 0.0048 in)
Remove idler gear mounting screws (Item 2) [Figure 70-
Allowable Limit 0,15 mm (0.006 in) 100-10].
Oil Pump Gear & 0,041 - 0,123 mm
Crankshaft Gear (0.0016 - 0.0048 in) Installation: Tighten screws to 9,8 - 11,3 N•m (7.2 - 8.3
ft-lb) torque.
Allowable Limit 0,15 mm (0.006 in)

70-100-3 MT85 Service Manual

CAMSHAFT AND TIMING GEARS (CONT’D) Camshaft - Servicing

Idler Gear And Shaft Removal And Installation Remove the timing gearcase cover. (See Timing
(Cont’d) Gearcase Cover Removal And Installation on Page 70-
100-1.)
Figure 70-100-11
Remove the cylinder head. (See Cylinder Head Removal
And Installation on Page 70-80-4.)

Figure 70-100-12

B-14874

Installation: Make sure the timing marks are aligned

when installing the timing gears [Figure 70-100-11].
B-3655

Align the holes on the camshaft gear with the camshaft

retainer plate bolts. Remove the camshaft from the engine block [Figure 70-
100-12].
Remove the bolts.
Installation: Tighten the camshaft retainer bolts to 18 -
21 N•m (14 - 15 ft-lb) torque.

Figure 70-100-13

B-3620

Measure the camshaft bearing in the engine block

[Figure 70-100-13].

70-100-4 MT85 Service Manual

CAMSHAFT AND TIMING GEARS (CONT’D) If the measurement is less than the allowable limit,
replace the camshaft.
Camshaft - Servicing
Cam Lobe Height 26,88 mm (1.058 in)
Figure 70-100-14
Allowable Limit 26,83 mm (1.056 in)

Figure 70-100-16

A-2761

Measure the camshaft journal [Figure 70-100-14]. A-2760

Calculate the oil clearance. If the clearance exceeds the

allowable limit, replace the camshaft. Put the camshaft in V-blocks. Install a dial indicator
[Figure 70-100-16].
Bearing I.D. 33,0 - 33,03 mm (1.299 - 1.300 in)
Turn the camshaft at a slow rate. If the misalignment
Journal O.D. 32,93 - 32,95 mm exceeds the allowable limit, replace the camshaft.
(1.2967 - 1.2972 in)
Clearance of 0,05 - 0,09 mm Camshaft Alignment 0,01 mm (0.0004 in)
Camshaft (0.002 - 0.0035 in) Allowable Limit
Journal
Allowable Limit 0,15 mm (0.006 in)

Figure 70-100-15

B-5001

Measure the cam lobes at their highest point [Figure 70-

100-15].

70-100-5 MT85 Service Manual

CAMSHAFT AND TIMING GEARS (CONT’D) Figure 70-100-18

Idler Gear And Shaft Servicing

20 mm (0.79 in)
Figure 70-100-17
150 mm (5.91 in)
25 mm
(0.98 in) 30 mm
(1.18 in)

21,9-21,95 mm
(0.862-0.864 in) 19,9-19,95 mm
(0.784-0.785 in)
MC-1366

To replace the idler gear bushing, make a driver tool as

PI-10003 shown in figure [Figure 70-100-18].

Figure 70-100-19
Measure the O.D. of the idler gear shaft [Figure 70-100-
17].

Measure the I.D. of the idler gear bushing [Figure 70-

100-17].

If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the

bushing.

Idler Gear Shaft O.D 19,97 - 19,98 mm

(0.7861 - 0.7866 in)
Idler Gear Bushing I.D 20,00 - 20,05 mm
(0.7874 - 0.7894 in )
Oil Clearance between idler 0,020 - 0,084 mm
PI-10004
shaft & Gear Bushing (0.0008 - 0.0033 in)
Allowable Limit 0,1 mm (0.004 in)
Use a press and special driver tool, to remove the old
bushing and install the new bushing [Figure 70-100-19].

70-100-6 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC GEAR PUMP MOUNTING BRACKET Figure 70-110-2

Removal And Installation

Remove the Battery. (See Removal And Installation on

Page 60-20-1.)

Remove the Hydraulic Gear Pump. (See Removal And

Installation on Page 20-60-3.) 2 2

Remove the Hydraulic Reservoir. (See Removal And 1 1

Installation on Page 20-80-1.)

NOTE: The engine is removed for visual clarity only.

Figure 70-110-1 P-51276

1
Installation: There are alignment studs (Item 1), on the
hydraulic gear pump mount, that fit into holes (Item 2)
[Figure 70-110-2], in the engine mounting bracket.
1
1 Reverse the removal procedure to install the hydraulic
gear pump mounting bracket.

P-51274

Remove the four bolts (Item 1) [Figure 70-110-1] from

the hydraulic gear pump mounting bracket.

Remove the hydraulic gear pump mounting bracket.

70-110-1 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC GEAR PUMP MOUNTING BRACKET
(CONT’D)

Hydraulic Gear Pump Coupler Removal And

Installation

NOTE: The engine is removed for visual clarity only.

Figure 70-110-3

1
2

P-51276

Remove the three bolts (Item 1) holding the hydraulic

gear pump coupler (Item 2) [Figure 70-110-3] to the
flywheel.

Installation: Apply medium strength threadlocker to bolts

and tighten the bolts to 40 - 50 N•m (29 - 37 ft-lb) torque.
Apply anti-seize to the splines on the hydraulic gear
pump coupler.

Remove the hydraulic gear pump coupler.

Reverse the removal procedure to install the hydraulic

gear pump coupler.

70-110-2 MT85 Service Manual

FLYWHEEL AND ENGINE MOUNTING BRACKET Figure 70-120-2

Flywheel Removal And Installation

Remove the Hydraulic Gear Pump. (See Removal And

Installation on Page 20-60-3.)

Remove the Hydraulic Gear Pump Mounting Bracket.

(See Removal And Installation on Page 70-110-1.) 2

Remove the Hydraulic Gear Pump Coupler. (See

Hydraulic Gear Pump Coupler Removal And Installation
on Page 70-110-2.)
1
NOTE: The engine is removed for visual clarity only.
P-51278
Figure 70-120-1

The ring gear (Item 1) is installed on the flywheel (Item 2)

[Figure 70-120-2] with an interference fit. Heat the ring
gear enough to expand it. Then hit it evenly with a
hammer to remove it.

1 Clean the ring gear mounting surface of the flywheel to

1 give a smooth fit.

Clean the new ring gear and heat it to a temperature of

232 - 260°C (450 - 500°F).

Fit the ring gear over the flywheel. Make sure the gear is
fully seated [Figure 70-120-2].
P-51275

Remove the five flywheel bolts (Item 1) [Figure 70-120-

1] from the crankshaft.

Installation: Tighten the bolts to 54 - 60 N•m (40 - 44 ft-

lb) torque.

Remove the flywheel.

Reverse the removal procedure to install the flywheel.

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Wear safety glasses to prevent eye injury when any
of the following conditions exist:
• When fluids are under pressure.
• Flying debris or loose material is present.
• Engine is running.
• Tools are being used.
W-2019-0907

Ring Gear Removal And Installation

70-120-1 MT85 Service Manual

FLYWHEEL AND ENGINE MOUNTING BRACKET
(CONT’D)

Engine Mounting Bracket Removal And Installation

Remove the Hydraulic Gear Pump. (See Removal And

Installation on Page 20-60-3.)

Remove the Engine. (See Engine Removal And

Installation on Page 70-10-9.)

Remove the Hydraulic Gear Pump Mounting Bracket.

(See Removal And Installation on Page 70-110-1.)

Remove the Hydraulic Gear Pump Coupler. (See

Hydraulic Gear Pump Coupler Removal And Installation
on Page 70-110-2.)

Remove the Flywheel. (See Flywheel Removal And

Installation on Page 70-120-1.)

Figure 70-120-3

1 3

1
3 3

P-51281

Remove the two bolts (Item 1) holding timing plate (Item

2) [Figure 70-120-3] to engine mounting bracket.

Remove the six bolts (Item 3) [Figure 70-120-3] holding

engine mounting bracket to the engine block.

Installation: Tighten the bolts to 24 - 26 N•m (18 - 19 ft-

lb) torque.

Remove the engine mounting bracket.

Reverse the removal procedure to install the engine

mounting bracket.

70-120-2 MT85 Service Manual

 SPECIFICATIONS

(MT85) MINI TRACK LOADER SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-10-1

Dimensions (Narrow Track) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-10-1
Dimensions (Wide Track) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-10-2
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-10-3
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-10-3
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-10-3
Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-10-4
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-10-4
Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-10-4
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-10-4
Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-10-5
Ground Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-10-5

(MT85) TECHNICAL SERVICE GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-20-1

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-20-1
Engine Torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-20-1
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-20-1
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-20-1
Loader Torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-20-2
Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-20-2
Fuel Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-20-2

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS FOR BOLTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-30-1

Torque For General SAE Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-30-1
Torque For General Metric Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-30-2

HYDRAULIC CONNECTION SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-40-1

O-ring Face Seal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-40-1
Straight Thread O-ring Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-40-2
Tubelines And Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-40-2
Flare Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-40-2
Port Seal Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-40-3

HYDRAULIC FLUID SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-50-1

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-50-1

CONVERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-60-1
Decimal And Millimeter Equivalent Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-60-1
U.S. To Metric Conversion Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-60-1

SERVICE TOOLS REQUIRED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-70-1

Hydraulic Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-70-1
Engine Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-70-2

Certain specification(s) are based on engineering calculations and are not actual measurements. Specification(s)
are provided for comparison purposes only and are subject to change without notice. Specification(s) for your
individual Bobcat equipment will vary based on normal variations in design, manufacturing, operating conditions,
and other factors.

SPEC-01 MT85 Service Manual

SPEC-02 MT85 Service Manual
(MT85) MINI TRACK LOADER SPECIFICATIONS

Dimensions (Narrow Track)

• Dimensions are given for mini track loader equipped with standard tracks and dirt bucket and may vary with other
bucket types.
• Where applicable, specifications conform to SAE or ISO standards and are subject to change without notice.

83° 2677 mm
(105.4) in

2057 mm
(81.0 in)

45°
511 mm
(20.1) in

1510 mm
(59.5) in
1387 mm
(54.6) in
131 mm
(5.2) in

23°
24°

205 mm 171 mm 1033 mm

(8.1) in (6.7) in (40.7) in 2.1 mm
(0.8) in
2145 mm
(84.5) in
2698 mm
(106.2) in
1455 mm
1324 mm (57.3) in
(52.1) in

904 mm
(35.6) in
914 mm
800 mm (36.0) in
(31.5) in

NA9845
Changes of structure or weight distribution of the loader can cause changes in control and steering response and can cause failure of the
loader parts.

SPEC-10-1 MT85 Service Manual

(MT85) MINI TRACK LOADER SPECIFICATIONS (CONT’D)

Dimensions (Wide Track)

• Dimensions are given for mini track loader equipped with wide tracks and dirt bucket and may vary with other bucket
types.
• Where applicable, specifications conform to SAE or ISO standards and are subject to change without notice.

83° 2677 mm
(105.4) in

2057 mm
(81.0 in)

45°
511 mm
(20.1) in

1510 mm
1387 mm (59.5) in
(54.6) in
131 mm
(5.2) in

23°
24°

171 mm 1033 mm
205 mm (40.7) in
(8.1) in (6.7) in
2.1 mm
(0.8) in
2145 mm
(84.5) in
2698 mm
(106.2) in

1490 mm
1324 mm (58.7) in
(52.1) in

1045 mm
(41.1) in
1118 mm
800 mm (44.0) in
(31.5) in

NA9846
Changes of structure or weight distribution of the loader can cause changes in control and steering response and can cause failure of the
loader parts.

SPEC-10-2 MT85 Service Manual

(MT85) MINI TRACK LOADER SPECIFICATIONS (CONT’D)

Performance
With Standard Narrow Tracks and Bucket With Optional Wide Tracks and Bucket
Rated Operating Capacity 385 kg (850 lb) 385 kg (850 lb)
Tipping Load 1102 kg (2429 lb) 1102 kg (2429 lb)
Operating Weight 1407 kg (3103 lb) 1489 kg (3282 lb)
Breakout Force - Lift 10440 N (2347 lbf) 10756 N (2418 lbf)
Breakout Force - Tilt 9657 N (2171 lbf) 10351 N (2327 lbf)
Travel Speed
Forward 0 - 6,4 km/h (0 - 4.0 mph) 0 - 6,4 km/h (0 - 4.0 mph)
Reverse 0 - 4,7 km/h (0 - 2.9 mph) 0 - 4,7 km/h (0 - 2.9 mph)
Controls

Machine Steering Direction and speed controlled by one multifunction handle

Mini Track Loader Hydraulics
- Lift and Tilt Controlled by joystick
- Front Auxiliary (Std.) Controlled by fore and aft movement of hand lever
Auxiliary Pressure Release Controlled by fore and aft movement of hand lever
Engine Hand lever speed control; key-type starter switch
Service Brake Two independent hydrostatic circuits controlled by one multifunction handle
Secondary Brake One of the hydrostatic transmissions
Parking Brake (Std.) Hand lever operation
Engine

Make / Model
- B3TR11001 & Above Kubota D902-E4B-BC-1

Fuel / Cooling Diesel (Low Sulfur) / Liquid

Horsepower
- ISO 9249 EEC / SAE J1349 Net 17,5 kW (23.5 hp) @ 3600 rpm
- ISO 14396 Gross 18,2 kW (24.4 hp) @ 3600 rpm
- SAE J1349 Gross 18,5 kW (24.8 hp) @ 3600 rpm
Torque
- ISO 9249 EEC / SAE J1349 Net 54,2 N•m (39.9 ft-lb) @ 2600 rpm
- SAE J1349 Gross 56,1 N•m (41.4 ft-lb) @ 2600 rpm
Number of Cylinders 3
Displacement 0,899 L (54.9 in3)
Bore / Stroke 72,0 mm / 73,6 mm (2.83 / 2.90)
Lubrication Gear Pump Pressure System with Filter
Crankcase Ventilation Closed
Air Cleaner Dual dry replaceable paper cartridges
Ignition Diesel-Compression
Low Idle 1025 - 1125 rpm
High Idle 3770 - 3870 rpm
Engine Coolant Propylene Glycol / Water Mixture

SPEC-10-3 MT85 Service Manual

(MT85) MINI TRACK LOADER SPECIFICATIONS (CONT’D)

Hydraulic System

Pump Type Engine driven, gear type

Pump Capacity 45,4 L/min (12 U.S. gpm) @ High Idle
System Relief at Quick Couplers 19900 kPa (199 bar) (2900 psi)
Filter (Hydraulic) Full flow replaceable, 10-micron synthetic media element
Hydraulic Cylinders Double-acting; tilt cylinders have cushioning feature on dump and rollback
Bore Diameter: Lift Cylinder (2) 50,8 mm (2.00 in)
Tilt Cylinder (2) 76,2 mm (3.00 in)
Rod Diameter: Lift Cylinder (2) 25,4 mm (1.00 in)
Tilt Cylinder (2) 31,8 mm (1.25 in)
Stroke: Lift Cylinder (2) 482.6 mm (19.00 in)
Tilt Cylinder (1) 268,2 mm (10.56 in)
Control Valve 3-Spool, open center type with float detent on lift
Fluid Type Bobcat Fluid, Hydraulic / Hydrostatic
6903117 - (2.5 U.S. gal container)
6903118 - (5 U.S. gal container)
6903119 - (55 U.S. gal container)
Fluid Lines SAE Standard tubelines, hoses and fittings
Hydraulic Function Time:
Raise Lift Arms 3.2 seconds
Lower Lift Arms 3.1 seconds
Bucket Dump 1.7 seconds
Bucket Rollback 1.5 seconds
Electrical

Starting Aid Glow Plugs

Alternator 12 volt, 40 Amp open frame w/ internal regulator
Battery 12 volt - 540 CCA @ -18°C (0°F)
Starter 12 volt; gear reduction, 2,7 kW (3.62 hp)
Instrumentation Gauges:Hourmeter,FuelLevel,EngineCoolantTemperature, Voltmeter
Warning lights: Engine Oil Pressure, Hydraulic Oil Temperature
Other: Lights, Opt. / Accessory Switches or Indicators
Drive System

Drive System Fully hydrostatic, track drive

Transmission Infinitely variable tandem hydrostatic piston pumps, driving two fully reversing
hydrostatic motors
Capacities

Fuel 26,5 L (7 U.S. gal)

Engine Lubrication and Filter 3,6 L (3.8 qt)
Engine Cooling System 4,73 L (5 qt)
Hydraulic / Hydrostatic Reservoir Only
(Center of Sight Glass) 9,5 L (2.5 U.S. gal)
Hydraulic / Hydrostatic System 20,0 L (5.3 U.S. gal)

SPEC-10-4 MT85 Service Manual

(MT85) MINI TRACK LOADER SPECIFICATIONS (CONT’D)

Tracks

Standard 180 mm (7.1 in) Rubber

Wide (Optional) 250 mm (9.8 in) Rubber

Ground Pressure

Standard Track And 36” Bucket 33,8 kPa (0.338 bar) (4.9 psi)
Wide Track And 44” Bucket 24,1 kPa (0.241 bar) (3.5 psi)

SPEC-10-5 MT85 Service Manual

SPEC-10-6 MT85 Service Manual
(MT85) TECHNICAL SERVICE GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS

Engine

Engine Oil Pressure at Low Idle 0,05 MPa (1 bar) (7 psi)

Engine Oil Pressure at High Idle 0,2 - 0,4 MPa (2 - 6 bar) (28 - 64 psi)
Firing Order 1-2-3
Location of Number 1 Cylinder Closest to water pump
Injection Timing 19° - 21° B.T.D.C.
Location of Timing Mark Flywheel
Injector Nozzle Opening Pressure 13727 - 14707 kPa (137 - 147 bar) (1991 - 2133 psi)
Crankshaft Rotation (Facing Flywheel) Counterclockwise
Compression at Cranking Speed 10% variance between pistons. 3,5 - 4,0 MPa (35 - 40 bar) (512 - 583 psi)
Valve Clearance (Cold) Intake 0,145 - 0,185 (0.0057 - 0.0073)
Valve Clearance (Cold) Exhaust 0,145 - 0,185 (0.0057 - 0.0073)

NOTE: For additional engine specifications, (See Specifications (Kubota D902-EB) on Page 70-10-2.)

Engine Torques

Engine Oil Drain Cap 54,2 N•m (40 ft-lb)

Fuel Injection Tubeline Nuts 15 - 26 N•m (11 - 19 ft-lb)
Fuel Injector Nozzle 49 - 68 N•m (37 - 50 ft-lb)
Injection Pump Mounting Bolts/Nuts 23 - 27 N•m (17 - 20 ft-lb)
Valve Cover Nuts 6.8 - 11,3 N•m (5.1 - 8.3 ft-lb)
Head Bolts 37,3 - 42,2 N•m (27.5 - 31.1 ft-lb)
Glow Plugs 8 - 14 N•m (6 - 10 ft-lb)

NOTE: For additional engine torques, (See Torque Values on Page 70-10-6.)

Cooling System

Coolant Type and Mix 47% Water and 53% Propylene Glycol
Radiator Cap Pressure 90 kPa (0.9 bar) (13 psi)
Thermostat Fully Open @ 85°C (185°F)

NOTE: For additional cooling system information, (See ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM on Page 70-50-1.)

Electrical

Location of Fuses Under Engine Hood on Right Rear Side of Machine

NOTE: For additional electrical system information, (See ELECTRICAL SYSTEM INFORMATION on Page 60-10-1.)

SPEC-20-1 MT85 Service Manual

(MT85) TECHNICAL SERVICE GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS (CONT’D)

Loader Torques

Bob-Tach Pivot Pin Retainer Bolt 125 - 135 N•m (90 - 100 ft-lb)
Bob-Tach Lever Pivot Bolts 34 - 38 N•m (25 - 28 ft-lb)
CI Interface Pivot Pin Retainer Bolt 125 - 135 N•m (90 - 100 ft-lb)
CI Interface Lever Pivot Bolts 34 - 38 N•m (25 - 28 ft-lb)
Lift Arm Pivot Pin Retainer Bolt 24 - 27 N•m (18 - 20 ft-lb)
Tilt Cylinder Pivot Pin Retainer Bolt 20 - 27 N•m (15 - 20 ft-lb)
Control Valve Mounting Bolts 125 - 135 N•m (90 - 100 ft-lb)
Hydraulic Pump Mounting Bolts 71 - 79 N•m (52.5 - 58.5 ft-lb)
Hydrostatic Motor Mounting Bolts 136 N•m (100 ft-lb)
(Torque w/ Loctite® 242)
Hydrostatic Pump Pulley Nut 47,5 - 54,2 N•m (35 - 40 ft-lb)
Reverse Stop Panel Bracket Bolts 34 - 38 N•m (25 - 28 ft-lb)
(Torque w/ thread locker)
Sprocket Nut (Plus torque required to 373+ N•m (275+ ft-lb)
align slotted nut with shaft cross hole)

NOTE: Additional loader torques can be found in the relevant section of this manual and (See TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS FOR BOLTS on Page SPEC-30-1.)

Hydraulic System

Pump Capacity: 45,4 L/min (12.0 U.S. gpm)

@ 3750 rpm @ 100% efficiency
@ 3600 rpm @ 95.5% efficiency 41,6 L/min (11.0 U.S. gpm)
Charge Pressure (minimum): 586,1 kPa (5,9 bar) (85 psi)
Check Charge Pressure See Loader Service Manual
System Relief at Quick Couplers 20 MPa (200 bar) (2900 psi)
Maximum Cylinder Drift Allowed Without
33 mm (1.3 in)
Bucket in 10 Minutes

NOTE: For additional hydraulic system information, (See HYDRAULIC SYSTEM INFORMATION on Page 20-10-1.),
(See HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM INFORMATION on Page 30-10-1.), and (See CHARGE PRESSURE on Page
30-30-1.)

Fuel Consumption

Engine Load Full - 100% High - 70% Medium - 50% Low - 30%
10,6 L 8,7 L 7,6 L 7,2 L
Fuel Consumption Rate Per Hour
(2.8 U.S. gal) (2.3 U.S. gal) (2.0 U.S. gal) (1.9 U.S. gal)

NOTE: The engine fuel consumption chart is to be used as a guideline only. The actual results may vary.

High - Continuous loading or digging or load / carrying cycles; little idling.

Medium - Average loading or load / carrying cycles; some idling.
Low - Light loading or carrying - not much digging or pushing; considerable idling.

SPEC-20-2 MT85 Service Manual

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS FOR BOLTS

Torque For General SAE Bolts

The following table shows standard torque specifications for bolts with zinc phosphate coating. Bolts purchased from
Bobcat Company that have zinc phosphate coating are specified by the letter H following the part number.

Thread
sae grade 5 sae grade 8
size
N•m 0.250 9,0 - 10,2 12,4 - 13,6
(in-lb) (80 - 90) (110 - 120)
0.3125 20,3 - 22,6 24,2 - 27,1
(180 - 200) (215 - 240)
N•m 0.375 34 - 38 47 - 54
(ft-lb) (25 - 28) (35 - 40)
0.4375 54 - 61 81 - 88
(40 - 45) (60 - 65)
0.500 88 - 95 122 - 136
(65 - 70) (90 - 100)
0.5625 122 - 136 170 - 190
(90 - 100) (125 - 140)
0.625 170 - 190 240 - 260
(125 - 140) (175 - 190)
0.750 300 - 330 410 - 450
(220 - 245) (300 - 330)
0.875 450 - 490 645 - 710
(330 - 360) (475 - 525)
1.000 645 - 710 985 - 1085
(475 - 525) (725 - 800)
1.125 880 - 975 1425 - 1600
(650 - 720) (1050 - 1175)
1.250 1200 - 1360 2000 - 2200
(900 - 1000) (1475 - 1625)
1.375 1630 - 1830 2720 - 2980
(1200 - 1350) (2000 - 2200)
1.500 2040 - 2240 3530 - 3870
(1500 - 1650) (2600 - 2850)
1.625 2720 - 2980 4680 - 5150
(2000 - 2800) (3450 - 3800)
1.750 3390 - 3730 5830 - 6500
(2500 - 2750) (4300 - 4800)
1.875 4270 - 4750 7450 - 8300
(3150 - 3500) (5500 - 6100)
2.000 5150 - 5700 8800 - 9800
(3800 - 4200) (6500 - 7200)

SPEC-30-1 MT85 Service Manual

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS FOR BOLTS (CONT’D)

Torque For General Metric Bolts

THREAD SIZE MATERIAL

(DIA. X PITCH) HEAD MARK 4 HEAD MARK 7 HEAD MARK 10
M 5 x 0.8 4 - 5 N•m
(3 - 4 ft-lb)
M 6 x 1.0 8 - 9 N•m 8 - 12 N•m
(6 - 7 ft-lb) (6 - 9 ft-lb)
M 8 x 1.25 8 - 12 N•m 15 - 22 N•m 24 - 34 N•m
(6 - 9 ft-lb) (11 - 16 ft-lb) (18 - 25 ft-lb)
M 10 x 1.25 18 - 24 N•m 30 - 41 N•m 49 - 68 N•m
(13 - 18 ft-lb) (22 - 30 ft-lb) (36 - 50 ft-lb)
M 12 x 1.25 30 - 41 N•m 54 - 73 N•m 94 - 118 N•m
(22 - 30 ft-lb) (40 - 54 ft-lb) (69 - 87 ft-lb)
M 14 x 1.25 49 - 68 N•m 79 - 108 N•m 157 - 186 N•m
(36 - 50 ft-lb) (58 - 80 ft-lb) (116 - 137 ft-lb)

SPEC-30-2 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC CONNECTION SPECIFICATIONS

O-ring Face Seal Connection

IMPORTANT
When repairing hydrostatic and hydraulic systems,
clean the work area before disassembly and keep all
parts clean. Always use caps and plugs on hoses,
tubelines and ports to keep dirt out. Dirt can quickly
damage the system.
I-2003-0888

Figure SPEC-40-1

B-7575

When the fitting is tightened, you can feel when the fitting
is tight to eliminate leakage caused by under or over
torqued fittings. Use vaseline petroleum jelly to hold the
O-ring in position until the fittings are assembled [Figure
SPEC-40-1].

O-ring Face Seal Tightening Torque

Tubeline x TORQUE
Outside x N•m
Diameter Thread Size (ft-lb)
1/4” 9/16” - 18 18 (13)
3/8” 11/16” - 16 30 (22)
1/2” 13/16” - 16 54 (40)
5/8” 1” - 14 81 (60)
3/4” 1-3/16” - 12 114 (84)
7/8” 1-3/16” - 12 133 (98)
1” 1-7/16” - 12 160 (118)
1-1/4” 1-11/16” - 12 209 (154)
1-1/2” 2” - 12 221 (163)

SPEC-40-1 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC CONNECTION SPECIFICATIONS Flare Fitting
(CONT’D)
Figure SPEC-40-3
Straight Thread O-ring Fitting

Figure SPEC-40-2
1

Nut Nut

Washer
Washer
O-ring

O-ring
TS-1619A

A-1852 Use the following procedure to tighten the flare fitting:

Tighten the nut until it makes contact with the seat. Make
Lubricate the O-ring before installing the fitting. Loosen a mark across the flats of both the male and female parts
the jam nut and install the fitting. Tighten the jam nut until of the connection (Item 1) [Figure SPEC-40-3].
the washer is tight against the surface [Figure SPEC-40-
2]. Use the chart [Figure SPEC-40-4] to find the correct
tightness needed. If the fitting leaks after tightening,
Tubelines And Hoses disconnect it and inspect the seat area for damage.

Replace any tubelines that are bent or flattened. They will Figure SPEC-40-4
restrict flow, which will slow hydraulic action and cause
heat. Flare Fitting Tightening Torque
Tubeline x TORQUE
Replace hoses which show signs of wear, damage or Outside x N•m
weather cracked rubber. Diameter Thread Size (ft-lb)
1/4” 7/16” - 20 18 (13)
Always use two wrenches when loosening and tightening
hose or tubeline fittings. 5/16” 1/2” - 20 23 (17)
3/8” 9/16” - 18 30 (22)
1/2” 3/4” - 16 54 (40)
5/8” 7/8” - 14 81 (60)
3/4” 1-1/16” - 12 114 (84)
7/8” 1-3/16” - 12 133 (98)
1” 1-5/16” - 12 160 (118)
1-1/4” 1-5/8” - 12 209 (154)
1-1/2” 1-7/8” - 12 221 (163)
2” 2-1/2” - 12 342 (252)

SPEC-40-2 MT85 Service Manual

HYDRAULIC CONNECTION SPECIFICATIONS
(CONT’D)

Port Seal Fitting

Figure SPEC-40-5

Nut Seals
To Fitting

Nut Seals
To Port

Secondary O-ring Seal P-13008

The nut is the primary seal, the O-ring is the secondary

seal and helps absorb vibration and pressure pulses at
the connection [Figure SPEC-40-5].

The hex portion of the nut does not contact the surface of
the component when the nut is tight.

Port Seal and O-ring Boss

Tightening Torque
x TORQUE
x N•m
Thread Size (ft-lb)
7/16” - 20 18 (13)
9/16” - 18 30 (22)
3/4” -1 6 54 (40)
7/8” - 14 81 (60)
1-1/16” - 12 114 (84)
1-3/16” - 12 133 (98)
1-5/16” - 12 160 (118)
1-7/16” - 12 209 (154)
1-5/8” - 12 221 (163)

Use the following procedure to tighten the port seal

fitting:

Port seal and nut, washer and O-ring (O-ring Boss)

fittings use the same tightening torque valve chart.

SPEC-40-3 MT85 Service Manual

SPEC-40-4 MT85 Service Manual
HYDRAULIC FLUID SPECIFICATIONS

Specifications
WARNING
HYDRAULIC / HYDROSTATIC FLUID
RECOMMENDED ISO VISCOSITY GRADE (VG)
During cold weather (0°C [32°F] and below), do not
AND VISCOSITY INDEX (VI)
operate machine until the engine has run for at least
5 minutes at less than half throttle. This warm-up
period is necessary for foot pedal operation and safe
stopping. Do not operate controls during warm-up
period.

When temperatures are below -30°C (-20°F), the

hydrostatic oil must be heated or kept warm. The
hydrostatic system will not get enough oil at low
temperatures. Park the machine in an area where the
temperature will be above -18°C (0°F) if possible.
TEMPERATURE RANGE ANTICIPATED W-2027-0311
DURING MACHINE USE
[1] VG 100; Minimum VI 130
[2] VG 46; Minimum VI 150
[3] BOBCAT All-Season Fluid
[4] BOBCAT Synthetic Fluid
[5] BOBCAT Biodegradable Hydraulic / Hydrostatic
Fluid (Unlike biodegradable fluids that are vegetable
based, Bobcat biodegradable fluid is formulated to
prevent oxidation and thermal breakdown at operating
temperatures.)

DO NOT use automatic transmission fluids in the loader

or permanent damage to the transmission will result.

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Diesel fuel or hydraulic fluid under pressure can
penetrate skin or eyes, causing serious injury or
death. Fluid leaks under pressure may not be visible.
Use a piece of cardboard or wood to find leaks. Do
not use your bare hand. Wear safety goggles. If fluid
enters skin or eyes, get immediate medical attention
from a physician familiar with this injury.
W-2072-0807

When temperatures below -18°C (0°F) are common, the

machine must be kept in a warm building. Extra warm-up
time must be used each time the loader is started during
cold temperature conditions. Cold fluid will not flow easily
and it makes action on the hydraulic function slower.

SPEC-50-1 MT85 Service Manual

SPEC-50-2 MT85 Service Manual
CONVERSIONS

Decimal And Millimeter Equivalent Chart

U.S. To Metric Conversion Chart

SPEC-60-1 MT85 Service Manual

SPEC-60-2 MT85 Service Manual
SERVICE TOOLS REQUIRED

The following is a list of service tools required for servicing mini track loaders.

Hydraulic Tools

TOOL PART MODELS

DESCRIPTION COMMENT IMAGE
NUMBER USED ON
MEL1744 Hydraulic Tester MT52 - MT85 Hydraulic testerMEL1744, MEL10003
(Flow Meter) or TWX-RFIK200-S-6 can be used for
hydraulic testing.

MEL10003 Hydraulic Tester MEL10003 and TWX-RFIK200-S-6

(Flow Meter) are no longer available, order
MEL1744.

TWX-RFIK200- Hydraulic Tester

S-6 (Flow Meter)

MEL10006 Hydraulic Test Kit This test kit includes various adapters
and couplers that are used when
testing hydraulic functions. MEL10006
Includes: MEL10006-1 thru
MEL10006-7

MEL1033 Rod Seal Installation

Tool

MEL1074 O-Ring Seal Hook

MEL1396-1 Universal Seal MEL1396 includes: MEL1396-1 and

Expander MEL1396-2

MEL1396-2 Piston Ring

Compressor

MEL1558 Oil Cooler Connector

Tool


See BobcatDealerNET.com for parts ordering information. (For EMEA dealers see the Bobcat Special Tools Catalogue
and Doosan Shop for parts ordering information.)

ST MTL-1216

SPEC-70-1 MT85 Service Manual

SERVICE TOOLS REQUIRED (CONT’D)

Engine Tools

TOOL PART MODELS

DESCRIPTION COMMENT IMAGE
NUMBER USED ON
4200 Injector Nozzle MT52 - MT85
Tester

4201 Injector Nozzle

Tester Adapter Kit

MEL10630 Engine Compression Includes: MEL1352, MEL1433,

Test Kit MEL1489, MEL1546, MEL1551,
MEL1594, MEL1594,
MEL10630-1 - MEL10630-11 and
MEL10630-14
MEL1270 Fuel Line Removal
Tool

MEL1271 Delivery Valve

Removal Tool

MEL1485 Socket (Injector

Nozzle Removal)


See BobcatDealerNET.com for parts ordering information. (For EMEA dealers see the Bobcat Special Tools Catalogue
and Doosan Shop for parts ordering information.)

ST MTL-1216

SPEC-70-2 MT85 Service Manual

 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

(MT85) MINI TRACK LOADER FUEL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70-70-1

SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPEC-10-1 FUEL TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-40-1
(MT85) TECHNICAL SERVICE GUIDE GRAB BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-60-1
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPEC-20-1
HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-70-1
AIR CLEANER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60-1
HYDRAULIC / HYDROSTATIC FILTER 20-70-1
AIR CLEANER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-40-1
HYDRAULIC / HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM
ALTERNATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-30-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-100-1
AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-180-1 HYDRAULIC CONNECTION
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-40-1
BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-20-1
HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE . . . . . .20-50-1
BOB-TACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-110-1
HYDRAULIC FLUID RESERVOIR . . . .20-80-1
BOB-TACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-10-1
HYDRAULIC FLUID SPECIFICATIONS
BOTTOM ACCESS PANEL . . . . . . . . . 50-80-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEC-50-1
CAMSHAFT AND TIMING GEARS . . 70-100-1 HYDRAULIC GEAR PUMP MOUNTING
CHARGE PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-30-1 BRACKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70-110-1
COMMON INDUSTRY INTERFACE (CII) HYDRAULIC PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-60-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-11-1 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM INFORMATION
COMMON INDUSTRY INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-10-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-111-1 HYDROSTATIC CONTROLS . . . . . . . .30-60-1
CONTINOUS FLOW SHUTOFF SYSTEM HYDROSTATIC MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-1
SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-70-1 HYDROSTATIC PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-40-1
CONVERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPEC-60-1 HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM INFORMATION
CRANKSHAFT AND PISTONS . . . . . . 70-90-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-10-1
CYLINDER (LIFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-20-1 INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-50-1
CYLINDER (TILT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-21-1 INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-50-1
CYLINDER HEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80-1 LIFT AND TILT FUNCTION LOCKOUTS
DELIVERY REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-150-1
DRIVE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-50-1 LIFT ARM BYPASS CONTROL . . . . .10-160-1
ELECTRIC COOLING FAN . . . . . . . . . 60-90-1 LIFT ARM SUPPORT DEVICE . . . . . . .10-20-1
ELECTRICAL / HYDRAULIC CONTROLS LIFT ARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-20-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-80-1 LIFTING AND BLOCKING THE MINI LOADER
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10-1
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM INFORMATION
LUBRICATING THE MINI LOADER
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-10-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-120-1
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . 10-70-1 LUBRICATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . .70-60-1
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . 70-50-1 MAIN RELIEF VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-30-1
ENGINE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . 70-10-1 MAINTENANCE SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM . . . . 10-90-1 MINI TRACK LOADER IDENTIFICATION 
ENGINE SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . 70-20-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
FIRE PREVENTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 MUFFLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70-30-1
FLYWHEEL AND ENGINE MOUNTING NEUTRAL START INTERLOCKS . . . .10-170-1
BRACKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-120-1 NEUTRAL START SENSOR . . . . . . . .60-60-1
FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 OIL COOLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-90-1
FUEL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80-1 OPERATOR PLATFORM . . . . . . . . . . .50-90-1

INDEX-01 MT85 Service Manual

PARKING BRAKE (EARLY MODELS)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40-10-1
PARKING BRAKE (LATER MODELS)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40-11-1
PIVOT PINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-140-1
PORT RELIEF VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . .20-40-1
REAR DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-30-1
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
SERIAL NUMBER LOCATIONS . . . . . . . . 1-13
SERVICE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-50-1
SERVICE TOOLS REQUIRED . . . . SPEC-70-1
SPARK ARRESTER MUFFLER . . . . .10-130-1
STARTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60-40-1
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS FOR BOLTS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPEC-30-1
TOWING THE MINI LOADER . . . . . . .10-40-1
TRACK CARRIAGE COMPONENTS . .40-20-1
TRANSPORTING THE MINI LOADER ON A
TRAILER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-30-1

INDEX-02 MT85 Service Manual

Bobcat®, the Bobcat logo and the colors of the Bobcat machine are registered trademarks of
Bobcat Company in the United States and various other countries.